This is a guide on XSing every operation in Trauma Team. Oh, bitch, what? And I’ve covered the doctor medals too? And every other thing in this game for that matter?
Daaaayum. Pop da trunk on yo bitch ass nigguh.
| Table of Contents |
|---|
| Introduction |
| General Tips |
| Doctor Medals |
|---|
| Doctor Medals |
| CR-S01 |
| Maria Torres |
| Hank Freebird |
| Tomoe Tachibana |
| Gabriel Cunningham |
| Naomi Kimishima |
| Conclusion |
|---|
| Conclusion |
Introduction
What be happening my piggs in tha trough! Welcome to my newest guide! This one’s for Trauma Team. But you already know that. Like my Second Opinion guide, the purpose of this guide is to get XS ranks in all the operations. Why? because getting XS rank in every operation is the only way to play the game and truly appreciate it. This guide is written assuming that you’re playing on Specialist mode, because this is the only mode where you can get the XS rank. Just so we’re all on the same page, to unlock Specialist mode you have to beat the game once on Resident. Beating it on Intern might work, but who can say for sure? Not me ’cause I’m never touching that. Anyway the main purpose of the guide is getting the XS rank in every operation, however, it also tells you what to do in all of them, so you CAN use this guide as a more general walkthrough if you so desire, though a lot of the tips given throughout might be a bit of… overkill for simply passing the operations.
In fact, some of this shit might be TOO detailed. Some people might get annoyed at how I drone on and on about things that’re obvious. But whatever. Fuck you guys. I’ll be whatever I wanna do. You don’t like it you can get out. So yeah. In this guide you’ll find my morbidly detailed instructions of what to do to get that XS. But in addition to the guide and tips present therein, I also offer you videos demonstrating how to get the XS in every operation. You can find these videos at the end of every article.
As of this writing I haven’t done Specialist. This game is a lot of fun, though I am disappointed that they listened to the imbeciles who said Trauma Center wasn’t “realistic” enough and took out the guilt/stigma style operations as those were always the most fun. Still, the fundamental aspects are still intact, so it’s still an awesome game. But like I said, the REAL fun of this game is going for XS ranks. That’s why this guide focuses on that. Playing the game on Resident? That’s just the precursor to the real deal!
That’s not all you’ll find in this guide, however. No, this guide ALSO covers the filler missions that require zero skill, as well as all of the doctor medal challenges. So, I suppose you could call this guide complete, even if its main purpose is to get the XS ranks.
Let me just say that my love for this series can’t be understated. In fact, in my mind, not only is Trauma Center one of the best things to ever happen, it’s also the only game that truly gives the Wii a purpose. When I say I’m disappointed I say it out of the utmost love. The masses who pushed for these changes to remove the most fun operations and the healing touch were never true fans. They just don’t get it. They’re akin to people who complain that Ace Attorney isn’t how a real court functions. Hey, newsflash, morons: real courts are BORING. In that same way, the people who asked for all these things to be removed in Trauma Team were basically saying “We want less fun”.
But hey, not all is lost. What IS still in there seems sound. Now then, will you join me in this journey? I’m sure it’ll be fun! And who knows? Maybe I can help you.
General Tips
The golden rule when it comes to XSing this game is practice, practice, practice. This guide aims to help you in this endeavor, but like most action games, no amount of tips and no amount of knowledge can ever substitute actual experience. So get in there and do stuff. Get comfortable with the tools, with the wiimote, with the nuances of the game. You should be so used to it that you can switch between tools without even thinking.
Generally speaking, I recommend using the B button in favor of the A button. In fact, you should never press the A button unless you’re forced to, such as when using the forceps or doing Hank’s operations.
Do not use the wiimote jacket or any other accessory of that kind. If you’re doing something that requires precision, hold the wiimote near the top part rather than the bottom, place your thumb around the area to the left, slightly bottom-left of the d-pad and upper left of the A button and grip firmly with it. In my experience this affords greater control. You should grip with the tip of your thumb so that you’re not actually pressing the A button, but if you have to, you can simply bring the rest of it down and easily press it with the joint between the proximal and distal phalanges while still maintaining the grip.
When using tools, sometimes it’s a good idea to keep the control stick HELD DOWN in the position you want. This not only makes it so that you switch to that tool instantly as soon as people are done talking/a transition ends, but it also makes it less likely that it slips when moving back to the neutral position. Obviously this shouldn’t be done if you’re going to use a certain tool for an extended period of time, but it certainly helps when you’re quickly switching between different ones.
Do NOT leave the Trauma Team disc inside the Wii after you’re done playing and turn it off. Eject it and put it back inside the case. This is so important and people overlook it because they’re lazy. The thing is, leaving the disc inside the console might be fine with your 360 or your PS3, but on the Wii it can cause disc read problems. This results in things like longer loading times and slightly reduced framerate which can negatively impact the movement of the pointer and the timing on certain things, and by correlation your performance, possibly without you even noticing. This isn’t a problem exclusive to Trauma Team since I’ve seen it happen in at least one other game. If you notice that loading times seemed to have gotten longer or that music isn’t starting immediately like it should, eject the disc and then put it back in. This should fix the problem.
For Hank’s operations, most of the time you don’t have to use the nunchuck at all. Furthermore, his operations usually require more precision than the others. Sometimes it can be a pretty good idea to use both your hands to keep the remote steadier and to achieve better control. Especially when it feels like you’re starting to tremble a lot.
Keep your elbow free. If you’re sitting normally in a chair (not a stool. And if you’re sitting on a stool… man why you be so ghetto?), your elbow may be pressed on the back. You might THINK this would be good but it’s not. It slightly hampers your movement because you’re restricted to only your forearm. Sit a bit to the side so your elbow can freely move back and forth. In this way you can use both your forearm and upper arm to move the pointer, which is just natural. Also, try not to be too far away from the TV.
For Tomoe’s operations, you know how in gears of war leaving the camera sensitivity on default is the equivalent of pasting a post-it note on your back that says “Please shove a shotgun up my ass”? Well, the same thing applies to Endoscopy, so make sure that the camera sensitivity is set to max before you do anything.
One of the beautiful things about this game is that very few things are out of your control. Whereas in more traditional action games there are a lot of things happening, not all of which you might see, such as the classic fireball of doom from offscreen, in Trauma Center everything happens onscreen. Obviously when you use the magnification tool to look around not everything is onscreen, but even then you know what is happening and what will happen. There is very little of what I call the random bullshit factor. You are aware of everything. When you fail, try to see what you did wrong. Try to see where it is that you can improve. Look at my videos and try to see what you’re doing differently and how this can affect the outcome.
Always try your best to stay calm. This is the most beneficial state in which you can play the game. Getting agigated or angry will only lower your skill. The problem is that adrenaline, or epinephrine, is a fight or flight hormone. Basically it prepares the entire body including the muscles for emergency actions such as running or fighting. But it does not prepare the muscles for precision work of the kind you need to succeed in this game. Quite the opposite. It gives you what I call the jitters. This isn’t quite as much of a problem in most games because it’s not going to affect how you press buttons. But it can be crippling in a game where you have to keep your arm steady.
This is why keeping a calm mind is so important. There are many methods you can use to help calm you. When you feel overwhelmed, take a small break, just a few minutes is fine, stand up, walk around a little, stare out the window. Surf the net, read a little. The benefits of doing this are actually two-fold: not only does it help calm your mind, but also your wrist. It’s no secret that prolonged use of the wiimote causes quite a bit of wrist pain. Even more if you suffer from carpal tunnel syndrome. Resting for a few minutes in between retries does wonders to help prepare you for the next operation. In a related note, it’s also possible that your hands can get deathly cold while playing the game, especially if you live in a cold place. This can hamper you a little, so I recommend washing them in hot water every now and then. This might only be a temporary solution but it helps and gives you an excuse to take a quick break.
Sometimes there are some operations that are so long that your wrist can get very tired before they’re over. In these situations, pausing the game and resting for a few seconds or minutes isn’t a bad idea.
If you are very tired or need sleep, it’s probably also a good idea to do so, as it can negatively affect your performance. You want to be calm, but you also want to be alert. You don’t want to lean too far to either side.
When you fail, try not to blame outside forces. This is a psychological defense mechanism that manifests in a surprising amount of people. It might make you feel better, but it tends to hinder improvement. I can guarantee that everything in this game is fair, balanced, and reasonable. In fact, Trauma Team in general is much too lenient in my book. If it were up to me it would be way, way harder. So don’t blame your failures on the game. Don’t say “The hit detection is off,” or “It’s random,” or “The wiimote isn’t good enough”. Instead say “My hand slipped,” “I wasn’t fast enough,” or “I haven’t practiced enough”. Only by accepting responsibility can you strive to change what has gone wrong before.
Frozen in Time
Special Bonus
-Miss < 0 times
-Cool > 7 times
-Operation completed in 90 sec
-Blood pool formed < 6 times
Aight, you ready for this?! Let’s get that XS! This operation isn’t too hard but it’ll still probably take you a few tries since it’s the first one and we’re fresh outta pussy mode so we’re in a totally complacent attitude, what with how easily we’ve been coasting through everything up till now. Hopefully the rest of the game isn’t that easy huh?
So. There are three things you gotta keep in mind for this operation. Firstly, the time limit. It’s 90 seconds and it’s pretty strict, so we’re gonna have to be fast and shave time in as many places as possible. Secondly, you have to get cools in everything. Everything. If you get even a single good, you will not get the XS so this is important. Unlike previous Trauma Center games, vitals are irrelevant. The fourth special bonus is also irrelevant. It’s too easy and you’re going to get it every time, so just ignore it. Finally, of course it goes without saying, but don’t get any misses. if you do, it’s over. Just retry that noise.
Unlike previous Trauma Centers, you can’t hit the skip button before the operation has started. The hell is up with that? It’s a problem because having to press that button all the way down there forces you to change the position of your hand on the wiimote, and it costs precious seconds to readjust. Fortunately there’s a way to avoid this. Don’t press skip at the start. Let Hank say his first line, and then press A to bring up the tutorial screen. THEN press the skip button while the tutorial screen is up. Skip will activate, but the tutorial screen will have stopped time and it won’t go away until you press A, giving you plenty of time to readjust the position of your hand.
Now, hold the stick in the position of the stabilizer and keep the pointer hovering over the spot where the stabilizer bottle will appear, and once you’re ready, press A to get that tutorial out of the way and begin. As soon as that happens, fill up the syringe and quickly inject all of it into the patient. You don’t have to fill it up completely, but if you get too little you won’t be allowed to proceed, so make sure you get a good amount. 1/2 to 3/4s of the syringe should be safe. As soon as you’ve finished pumping in the stabilizer, the dotted line for the lobectomy will appear. So what you want to do here is first switch to the antibiotic gel and spread it from right to left across the line once, then quickly switch to the scalpel and make the incision from left (where the pointer should already be) to right. This’ll allow us to shave a tiny bit more time off.
Now we’re inside the patient’s heart. Have the control stick pointed to the ultrasound while the screen is moving in, and then start press A (or B) on the center of the heart. It’ll take a few presses, but watch the area while you’re doing it and as soon as you see the syringe icon come up, that’s your cue to quickly switch to it because the yellow vial has now been made available. Fill the syringe with it and quickly inject it into the shadow. If you’re too slow the shadow AS WELL AS THE VIAL will disappear. In which case just restart. But anyway. It’s not necessary to fill it all the way but if you don’t get enough nothing will happen so make sure you pump in a good amount. Once you do that, the incision line will appear. No need to use any gel on this one, just switch to your scalpel and cut through the dots in one stroke, if possible. If you miss a dot it’s no biggie, just go back to it quickly, but make sure you don’t release the button until the incision has been made, even if you have to go back.
When that’s done, switch to the drain because three blood pools will come out. We gotta drain ’em. What you want to do here is drain the whole thing in 2 shots. Because two pools will always be close to one another, place the drain in between them so you drain them both at the same time and then drain the remaining one. This’ll help shave off some more time. Make sure you have the A button held down the entire time while using the drain. Then, when the last pool has been cleared, don’t release the A button! Quickly switch to the forceps. If you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! That’s a hot tip from me to you. Now. You’ll have to grab the wound from both sides to close it. I like grabbing the right side first but it’s up to you. So grab the right side and yank it to the left, then grab the left side and yank that to the right. You don’t have to be delicate or anything, just do it fast.
When that’s done, you’ll have to suture it. THIS is the part where you can shave the most time off if you can suture fast. BUT, you also have to make absolutely sure that you get the cool. Here’s a few tips. First of all, even though the line is slightly curved to the right, this is just a trick. You are not supposed to suture along the wound, as one would of course assume. To get that cool, you should suture as if both ends of the wound were connected by a STRAIGHT line, and not the curved line the game shows you. To get the cool for these wounds you should make around 7 passes with the sutures, but don’t worry because there’s a lot of leeway. Generally speaking I like to go with more passes than necessary so I usually make around 10. Make sure that you suture VERY fast. Don’t count the number of passes, just go with what feels right and it should work out if you’ve practiced enough and have gotten a subconscious feel for how many passes are necessary. If you haven’t, then keep trying until you do! Remember the proper suturing technique: Do it by snapping your wrist right to left as you move your arm top to bottom. Also make sure you stay within the imaginary straight line connecting the two ends of the wound.
There’s a second shadow that we have to take care of. However, now that the yellow vial is available, there is no need to use the ultrasound! In fact, I fucking order you to not use it. It’s just a waste of precious seconds. What I recommend doing from here on out is to MEMORIZE where the shadows will appear so that you can inject them without having to search for them. This next one is on the left side of the heart. Inject the yellow juice into the general area where it’s supposed to be to make the incision line appear. Don’t worry, the area is pretty huge so there’s a lot of leeway for where the game will accept the injection without giving you a miss. As usual, if you DO somehow get a miss, just restart the operation.
Anyway, make the incision, drain the blood, close the wound and suture it up just like you did the last time. I don’t need to repeat myself on this right? Just look at the previous paragraphs if you already forgot what to do, you god damn amnesiac. Ahem. Anyway. When you’re done with that, there will be a LOOOOOONG lull during which nothing happens. You’ll have to wait here. Inject stabilizer on the patient while you’re waiting and get his vitals all the way to max. You’ll still have to wait a long time even after doing this so uh. Go make a sandwich or som’n. Kidding. You CAN actually switch to the ultrasound and wave it around fast to decrease the waiting time. Who knew. Either way, while you’re waiting, make sure to have the pointer right above the tools because this is where the next thing you have to use will pop up. It’s the HAND! As SOON as it appears press A on it to activate it, then move the cursor over to the center of the heart, slightly to the right. Press A there and hold it down for a second until the yellow vial appears (who was the asshole who took it out?!). When it does, fill the syringe and inject it into the area you were palpating just before. This’ll make the incision line appear. You know what to do! Same procedure.
When that’s done, there’ll still be two more shadows to take care of. As I said before, you should memorize their locations so that you can inject them WITHOUT palpating. One is on the left side and the other is on the top right side. Choose either one and take care of it before moving on to the next one. You CAN technically do them both at the same time but there’s no need for that, plus, an extra blood pool will form if you do it this way. So just take ’em one at a time. Same as before. As always, make sure you get a cool EVERY single time and make sure you don’t miss. If you fail in either of these just restart.
That’ll be the end of it. But don’t relax just yet! We still gotta close up the patient. This last suturing job will be horizontal, unlike the previous ones, which makes it harder and slower. Why? Because snapping your wrist up and down just doesn’t feel as natural as left to right. So you’ll probably do this one slower. But don’t worry, if you’ve done everything correctly up till now you should have plenty of time remaining! So just take your time. This one requires around 7 passes, just like the previous ones. Remember to stay more or less within the red area while doing it, as well as within the left and right points of the opening. Do it right and make sure to get the cool, then switch to the antibiotic gel and spread it multiple times on the incision area. Don’t keep the button pressed the entire time though! You have to the release and press the button again at LEAST once to do it properly. Keep that in mind. Keep applying the gel until you get the ok, then grab the bandage. This is the last step and you have to do it RIGHT. If you don’t get the cool here you will have failed so take it slow if you have to. The trick to getting said cool here is to make sure the bandage covers the whole line BUT don’t go any farther than that. That is to say, start from the left point where the line begins, and then end it at JUST the very end of the line without going too much past it. You can do it vice versa if you want but whatever.
And that’s it for the first mission! If you did things properly you should have gotten all 8 cools and finished with more than 20 seconds to spare. I’m sure you can even get that down to 30 seconds to spare if you try hard enough buuut it’s not necessary so whatever. As long as you did these things your score should be above 9000 points which will give you the XS. If it’s below 9000 you will have failed.
Foul Mood
Special Bonus
-No misses
-No burns worsened
-Cool > 8 times
-Gauze not thrown away automatically
Ok, this operation is ultra short so it might SEEM like it’ll be easy but you have to be speedy gonzales to hit the time limit for the XS so it’ll probably take a few tries. You’ll have to shave time off in as many ways as you can and know exactly what to do at every point. If you hesitate too much you probably won’t make it. But don’t worry, if you follow my tips you’ll get it no problem.
Like I said before though, this operation is short so it’s almost impossible to get tired before it’s over. Just like the first CR-S01 mission, I recommend using the tutorial trick here:
Unlike previous Trauma Centers, you can’t hit the skip button before the operation has started. The hell is up with that? It’s a problem because having to press that button all the way down there forces you to change the position of your hand on the wiimote, and it costs precious seconds to readjust. Fortunately there’s a way to avoid this. Don’t press skip at the start. Let Maria say her first line, and then press A to bring up the tutorial screen. THEN press the skip button while the tutorial screen is up. Skip will activate, but the tutorial screen will have stopped time and it won’t go away until you press A, giving you plenty of time to readjust the position of your hand.
Before getting rid of the tutorial screen, position the cursor on the bottom-right part of the screen where the gauze will appear. This will allow you to grab it as soon as possible once you press A. However. Keep in mind that it takes a fraction of a second for the gauze to become available so don’t jump the gun either. Wait about 0.3 seconds and then grab it with A.
Now, as you can see there are 3 blood pools on this guy. Keep in mind that a single gauze will only absorb two pools of blood. It cannot absorb three. That means you will have to use two for these pools. First absorb the single pool on the right. Don’t bother with the other two. When it has been fully absorbed, quickly grab a second gauze from the bottom right and then place it between the two pools on the left two absorb them at the same time. This’ll help you save some time. It’s important to switch the gauze after dealing with the single pool without touching the other two because if you absorb the other ones with the same gauze you run the risk of soaking it and losing the fourth special bonus.
Once that blood has been dealt with, you’ll automatically move to the bottom part of the torso where you’ll be able to see two burns. Have the control stick pointed up for the antibiotic gel and as soon as you regain control, hell, even before, start spreading the gel back and forth over both burns. BOTH burns. Not one first and then the other. Both at the same time. If you take them both individually you won’t make it. Also remember not to hold down the button the entire time while applying it. You’ll have to release the button and press it again at least 2 times before you’re given the ok.
Once you’ve gotten the ok on both, quickly switch to the forceps and grab the synthetic membranes from the tray on the left. Place them one right after the other on both burns. Do it fast but make sure you don’t get a miss. Remember proper forceps technique: Make sure you have the A button held down the entire time when you’ve finished using the gel. Then, when it comes time to pick up the synthetic membranes, don’t release the A button! Quickly switch to the forceps. If you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! That’s a hot tip from me to you.
After placing both membranes, quickly gel over them. This time it’ll only take a single pass or two to get the ok. When that happens, very quickly switch to the tape. We want to tape over these two membranes fast BUT it’s important that you get cools in every single one or else you won’t get the XS. It’s not too difficult though. The trick to getting cools here is to get the tape all the way from one end of the membrane to the other without going over TOO much. Just a little. There’s some leeway so don’t worry, but ideally if you’re only going to tape one membrane you want to have 80% of the tape on the membrane and only 20% outside. 10% on either end. In this operation, however, what I recommend doing is taping BOTH membranes with a single tape. It’s not too hard and it will help save time. Simply move the tape from the top right corner of the top membrane in a straight line all the way to to bottom left corner of the bottom membrane. You’ll get the cool for both and will only have had to apply one tape.
Now the view will automatically shift to the patient’s left arm. The game won’t let you continue until you use a shot of stabilizer so before you even regain control have the stick pointed towards the syringe. As soon as it appears fill up the syringe 3/4s of the way and then pump it wherever you want. It doesn’t even have to be on the patient. Unlike previous Trauma Centers you can just use it on thin air and it’ll still work. Remember to pump ALL of it in. If you don’t use enough, the game won’t let you proceed and you’ll have to do it again, losing a lot of time in the process.
After you finish the injection, hold the control stick towards the gel and begin applying it back and forth over both burns. This’ll be just like the two previous burns. You know the drill. Gel, membrane, gel, tape. The screen will then switch to the patient’s right arm. You’ll have to secure a blood transfusion. This is probably the most dangerous part of the operation so watch it! First gel over the spot. It doesn’t take much gel at all. Just apply a bit for a fraction of a second and then immediately move the cursor to the bottom right where the needle will be. Grab it with a then CALM DOWN. Make absolutely sure that you jam it in on the green dot. This is the easiest part to fail on if you’re not careful. That green dot is not lenient at all. You’ll need New Blood levels of precision to hit it, so don’t rush this part. Or, actually, go ahead and rush it if you want. I mean this operation is less than a minute long. It’s not like you’ll lose much if you have to start over. It’s up to you. Either way, once you’ve put the needle in, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circle that appears to the right of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it.
You’ll now move on to the second patient. His vitals will be ridiculously low but do not, I repeat, DO NOT use any stabilizer. If you’ve done things correctly up till now you can treat him without wasting time raising vitals at all.
There are three burns here. Spread gel evenly across all 3 of them, then quickly place the membranes but be careful not to get any misses. Gel over them and then switch to the tape. You’ll have to use 2 tapes here. Get the top two burns with a single tape from right to left and then get the bottom one from top to bottom. That’s how I like to do it anyway, it’s up to you. Once you tape the last burn she’ll flatline. You’ll now start doing chest compressions. Loosen up for this. Begin smacking down the wii remote as if you were hammering a nail with it. Make the motions big and strong to make sure it registers. Make sure to begin doing it as SOON as the hands appear. Hammer down each time the hands on the screen come down. You CAN simply hammer rapidly with no regards to anything and still get the cool but that’s tiring and there’s no reason to do that when doing it in tandem is so easy.
After 5 compressions you’ll get the cool. For the last manuever you’ll be doing an intubation. This is pretty easy and lenient so you can do it fast without having to be very precise. Point the cursor on the blue circle at the top of the tube and hold down A, then move the pointer in a straight line down all the way to the bottom, then release the A button, move the pointer again to the blue circle, hold down A and repeat it. Keep doing this the 3 or 4 times it takes until the tube is all the way in and you’re done!
As long as you get all the special bonuses, which isn’t too hard, and finish in less than 50 seconds, which you should if you did everything I told you, you will get that XS rank. It might seem tough at first but I finished in 42 seconds so less than 50 is definitely not unreasonable at all.
The Big Guy
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Chain > 2200
-Operation completed in 150 sec
-Treatment halted < 2 times
Aight bitches. This operation, like all of Hank’s missions, is a lot of fun, but it’s no longer drop dead easy like it was on Resident difficulty. No, this is serious business now. It’s probably going to take many tries to XS, but is all good since it’s so fun. Plus I just love how the music gets steadily better as you build a higher chain. That’s such win.
First off, let it be known that this operation is going to be very precision intensive, so let’s go over proper wii remote holding technique again:
If you’re doing something that requires precision, hold the wiimote near the top part rather than the bottom, place your thumb around the area to the left, slightly bottom-left of the d-pad and upper left of the A button and grip firmly with it. In my experience this affords greater control. You should grip with the tip of your thumb so that you’re not actually pressing the A button, but if you have to, you can simply bring the rest of it down and easily press it with the joint between the proximal and distal phalanges while still maintaining the grip. Grip the remote FIRMLY to keep it steady and have your wrist bending slightly downward. This will cause carpal tunnel pain after a while, but it keeps your hand steadier.
We need to do this operation VERY fast so start by using the tutorial screen trick:
Unlike previous Trauma Centers, you can’t hit the skip button before the operation has started. The hell is up with that? It’s a problem because having to press that button all the way down there forces you to change the position of your hand on the wiimote, and it costs precious seconds to readjust. Fortunately there’s a way to avoid this. Don’t press skip at the start. Let Hank say his first line, and then press A to bring up the tutorial screen. THEN press the skip button while the tutorial screen is up. Skip will activate, but the tutorial screen will have stopped time and it won’t go away until you press A, giving you plenty of time to readjust the position of your hand.
Memorize where the incision circle will appear and place the pointer near that before getting rid of the tutorial screen. Now, make the incision. Press and hold the A button on the blue circle at the top and make a straight line through the guideline. The B button will not work so don’t try. Also throughout this entire operation the control stick will be irrelevant.
Now we’re inside. This operation will consist of cutting around 5 adenoma with the scalpel. To do this, press and hold A on the blue circle and then follow the blue guideline WITHOUT straying too far from it. If you do, you’ll get a miss and it’ll all be over. In which case you should restart. But also, you get more points if you follow the blue line closely than if you’re a bit off so try to stay within it. Also keep an eye on the yellow guideline that is moving in front of you. You’re supposed to chase after this yellow line BUT don’t go too fast because if you overtake it you will get a miss.
Now then. Here are a few general tips for this procedure:
Don’t blink! And if you must blink, keep it down to a minimum, and especially don’t blink during the particularly precarious spots. Blink several times in between each tumor.
Squint your eyes slightly. This’ll help keep you from blinking.
Keep your breaths shallow. A deep breath can cause your hand to move too much, and we don’t want that. In fact, you might want to just plain not breathe at all on the most dangerous parts.
Bite your lower lip. This might sound like a joke but it really does increase precision! Don’t ask me how. You know how to do this. Just make a dat ass expression. For proper dat ass technique, consult Maurice Richards, AKA Rich Boy:
This is a questionable technique, but, since the control stick is irrelevant during this procedure, you can try to support your right hand with your left (vice versa if you’re a lefty) to help keep it steady. It sometimes helps BUT I don’t fully recommend doing this because in my experience using one hand keeps it more loose to move faster, plus when using both hands I end up having to move my body rather than just my arm, thirdly, it SEEMS that when using both hands sometimes I’ll make a sudden jerky movement, which I ASSUME is because although both hands keep it steadier, it also makes it harder to coordinate slight movements. So yeah, try it out and see how it feels but I’ll go with single handed.
You should already know this, but once you start cutting DO NOT let go of the A button until you’re finished.
Memorize where the blue circle will appear on each adenoma so that you lose as little time as possible starting. Every little bit helps.
So ok. Let’s cut up these hoes. Something you should be aware of is that the first two adenoma are fundamentally different from the last 3 based on their size. For the first two, you should excise them VERY fast. You will not be able to do it fast for the last 3 so make sure you save as much time as possible on these two small ones by being as fast as you can. However, don’t be TOO fast either because if you overtake the yellow guideline that you’re supposed to follow, you’ll get a miss. Stay as close to the speed limit as possible.
After that, you’ll have to deal with large ones. As I said earlier, these are different because they’re so big. The camera will move and follow the yellow guideline, which makes this different. First off, know that unlike the 2 small ones, you cannot rush here. The yellow guideline will go faster if you stay close to it (so you should), but nowhere near as fast as on the small ones. Secondly, keep in mind that the camera will move the cursor for you, which means that in a lot of places you should simply “ride” the camera and let it take you forward while you simply concentrate on staying within the guideline. Note that if you do this, the yellow line will go faster than you and then start slowing down until you eventually stop, so you still have to move forward yourself a little bit every now and then.
The final adenoma is the tough one. Why? Because there are two places where the guideline becomes CRAZY narrow, making it easy to go off. You have to be super careful in these parts. More than any other place, these narrow spots are where you shouldn’t blink and shouldn’t breathe and should ride the camera so that it moves slower. That’s about all the advice I can give you, other than that it’s just practice until you’re rock solid!
Once that’s done, it’ll be time to close the patient up. You’ll be using the stapler. While the screen is transitioning, grab the remote with both hands and turn it sideways clockwise. Press and hold the A button so that you can use by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Now watch the guideline and make minute changes to the angle of your remote until you match it. Position the cursor so that your remote overlaps the guideline. There’s some leeway, but try to have it overlap as perfectly as you can. Remember, don’t rush on this part! Sure, it’s a race against the close for the XS, but if you did things correctly before and shaved time off in as many places as you could, you should still have some seconds to spare. If you get a miss or even a good here it will all have been for nothing so stay crispy. You don’t have to change the angle of the remote AT ALL for these 5 staples, all you have to do is change the position of the cursor (that is to say, go down), so once you have the angle right you can do all 5 reasonably fast.
And that’ll be all! As long as you didn’t miss and didn’t stop, the only thing you have to worry about is doing it fast enough so that you finish in less than 2:20. You need more than 9600 score for the XS.
Insecure Smiles
Special Bonus
-No Bads
-Stomach treated in 60 sec
-Ran into wall < 2 times
-Vitals didn’t fall below 15
Our first endoscopic operation! …in hard of course. This one’s actually not all that tough. It shouldn’t take very many tries to get the XS rank. Aight, so. First let’s talk posture. Endoscopy is quite different from the other specialties so we have to change our approach accordingly.
Have your arm pulled all the way back so that your wrist is touching the side of your torso. Lean back on your chair. That’s the neutral position. When moving the endoscope forward, you want to do it as fast as you can and without having to back into neutral position midway if you can help it. From the neutral position, to go forward simply hold down A+B and extend your arm out in front of you. You can get a lot of distance this way and very fast. Once your arm is completely extended, you should begin leaning your entire body forward to get even more distance. If you do this, you’ll be able to get to a lot of destinations without having to waste time retracting your arm, as we’ll soon see. Just remember that you’re supposed to lean towards the sensor bar and not the TV. Seems obvious but sometimes we may forget.
Now then, let’s begin. Press the skip button while holding the control stick in any direction. Why? Because the game forces us to do pointless things before proceeding. Keep holding the control stick in any direction to move your view until the game snaps you back into place. Next, we’re supposed to go forward a bit. This is a part where the things I told you before come in handy. If you extend your arm and then lean forward with your body you’ll be able to clear the entire distance you’re supposed to in a single go without wasting any time retracting your arm. Watch when the blue arrows change and point backwards. That’s when you stop going forward and start going back. Use the auto retract by pressing down on the d-pad if you want to keep it easy or do it manually if you want to do it faster.
Anyway, let’s proceed. Start going forward for realz this time until you get to the first blood pool and the game automatically centers your view on it. Not so fast though! You still need to get a tiny bit closer to it before the drain becomes available. Do so. Now open up the tools by pressing C and switching to the drain. Don’t press C again to close it, just press Z immediately to begin using the tool. Be careful though, it’s not all that uncommon to accidentally have the stick slip and choose the wrong tool and have to waste time opening up the toolbox again. Center the view on the blue circle and drain the blood. After that, keep going forward. It’s quite a distance so you’ll have to retract your arm a few times. Plus, there’s a curve in the path here and you have to be careful not to hit the wall. If you do, restart because you’ve lost.
When you get to the next part with affected area, first take care of the blood pools since you already have the drain out. Then center on the hemorrhaging area and switch to the hemostatic forceps. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. The timing probably takes a bit of practice to get down. What I recommend is doing it enough times that you more or less have a “feel” for how much time is required before letting go of the button. On top of watching of course. Remember that you need to get cools in every place where it’s possible to get them. If you get a good, just restart because you’re not getting the XS. If another blood pool has formed, quickly drain it and let’s move on.
You can get to the next affected area in one shot by extending your arm and then leaning forward! This one requires the syringe, so center the camera on the blue circle and choose the needle. To get the cool on these you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it. After treating that, another inflammation will appear a bit ahead. Move forward and treat it in exactly the same way. Immediately after you do that, the game will center your vision on a new blue circle that will have appeared. It’s a hidden inflammation! Switch to the spray and use it here to reveal it, then treat it with the syringe same as always.
When you’re done with that, keep going forward. We’re almost up to the stomach. You’ll see the passage opening and closing. We gotta go through it quickly while it’s open but chill out a bit! The second special bonus dictates that once we’re inside the stomach, we have to finish in less than 60 seconds. So before we go in, take some time to raise vitals. That’s because the fourth special bonus dictates that we shouldn’t let vitals fall below 15. To ensure this, you’ll have to inject at least two full syringes of stabilizer. Keep an eye on the passage while you’re doing this. If it opens after you’ve injected the second one, quickly go through it. If it’s still closed, then start injecting a third one but immediately stop once it opens and go through.
Now we’re in the stomach area. As I said earlier, we have to finish up in less than 60 seconds so it helps to have the general layout of the affected areas memorized. Also keep an eye on the radar because it will tell you the locations of stuff as well. As soon as you go in, you’ll see a blood pool on the wall to your right. Treat it with the drain. After that, quickly advance to the wall on the back opposite the passage you came from. Move to the bottom of this wall where you’ll spot an area with hemorrhaging as well as blood pools. As a general rule, you should treat these hemorrhaging areas before the inflammations because they create additional blood pools if you leave them alone, which will make you waste time. Drain the blood pools and then use the hemostatic forceps. When that’s done, look to the right where you’ll find a lone blood pool. Drain it. Now check the radar. If you’re lucky there will only be one dot left on the wall opposite to this one. If there are more, go and treat those first. Now use the syringe on this inflammation. Remember, if you’ve gotten any goods restart the operation. After dealing with this one, a single blood pool will appear on the wall behind you. Go drain it. When you do this, another dot will appear behind you on the radar. This is the last one, but be careful because it’s invisable for one day! Watch the radar. Move until the dot is about halfway between your own dot and the fringe of the radar, then move the camera up or down until the dot turns blue. This indicates that it’s right in front of you. Switch to the spray to reveal it and then inject it with the syringe to end the operation!
This one isn’t too tough. As usual, you MUST get all the cools available. The vitals must have also been above 15 the entire time, which shouldn’t be a problem if you raised them before the stomach where I told you to and did the stomach fast enough. Finally, to get the XS rank you must have finished the entire operation in less than 2 minutes. Shouldn’t be a problem. This operation can be beaten in like 1:40. Hell, maybe even 1:30 if you’re crazy enough.
Uninvited Guest
Special Bonus
-Miss < 0 times
-Vitals didn’t fall below 45
-Mucus treated < 20 times
-Shadow disappeared < 1 times
Hoooly black voodoo jesus this is getting good! This mission is difficult and will take quite a few tries to XS. But we wouldn’t have it any other way!
Pretty much the only thing to keep in mind during this operation is keeping the vitals above 50. Which is harder that it at first might seem once shit hits the fan and all those tumors start forming.
As soon as the operation starts there’ll be a patch of tumors on the patient’s chest. Laser them all off without letting go of the button until they’re all gone, then gel them. Then switch to the ultrasound. There’s a shadow underneath the part where the tumors had formed. You’ll need to hit that shadow with the ultrasound to make the scalpel available. Once it is, get it and slash a vertical line across the shadow to bring out the big tumor. Switch to the drain and get rid of the mucus, then switch back to the scalpel and excise it. Do it quickly but not so fast that you miss dots. Ideally you want to hit all the dots in one go. But if you miss any, eh, whatever. Just go back to them without letting go of the button. When that’s done, you’ll be able to pick up the tumor with the forceps. Put it on the tray to the right, then grab the synthetic membrane from the tray on the left and place it CAREFULLY on the wound. If you do this incorrectly it’s all over so do it fast but don’t get careless either. After that, switch to the gel and apply it all over it. Keep holding down the button and move over to the left side while applying the gel because the incision line will have now appeared. You can disinfect it in the same motion, which is neat. Now, switch to the scalpel and let’s go inside!
Oh noes! The intestine is full of inflammations! But don’t worry, this isn’t New Blood where inflammations were a million times more terrifying than Cardia. You don’t have to inject EXACTLY in the inflammation points, you have a bit of leeway. In fact, it might even be more lenient than Second Opinion. That’s right. So let’s go for it! Before we begin, here’s something to keep in mind: a full syringe gives you enough to treat one large spot OR three small ones. Secondly, it’s a good idea to use what I call the warping strategy to shave a few seconds off your time:
When filling the syringe or injecting with it, you may notice that as long as you have the button pressed, and as long as the syringe hasn’t finished filling up/emptying out, you can move the wiimote as much as you want and the cursor won’t move. But as soon as the syringe is done filling/emptying, the cursor will appear where you are currently pointing the remote. Using this trick, you can save some time. You can move the remote over to the anti-inflammatory bottle while the syringe is injecting, and when it’s done you can immediately fill it up again. It works the same the other way. While it’s filling up you can move over to an inflammation and inject it immediately.
Now then, let’s treat this muhfugga. There will be 3 small spots and 2 large ones. Fill up the syringe and quickly take care of the 3 small ones without refilling. Then refill again, inject it into a large one, refill again, and inject it into the other large one. Once this is done, you’ll be allowed to move with the magnification tool, also known in some circles as the ultrasound. So when that happens, quickly switch to that and move the cursor to the left, then press B to move over to the left side of the organ from where you are. You’ll find two more inflammations here. A small and a large one. Take care of them both, then move the magnification tool directly up all the way to the top left part of the organ. Here you’ll find 5 more inflammations, 2 big and 3 small. Like in the first part, fill up your syringe to full and take care of the 3 small ones in one shot without refilling, then individually refill for the two large ones. When you’re done with that, the vitals should be in the 60s already, so take some time to pump a full syringe of stabilizer or two before proceeding.
After that, it’ll be time to take care of the 3 big tumors hidden inside the organ. What you want to do here is play the mission enough times that you can memorize the location of the three tumors. One is on the left part of the organ, the other is on the top right side, and the other one is on the bottom. Don’t waste time using the ultrasound on them. Just slash where they are supposed to be to get them out fast.
To treat them, I recommend treating two at the same time, and then the third one. Let’s take the left one and the bottom one. Position the camera in such a way that you have full view of both tumors. Then switch to the drain and begin draining the mucus on one, and then the other, then switch to the scalpel and go back to the FIRST one you drained. Excise it along the dotted line but make sure to do it fast because that mucus comes back pretty fast. Once the first one is excised very quickly do the same thing for the second one before the mucus reappears. When that’s done, switch to the forceps and move both tumors one right after the other to the tray, then grab two synthetic membranes and place them over the wounds, do it fast but be careful not to get a miss here. Finally gel over them.
Now move on to the third tumor on the top right side. Treat it the same way you did the others. Slash, drain, excise, pick up, place the membrane and gel. When you’re done with that, move the magnification tool to the bottom right of the organ because 3 new inflammations will have appeared here. Treat the big one and a small one BUT LEAVE THE LAST SMALL ONE ALONE. Vitals should now be dangerously low, around the 50s. Remember that you CANNOT let the vitals go below 45 or the operation is forfeit. Take this time to pump stabilizer until the vitals are maxed out at 90, then treat the remaining inflammation.
Now we move on to the lung! Switch to the laser here, there will be 4 tumors immediately visible to you. Laser these guys and then gel over them. Then move to the bottom to find 3 more. Laser and gel these too. Then move all the way over to the top to find 4 more. Do the same for these. Once these are done with, it’ll be time to deal with the hidden shadows.
Again, I recommend playing this mission enough times that you can memorize the location of the 4 shadows you have to uncover. This is because you want to deal with them as fast as possible without losing ANY time at all searching around. Time is not on your side after all. The first one is right here in the top part where you’re looking. Feel free to ascertain where the shadow is by hovering the ultrasound over it but don’t use it, just slash where the shadow is supposed to be to uncover it. Then drain the mucus and gel over the wound.
Three more to go. Quickly move alllll the way over to the bottom of the lung. You’ll find the second one you have to treat here. It’s not ALL the way at the bottom, it’s a bit above but you know what I mean. Check my video if you wanna see exactly where it is. Deal with this guy in the same way, drain the mucus and then gel. Once that’s done, move to the center of the lung. The next shadow will be DEAD center. It’s a true tumor. You’ll treat it the same way you did the last 3. Slash it vertically to get it out, drain the mucus, excise along the dotted line, then pick up, put on the tray, place the synthetic membrane and gel over it. One more shadow to go! This last one is VERY close. Don’t even move the camera. It’s to the right of that last one you just treated. Slash it, drain the mucus and then WAIT. Take this time to raise vitals all the way to max again because once you finish treating this last one shit will hit the fan. When you’re ready, gel it.
Now black bruises will engulf the lung, as well as a RETARDED amount of shadows. 4 of them are true tumors and you can memorize their locations (although the 4th will not appear until you’re done with everything else) but the tough part is that the shadows that are only mucus will be MOVING. That will make it extremely hard to deal with because you don’t know exactly where they will be. The only way is to find them with the ultrasound and then slash them before they get away. If you waste too much time searching around for these things the XS will elude you, and trust me, sometimes that last mucus is pretty DAMN sneaky.
But don’t worry, there’s a very important tip I’m going to give you, which you should keep in mind when trying to XS this: the mucus form small tumors periodically. This isn’t just for show. These tumors are very important. When one of them forms, it means the mucus that created it isn’t very far! You MUST use this to your advantage if you want to do this fast enough for the XS without getting lucky. The trick is that, whenever you see a small tumor appear, use the ultrasound around that spot to find a mucus for free without wasting time searching for it!
Anyway back to where I was. Like I said, black bruises will engulf the lung. Do NOT move the camera. Leave it where it is and begin a quick search around this area for moving shadows with the ultrasound. There will be SO MANY that you will find a shitload of them immediately, guaranteed. You want to treat as many of them as possible RIGHT NOW because if you let such a huge number of them roam free the vitals will get annihilated and then you’ll lose too much time just pumping the lung full of stabilizer and treating the small tumors.
I recommend finding and excising at least 4 of them (more is good if you get lucky but don’t go out of your way to search for them). It should only take you about 5 seconds or less. Treat those 4 the same way you’ve done it up to now, and then inject some stabilizer real quick just to stay safe.
Next, move slightly up to where the two stationary large tumors will be. As I said before, memorize their locations. Hover the ultrasound over them if you have to and then slash them to uncover them. HOWEVER, if you happen to see any moving shadows while you’re using the ultrasound take care of those first. Either way, while you’re uncovering those two tumors you should begin to see small tumors forming around. Whenever you see one appear STOP and destroy the mucus shadow that created it before it can get away. You should be able to destroy around 3 more mucus shadows (more if you’re lucky) here before you even start working on the tumors. Take care of the small tumors they create as well. When that’s done begin treating the large tumors. You know what to do! I ain’t gonna repeat myself, but I will say treat them both at the same time to save time. That is to say, drain one first, then the other, then go back to the first one and excise it, then excise the second one before it regains its mucus etc etc. Remember to keep a good eye on the vitals!! If it drops too close to 50 stop whatever it is you’re doing and get it back up. If it drops below 45 you will have failed!
Finish dealing with those two tumors. Be careful because they will create 3 small tumors each when you remove them. It’s nothing special but just sayin’. Remember that if you see a small tumor form somewhere stop what you’re doing and bring out the shadow that created it. When you’re done, move to the bottom part of the organ. A bunch of small tumors will have formed here by now so treat them, then excise the large tumor down on the bottom right part. Again, if you see any small tumors form, deal with the shadow.
After you’re done with this tumor comes the worst part. Now you have to finish killing off the straggler shadows. There should only be a few left by now, which can make things difficult. They’re pretty elusive bastards sometimes and if you spend too much time searching you’ll lose the XS. Nevertheless, move back over to the top where a few small tumors should have formed by now. Make a very quick cursory search around for shadows, if you don’t find anything in 1-3 seconds then start treating the tumors with the laser. Hopefully while you’re doing this some new ones will form which will tell you where the shadows are. At this point you’re pretty much FORCED to search around for the remaining ones. I recommend staying more or less near the center of the lung. You can go 3/4 of the way up or 3/4 of the way down but don’t go all the way. Search around with the ultrasound while keeping an eye out for any tumors that might form which will indicate to you where a shadow is. This is probably the worst part and sometimes you just get plain unlucky and aren’t able to find the last one fast enough. If this happens don’t get discouraged, just restart and try again. It doesn’t actually happen that often.
If it takes you 10 seconds to find the remaining stragglers, that’s pretty good. Anything more than that and you may want to restart. The time limit for this operation is very strict. As soon as you treat the last one, the final large tumor will appear on the left side of the lung. You’ll know because an ultrasound symbol will appear over the place where it’s supposed to be. Don’t worry about vitals at this point unless they’re dangerously close to 45. Just excise that last tumor and treat it as fast as you can. No small tumors will form because the black bruise will have disappeared.
We’re almost done, but make SURE you keep your cool because if you get a good on either the closing suture or the bandage then you will have failed the entire operation. Yeah. No pressure. But no seriously. Be CAREFUL here. That bandage is more dangerous than you might think when you’re under pressure to get the cool. You don’t know how many times I’ve failed this part because my god damn hand is shaking like I got parkinson’s or some shit. Jesus. Anyway if you feel too jittery pause the game and take deep breaths. If you get a good here everything you did will have been for nothing. Go slow for the suture as well. Like the previous CR-S01 operation, this one requires around 7 passes.
Remember to stay more or less within the red area while doing it, as well as within the left and right points of the opening. Do it right and make sure to get the cool, then switch to the antibiotic gel and spread it multiple times on the incision area. Don’t keep the button pressed the entire time though! You have to the release and press the button again at LEAST once to do it properly. Keep that in mind. Keep applying the gel until you get the ok, then grab the bandage. This is the last step and you have to do it RIGHT. If you don’t get the cool here you will have failed so take it slow if you have to. The trick to getting said cool here is to make sure the bandage covers the whole line BUT don’t go any farther than that. That is to say, start from the left point where the line begins, and then end it at JUST the very end of the line without going too much past it. You can do it vice versa if you want but whatever.
And that’s it for this awesome operation! The only special bonus to keep in mind is keeping vitals above 45. All the others will fall into place themselves. As usual, you need to get ALL 21 cools in the entire thing, if you get a single good you will not get the XS. And finally, the hardest part of all, time. You need to do this operation very fast. To get the XS you need around 12200 score. As long as you finish with a clear time of less than 3:40 you will be good for the XS. As you can see in my video, I finished in 3:14 and I’m not even that good so it’s definitely nothing unreasonable.
Maximum Annoyance
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-All patients transported
-Cool > 8 times
-Let go of limb < 2 times
After how ridankalus the previous operation was, this one’s pretty light times. It’s got a few tricks here and there but nothing too serious.
If you press the skip button as soon as possible in this operation it takes like a second for the music to start or the patient’s arm from becoming movable, which gives you plenty of time to point the cursor at the lower right where the bone icon is and press A on it, then move back to the broken arm. After that small lull you’ll see the blue circle appear on his arm. Your cursor should already be here. Press and hold A on it, then move it to the right as far as you can. You’ll have to release the button and grab it a second time to pull it all the way though. Just remember, the second time you grab it you need to press A on the hand itself and not in the blue circle. Two times should be enough to get the ok, and hell, MUST be enough, because if you try more than that, you’ll miss the fourth special bonus. And that’s NO GOOD. The trick with these disclocations is to move the arm FAST. Don’t hold it for very long or vitals will get pulverized. If you do it right you should get it done and have vitals still in the 60s, whereas if you hold it for very long it can get to critical in a couple seconds flat. Don’t worry about being gentle. That’s a lie.
As soon as you’ve done that, and while the game is busy moving the screen up, have your cursor pointed at the lower right where the splint icon will come up. As soon as it does press A on it, then press and hold A on the blue circle that shows up on said splint and ram it all the way to the right. Again, don’t bother with being gentle. Just do it as fast as you can.
Now, after that’s done, the screen will shift again. This time downward. Afterwards, two more icons will pop up on the right. Talk and bandage. Obviously you should have your pointer at talk and press it as soon as it appears. Since you have skip activated, nothing will happen. Just immediately press on the bandage icon after that. You already know how to do this. Same as last time: quickly press and hold A on the white circles that appear to the right of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it for each. That’ll stabilize this patient.
You’ll now switch over to the next patient and-WHAT IS GOING ON HERE. He has a fucking beam jammed in his chest or some shit. Not to mention some wires or whatever. But since this isn’t surgery we can’t treat ’em. Now, if you did the previous part fast enough, and you should have, there will only be 2 blood pools here. Specifically, they will be to the left of the beam. If you took too long before, there will be an extra 2 pools on each wire and that… would not be ideal. So yeah. Make sure there’s only 2 pools. Grab a gauze from the right and place it between both pools to absorb them at the same time. As soon as you’re done with that, the icon for the hyrdaulic cutter will appear. Quickly press it to have our minions begin cutting that beam.
Now this is the tricky part. Immediately after ordering the hydraulic cutter, switch to the syringe and pump 3 full needles of stabilizer on the patient as fast as you can. By about the time you’re done, 2 new pools should appear. Ignore them and switch to the other patient. You know how to do this right? I don’t have to tell you? Oh I do? Damn, where would you be without me? Just press A up there on the patient icons to the right of the vitals. Geez.
Anyway this patient’s got 3 pieces of glass stuck on his chest. Switch to the forceps and begin extracting them. Remeber to use proper forceps technique: If you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! That’s a hot tip from me to you. So anyway, the glass. Remember, you have to get every cool possible or you won’t get the XS, so be swift but also careful. The trick with these guys is to grab them and then pull them out making as straight a line as possible the entire way. Of course, said line must be perpendicular to the cut they’re lodged in. Get them all out one right after the other, and then gel the 3 wounds all at the same time after all the glass has been dealt with.
Once this is done, the camera will pan out. Point the cursor to the bottom right while this is happening, and then press A on the scissors icon. This’ll make the scissors appear. We gotta cut the patient’s shirt off now. Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough but don’t rush so much that you get careless and miss. That would mean the operation has failed! Anyway, when you finish cutting all the way, two wounds’ll be revealed. Well, two wounds and 3 blood pools. Also a third patient will arrive. Ignore that byotch though. Let’s work on these blood pools. Take a gauze and absorb one of the pools. Remember, one gauze will only work on 2 pools before having to be replaced, so after absorbing the one on the right, grab a new one before absorbing the other two. When that’s done, quickly switch to the forceps and begin placing the synthetic membranes from the left tray on the square indicators. However, only place three membranes and then quickly switch back to the first patient. Why? Because the hydraulic cutter has just about finished up and now that patients vitals will drop like it’s HOT. In fact, they should already be critical. But don’t worry about that. Do not raise them. Take a gauze and clean up the two pools under the two wires but DON’T TOUCH THE GOD DAMN WIRES. Don’t place the gauze squarely on the center of the blood pool. Place it about halfway below that so that we don’t get no accidents we won’t regret.
After those two pools are cleaned up, the camera will transition to the patient’s arm. We’ll have to secure a blood transfusion. Vitals are pretty low but again, ignore that! You know how to do this part by now right? Well I guess I could repeat it if you insist… This is probably the most dangerous part of the operation so watch it! First gel over the spot. It doesn’t take much gel at all. Just apply a bit for a fraction of a second and then immediately move the cursor to the bottom right where the needle will be. Grab it with A, then CALM DOWN. Make absolutely sure that you jam it in on the green dot. This is the easiest part to fail on if you’re not careful. That green dot is not lenient at all. You’ll need New Blood levels of precision to hit it, so don’t rush this part or you fail. Either way, once you’ve put the needle in, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circle that appears to the right of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it.
That’ll stabilize that patient. Now we move on back to the one we abandoned earlier. And turns out he’s almost dead! But don’t worry. We got this under control. Ignore the vitals, don’t raise them with stabilizer. Just switch to the forceps and apply the rest of the synthetic membranes, then switch to the tape. We’ll be applying two. Each should stretch all the way across 3 membranes. Remember that you have to get cools on both of them! To do that, simply move the tape in a straight line from the top right corner of the highest membrane on the right to the bottom left corner of the lowest membrane. Same deal for the other one except this time it’s from the bottom right corner to the top left corner.
The screen will now transition to the arm, and we’ll have to secure yet another blood transfusion. This is exactly the same as the last one. Again, be careful when jamming that needle. It’s dangerous and we’re almost done. You don’t want a miss now right? Yeah. Anyway, that’ll stabilize this guy. Now we automatically move on to the next one who is also almost dead but who cares. All we gotta do here is remove 3 glasses just like we did a little bit ago. Remember, straight lines while pulling them out.
And that’s it. To get the XS here you have to finish the entire operation in less than 60 seconds.
Time for Trouble
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Cool screws > 12 times
-Cool drills > 18 times
-Cool mallets > 5 times
Holy black voodoo monkey jesus, this operation is long AND tough. Probably gonna take quite a few tries to XS. Because of that, if your wrist starts to hurt or get tired, take a small break because that’ll negatively affect your performance. Go read some online comics or something, I dunno, and be sure to open your hand and leave it in a neutral position. Once you feel better you can go back in. Something that’s very important is to remember that you cannot get a SINGLE good or you will have failed. That means that if at any point you get something less than a cool, you should probably restart unless you just want to practice the entire thing. So, since we have to be so perfect and the operation is so long, what I recommend here is to take it slow but sure in general, and only go fast in a few key spots that are less dangerous.
Alright, don’t hit the skip button yet because that’ll screw up our grip on the remote. Let Hank and Tomoe say their lines and keep the cursor pointed where the blue circle will pop up. Then press and hold the A button on said blue circle at the top and make a straight line through the guideline. The B button will not work so don’t try.
Hit the skip button while the screen is transitioning, that’ll give you plenty of time to reposition your grip. Also keep holding down the A button. We’ll have to move the broken bone back into place. Have your cursor pointed at the tail end of the dislocated bone, and when the blue circle appears, press and hold B to grab it. Then just move it up to where the yellow silhouette is. Make sure the bone is overlapping with said silhouette and then let it go. Go ahead and do this part fast because it’s easy.
Next we’ll be drilling into the bone. Press and hold A on the blue circle that appears, then move the cursor away from the drill to start moving it in. Try to keep it in more or less a straight line, though don’t worry too much because it’s pretty lenient in this regard. Keep in mind that the farther away you pull the faster the drill goes. To get the cool here you have to bring the tip of the drill as close to the red line at the end without actually touching it. If you do touch it you’ll get a miss and will have to restart the operation. You’ll have to drill two holes. I recommend taking it reasonably slow for this. Pull the drill a lot at first, but once it gets closer to the end move back a little to slow it down. This way you can get the cool without much danger.
Next you’ll have to apply the screws. Watch out, these guys are deceptive. To get the cools on these, look at the yellow silhouette. You’ll be able to see a cross on it. Now look at the screw. See the ring the point is attached to? What you have to do is hold down the A button and then release it when that ring is overlapping with the horizontal part of the cross on the silhouette. Got it? Keep trying, because it’s also important to develop your own subconscious sense of when to release the button.
Next we’ll move on to the leg. There will be 3 bones we have to pick up. Memorize where the blue circle of the leftmost bone will appear and have your cursor hovering over it while the screen is transitioning. Keep the A button held down and grab it by pressing and holding down B, then throw it out on the tray to the right. Do the same for the other two pieces and do this entire part fast because it’s really hard to get a miss. I mean the only way is to drop the bone outside the tray but how is that EVER going to happen unless you’re drunk?
As soon as you drop the third bone, it’ll be time to move the dislocated bones to their proper places. You can do this part pretty fast too because it’s not too tough. Just grab the tip of the bone on the right (specifically, press B while holding down A on the blue circle), and just move it until it overlaps with the yellow silhouette and let it go. It’s not too tough, do the same for the other two dislocated bones. After that, we’ll have to place the three bones we took. Now for this part I recommend slowing down a little because it’s a little bit easier to accidentally get goods here. The order the bones will come out in is random, so you really don’t know what you’ll get, but it’s not so bad because there are only 3 and it’s pretty obvious where each one goes. The long and thin bone goes on the long and thin silhouette to the right, the other two go on the left side, one at the top, the other at the bottom blah blah. Anyway, like I said, take it slow, turn your wrist to move the angle of the bone so that it overlaps properly with the silhouettes. When in doubt, go a tiny bit more towards the clockwise direction than you might think. This seems to be a good rule of thumb here.
Turns out a piece of bone is missing! Who was the jackass who left it? Oh well. We’ll have to cut out a piece of synthetic bone with the lazor. Press A on the blue circle to start the laser. You have to go along the path and stay as close to the blue guideline as possible at all times. If you move out beyond the red lines you’ll get a miss, but beyond that, simply straying too far from the blue line means you’re getting less points and that’s no good so strive to be on it as much as you can. This is similar to the adenoma cuttin in the first Hank operation but not nearly as hard because there aren’t any crazy curves or ultra narrow paths. There are two other things you need to remember. Do NOT let go of the A button at any point for any reason. Second, do not go over the lit circle or the laser will stop. Always stay within this circle and let the camera move the laser forward for you while you concentrate on staying within the guideline. It’s a good idea though to stay relatively near the fringes of the lit circle because this causes the camera to move faster. The closer you go back to the center of the circle the slower it’ll go until it stops completely. Generally speaking, I recommend letting the camera take you forward during the straight paths but moving forward yourself during the curves. You’ll have to cut twice.
Incidentally, I love the way Tomoe says “Perfect! That was amazing!” When you reach a 3000 chain. Stephanie Sheh, is it? Mm, not bad.
When that’s over with, twist your wrist counterclockwise a bit and hold the A button while the screen is transitioning. You’ll have to place the synthetic bone and if you already have your wrist twisted this way, once you grab it you can move it back to neutral position and be able to place the synthetic bone more comfortably. We’re about halfway through the operation, don’t relax now!
Next we’ll drill 6 holes in the bone. These are slightly different from the last ones in that the holes are much smaller and more lenient. What this means is that you can pull all the way and make them go as fast as you can and still not be in significant danger of getting goods! So do all of these drills as fast as you can. After that’s done, we’ll be screwing the plate in. Hang on though! This one is a bit different from the previous one. I told you these screws are pretty devious. We’re going to use a different mental guideline for these. Instead of doing it the way we did previously, ignore the crosses on the silhouette and concentrate on the cap said cross is on. Now look at the screwdriver. See the ring the point is attached to? You have to let go of the button when that ring is JUST about to touch the cap. It’s slightly different from before because you have to let go faster. If you’re still not sure where it is exactly, it’s basically here:
Keep in mind though that I’m using an LCD HDTV, which is known to have just a bit more input lag than CRTs, so if you’re using a stone age TV it could be very slightly different. But then again maybe not. Would it really make a difference here? Anyway, you’ll have to screw in 6 times. Again, stay sharp because these motherfucks are deceptive and can give you a good when you least expect it if you’re not on the ball. This is one of, if not the most dangerous part of the operation. Finally, keep one thing in mind: When in doubt, release the button just a tiny bit BEFORE the cue rather than after.
Next you’ll drill 7 holes into the other bone. These are longer and less lenient than the previous ones, so you might want to go slower here and make sure you get those cools. After the 7 holes it’ll be time to screw in the plates. For these screws you can go back to looking at the cross like the first plate OR you can keep looking at the cap and release the button just before the ring touches it like the previous plate. It’s up to you, go with whatever feels more natural to you. After that we’ll drill 3 more holes into another bone. They are long ones so take it slow here if you have to.
After that comes a new thing, and this one can be pretty frustrating at first when you’re not used to it. We’ll have to drive in the nail by doing a hammering motion with the remote. Now, I’m going to tell you the most reliable way I’ve found to do this: grab the remote with both hands. That’s right. You don’t have to let go of the nunchuck, just grab the remote with your left hand’s thumb and index finger. Now like you need them for anything. Anyway, in this way you’ll be able to achieve greater precision than with one hand, not to mention you won’t have to put more undue stress on your wrist.
Now then. It’s important first of all to know what exactly you’re aiming for. That’s simple. See the power bar on the right? It has 5 levels. What you’re aiming for is to drive the nail in with 2 hits, and to do that one of the hits has to be at full power (5), while the other has to be at mid power (2-4). You got that? Secondly, the wii remote cursor HAS to be onscreen when you do the hammering motion or it won’t register, so make sure that it’s there before you do it.
So. The trick here is this. The full power (5) hit is EASY. All you have to do is make the hammering motion as fast and hard as you can. The hard part is getting the mid power (2-4) hit without accidentally being either too soft (getting a 1) or too hard (getting a 5). So how do we do this? The best way is to try for the mid-power hit first and to tend more towards the higher end of the strength spectrum while doing it. Why? Because if you’re too soft and get a 1, it’s immediately over and you have failed, so you absolutely do not EVER want to get a 1. BUT, if you accidentally hit too hard and get a 5, that means that you still have one more chance to try and get the mid-power hit so not all is lost. That’s why you should try to stay near the higher end of the strength spectrum (3-4) when doing the mid-hit. You got that? Good. Other than that, it’s simply a matter of practicing it so that you get a sense of just how much power to put into your motion. One final tip: When doing the mid-power hit, try to do the motion without snapping your wrists because this seems to increase the power. Seriously, try it. It’s a good way to get the mid power hits. Then for the full power hit, go ahead and snap your wrists to get it.
After this you’ll have to drill 3 more holes and then drive in 3 more nails. Do it in exactly the same way. Again, make the hole slowly and use the same technique for the nails.
Once that’s over we’ll be almost done. If you’ve gotten all the cools up till now then you have a shot at that XS! If you got even one good, don’t bother. Now stay calm, keep the wiimote held with both your hands. Twist your wrist counterclockwise in preparation while the screen is transitioning. This is the end, DON’T FUCK UP HERE. You already know how to staple the wound shut: Press and hold the A button so that you can use by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Now watch the guideline and make minute changes to the angle of your remote until you match it. Position the cursor so that your remote overlaps the guideline. There’s some leeway, but try to have it overlap as perfectly as you can. Remember, don’t rush on this part! Though I will say one thing. You actually CAN get a single miss and STILL get the XS, though ironically, if you get a good you will not get an XS. Hmm… seems unintuitive but whatever. Just something to keep in mind.
So that’ll be it for this extremely hard operation. Remember, your main concern is getting all the cools. The time limit is not that strict so you should take it slow when you have to and put all your concentration into doing that.
Moment of Zen
Special Bonus
-No Bads
-Passed both valves safely
-Didn’t hit small intestinal wall
-Vitals didn’t fall below 20
This operation is a joke. Especially after that last balls Hank operation this one’s a walk in the park. There’s only 13 cools to get and there’s sooooo much time to get the XS that you can take your sweet dang ol’ time and concentrate on just doing everything correctly.
So let’s do it. As I said, there’s so much time that you can basically go make a sandwich, come back, and still get the XS. Press the skip button whenever you want and start moving forward. Being fast really isn’t necessary but I guess it can’t hurt, so let’s go over proper posture one more time:
Have your arm pulled all the way back so that your wrist is touching the side of your torso. Lean back on your chair. That’s the neutral position. When moving the endoscope forward, you want to do it as fast as you can and without having to back into neutral position midway if you can help it. From the neutral position, to go forward simply hold down A+B and extend your arm out in front of you. You can get a lot of distance this way and very fast. Once your arm is completely extended, you should begin leaning your entire body forward to get even more distance. If you do this, you’ll be able to get to a lot of destinations without having to waste time retracting your arm, as we’ll soon see. Just remember that you’re supposed to lean towards the sensor bar and not the TV. Seems obvious but sometimes we may forget.
This way you can get to the first affected area in one shot. It’s a busted blood vessel or whatever and a blood pool. You know how to deal with these already. Press C and switch to the drain to get rid of the blood pool first. That’s what you usually want to do since the pools can sometimes get in the way of the hemorrhaging area which can prevent you from treating it. Anyway switch to the hemostatic forceps and take care of it. Remember that you have to get the cool here. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. The timing probably takes a bit of practice to get down. What I recommend is doing it enough times that you more or less have a “feel” for how much time is required before letting go of the button. On top of watching of course.
Let’s move on. You can get to the next area in one shot too. Just sayin’. Not that you have to. So whadda we got here? A bag? Nothing special. Press C and switch to the forceps. The regular forceps. Remember, the forceps are the ones on top-left of the toolbox. The one on the right are the hemostatic forceps. They are different okay? If you try using the hemostatic ones nothing’ll happen. When you’ve gotten ’em out, center the view on the blue circle then press and hold Z. Wait until the forceps have pinched and then let go of the button. Easy. Nothin’ to it.
Move forward a bit more and you’ll spot the passageway towards the stomach. Before we go through though, remember that we can’t let vitals fall below 20 or we won’t get the fourth special bonus. At this point vitals probably dipped below the 50s, so take some time off to pump the wall full of stabilizer until it’s back up to max (80). Keep an eye on the passageway, wait until it’s open and then quickly go through. If you hit it, restart that shit. What’s wrong witchoo.
Now we’re in the stomach. Immediately you’ll spot a hemorrhaging area on the wall to your right. Get a bit closer and treat it same as always with the hemostatic forceps. There’s still 3 more areas you have to treat. Take a look at the radar to see their location. Doesn’t matter which one you go for next, take your pick. There’s an easily spotted bag over on the wall opposite the passageway you came from. Pick it up with the forceps. From there, if you look up on the roof you’ll find yet another bag. When you pick THIS one up though, turns out there’s a hemorrhaging blood vessel behind it! Which will also create a blood pool. Switch to the drain and get rid of that pool, then treat the hemorrhage with the hemostatic forceps. As always, make SURE you get a cool. If you get a good, just restart.
Now look behind you to find the third bag. When you pick it up, you’ll find there’s an inflammation behind it. Switch to the syringe (not the stabilizer) and inject some medicine into it. You have to get the cool here. You should already know how, but just in case I’ll repeat it: you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it.
You think we done yet? We ain’t done yet! You’ll notice that three more dots will appear right after you treat that. Hunt them out. If you look to the left you’ll easily spot a classic combo of hemorrhaging area and blood pool. Take care of it same as always but at this point vitals should now be down below the 50s again so you might want to raise them again before continuing. Behind you is an inflammation, and then the third object is over to the right, down on the floor on the way to the next passage. It’s invisible though! So you’ll have to look at the radar to ascertain its location. Move your view until the dot turns blue, then move towards the floor and use the spray to reveal it. Once it’s out just inject it with medicine from the syringe as usual. That’ll be it for the stomach, keep going just a little bit more forward (some convenient arrows will point you in the right way) to find the passageway to the small intestine. Wait until it opens up then quickly pass through it. Once you’re through, you should take the time to bring vitals back up to max before proceeding.
Keep going, making sure not to hit any of the walls. This intestine is a bit narrower and with crazier curves so be careful. The next affected area is 2 polyps and a bag. Let’s take care of the polyps first. We’ll use a new tool for this, the SNARE. Sounds like something you’d use to catch an animal. But anyway, center the view on the blue circle, switch to the snare and hold Z to bring it out. Move it with the control stick and get it to overlap with the yellow ring. You can move the angle of the snare by twisting your wrist (the one grabbing the nunchuck of course) but truth is you BARELY have to do this. The snare almost always comes out at or close to the right angle. Just have it overlap with the circle and if nothing happens twist your wrist to either direction just a tiny bit. Eventually it’ll close around the polyp by itself. When this happens, let go of Z, open up the toolbox again and switch to the forceps to pick it up, same as a bag. Do the same thing for the second polyp, and then grab the bag.
Raise vitals back up to max and dive down the hole. Keep going till you get to the next affected area. There’s a whole lotta shit around here, Two bags, a polyp and a pool, and it’s only gonna get worse once you start removing the bags. That’s why vitals should be at max, so you can comfortably work without having to worry about raising them till you’re done. You already know how to treat all of this though, it shouldn’t be a problem at all, especially since you have all the time in the world to do it. One of the bags will reveal a hemorrhage and the other an inflammation. Treat ’em, make sure you get the cools, and then raise vitals back up to max.
Dive down and keep going. Keep an eye on the radar during this part because there will be a few blood pools along the way that you don’t want to miss. Drain them before proceeding. When you get to the end (you’ll know because there’ll be a big red seal telling you you can’t go farther), you will only find a single bag here. Go ahead and remove it. Turns out there’s a tumor behind it. Inject medicine the same way you’d do to an inflammation, although keep in mind it requires a bit more dosage. Then switch to the scalpel. Resist the urge to center the view on the ends of the excision line. Just center it on the blue circle then hold down Z. Move the scalpel with the control stick. Go up till you cut through the dots, then go down again to go through the remaining ones. Don’t let go of the Z button. A new line will show up. Wait just a bit to let it set in. If you move too fast you won’t cut the first few dots. Wait a second, then begin going up through the dots. When you cut them all, a third line will appear. Do the same thing for this one, just wait a sec, then go down through them.
That’ll be enough. Next we gotta use the snare to excise it. But WAIT. Before you do that, switch to the stabilizer and raise vitals all the way to max. Once you use the snare on that thing a bunch of hemorrhages will appear, so you wanna be prepared. This’ll be the last time we raise vitals. Snare that shit and BAM. Like 3 hemorrhages. But chill. We got full vitals and we got all the time in the world because this mission is so lenient. What could possibly go wrong? Drain all the pools while performing hemostasis as usual. Take it easy, make sure you get those cools, then pick up the tumor with the forceps and we done!
As long as you got all the cools and finished in under 4 minutes, that XS is yours. And frankly that’s eaaassy street. You can probably finish in like 3:30 if you really want to. But whatevs.
History of Fear
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Cool > 20 times
-Shadow disappeared < 3 times
-Cardiac arrest < 4 times
Sup. This operation’s nice, but I don’t think it’s as hard as the previous CR-S01 mission. Still nice though. It can seem a bit overwhelming at first with so much damage goin’ on but once you know what’s going to happen and what to do it’s not so bad.
Hit the skip button and as soon as the operation starts the patient immediately goes into cardiac arrest. Have both your arms pulled back and close to your chest, that way the sensor bar will easily register the motion when you thrust them forward. Also, remember to extend them towards the sensor bar and not necessarily forward. Also wait for the nunchuck icon to actually show up. Don’t jump the gun. Try to revive the patient in a single shot by hitting Z and B on the green part of the bar. It’s pretty easy, after doing it a few times you should be getting it every time without much effort. I don’t think anything particularly bad happens if you miss the green part, other than wasting time, but it’s easy to get it right so why not.
Once that’s done we’re going to take care of the minor wounds before dealing with the big one. Why? Because when you deal with the big one shit will hit the fan, and you don’t want to have left all those other small wounds on top of it. Anyway, switch to the magnification tool and move to the left part of the liver where you’ll spot two long lacerations. It’s probably a good idea to suture these first since they damage vitals the most. We’ve already gone over how to do this. For these wounds you’ll want to make around 8 passes with the sutures. I like to go with slightly more than necessary so sometimes I make 9 or even 10. Try to keep the width close to the white guidelines. Make sure that you suture VERY fast. Don’t count the number of passes, just go with what feels right and it should work out if you’ve practiced enough and have gotten a subconscious feel for how many passes are necessary. If you haven’t, then keep trying until you do! Remember the proper suturing technique: Do it by snapping your wrist right to left as you move your arm top to bottom.
Suture both lacerations first, then switch to the forceps. We’ll extract the glass shard and wire that’re stuck here. First extract the glass. It works the same way as the previous Maria operation: Remember to use proper forceps technique: If you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! That’s a hot tip from me to you. So anyway, the glass. The trick with this guy is to grab it and then pull it out making as straight a line as possible the entire way. Of course, said line must be perpendicular to the cut it’s lodged in.
Next, go for the wire. Don’t use the ultrasound on it. Your aim should be to memorize its shape so that you can pull it out without having to check. This one is bent to the right, so instead of pulling it out in a straight line perpendicular to the cut, pull it straight DOWN. When it’s out, gel both that wound and the one from the glass shard you took out previously. Next move over to the right side of the liver. You’ll spot another glass here. This one I would say is the most dangerous one of all because its weird shape makes it deceptive. Instead of pulling it out in a perfect straight line perpendicular to the wound, pull it just an itsy bitsy TINY bit to the left of that. Should work out. Gel the wound.
Next, move on to the top-left part. Here you’ll find yet ANOTHER glass shard and wire. This glass is pretty easy because it has a very thin shape BUT remember that it’s very long so don’t jump the gun and think you’ve finished pulling it out when you’ve still got a bit more to go. Keep pulling it until it’s ALL out or you’ll get a miss. For the wire, this one’s bent to the left, but to be honest you can just pull it in a straight line perpendicular to the wound and it’ll work.
That’ll be it for the minor wounds. If you got any goods throughout this part, just restart and try again. Anyway, move back to the center where the large beam is. By this time vitals should be critical. Switch to the stabilizer and raise those vitals all the way to max! Should take around 5-6 full syringes. Why so many? Because once you start working on that beam, the patient will start fibrillating, so you’ll want to raise vitals as much as you can now while nothing major is happening.
Once you’ve done that, switch to the drain and remove all the blood pools that have congregated around here. Should be around 4 or 5. When they’re gone, a small excision line will appear on the beam. Use the scalpel to cut those dots. Do it fast, usually there won’t be a problem, though if you’re mildly unlucky a pool will form before you finish. Just drain it and cut again, but like I said, usually shouldn’t happen. When you finish cutting 3 pools will form again. Drain them, and then you’ll be able to pull the beam. Raise vitals to max once more before trying and then grab it with the forceps and just YANK it to the right. Three more pools will form, but also now is when the patient will start fibrillating periodically. Drain the pools, if two of them appeared close to each other, you were lucky because it means you can drain them both at the same time and be faster. Either way, right after you drain 2 pools the EKG will start going wonky. That means that in about 5 seconds the patient will go into cardiac arrest. This will ALWAYS happen, 100% of the time, and remember that if you try to do ANYTHING, even use the magnification tool while the patient is fibrillating, you’ll get a miss.
Anyway, quickly drain the last pool, then cut the dots of the excision line that appear down below. This will cause 3 more pools to appear. Drain them QUICKLY because cardiac arrest is almost here. Normally if you’re fast enough you can drain all the pools right before it happens, but if you’re lucky and 2 pools appear near each other, you’ll be able to drain them at the same time and then even have enough time to yank the beam! Either way, once fibrillation starts happening, pull back your arms to the sides in preparation for using the AED. Same deal as last time, try to get it on the green part in one shot.
Pull the beam if you didn’t, and then drain the pools. Yet another excision line will appear. Cut it, drain the pools, yank the beam, drain the pools AGAIN, then cut for the last time. After this, I recommend pumping in a full syringe of stabilizer just to be safe. Do it fast though. Then drain the 3 pools and pull the beam out. Quickly place it on the tray to the right. You almost can’t see it because the beam is obstructing the view, but you already know pretty much where it at.
Drain the 3 pools that have formed, then switch to the forceps. You’ll see a blue circle pop up on the left. It’s time to close this mother of all wounds. Grab on the blue circle and then pull it to the right. This will turn it into a more manageable laceration. Though it’s still a really fucking HUGE one. Time to suture it shut. Since this thing is so hueg, to get the cool you’ll have to make MANY passes. I recommend doing around 15, from the top all the way to the bottom, and try to keep the width more or less the same as the white guidelines.
At some point around here the EKG will start spazzing out. That means cardiac arrest is coming in 5 seconds… MAYBE. That’s right, turns out there’s a 50% chance that it’s just a false alarm and nothing will happen. I recommend playing it safe here. Keep working until the 5 second time limit is just about up, then stop for a bit and wait. If cardiac arrest happens, good. If it doesn’t watch the liver and if you see that it goes back to beating normally, then just continue with the treatment. One thing to keep in mind: if ventricular fibrillation DOES happen here, then the next time the EKG spazzes out it will be a false alarm almost guaranteed, which means you can keep working without fear! If it doesn’t happen here, then the next time will be a real one guaranteed. Good thing to know.
Anyway once this bitch has been sutured you’ll still have to apply synthetic membranes to it ’cause it’s just so damn big. Worse, it’s so big that the camera can’t show all of it, which means you’ll have to do this in 2 parts. There are 6 membranes to place so I recommend placing 3 and then 3. Move the view down, then use the forceps to place 3 membranes on the bottom, then gel them in place. It takes a few passes with the gel, so don’t jump the gun and stop prematurely. After this, move to the top and place the 3 other membranes. Gel them. That’s how it should happen IDEALLY. But truth is, it will only happen like this if you’re lucky. Normally, 3 blood pools will form while you’re in the middle of doing this. If you’re even MORE unlucky, the pools will form on the membranes you have already gelled, meaning you’ll have to drain the pools and then reapply whatever membranes they peeled off. If you’re UNBELIEVABLY unlucky and or slow, pools might even form twice. If this happens I suggest you just restart because now when you finish you’ll only get a good. And despite what the word may say, that’s NO GOOD.
Anyway, if all goes well you’ll be able to finish gelling the 3 final membranes and finish treating the major wound with a cool. Now, as SOON as this happens, quickly switch to the syringe and begin pumping stabilizer as fast as you can! Vitals should be critical around the low 20s, and now new lacerations will pop up. The patient will be damaged twice, and each time lost 10 vitals. But if you’re injecting stabilizer while this is happening he shouldn’t die. Inject twice to bring it back up to 20, then move the view to the right where you’ll spot two lacerations. Suture them the same way as you did the very first ones in the operation. You’ll also spot a big laceration with blood pools further to the right. Drain the pools, then switch to the forceps. A blue circle will appear. Close the wound and then suture it in exactly the same way because now it’s just like the other lacerations. Vitals should be ridiculously low by now so raise them once, then move over to the left side to find another big laceration. Take care of it same as always, then raise vitals up to around 50 or so. By around this time the EKG should start spazzing out again. Remember what I told you, if the last time was a false alarm, expect ventricular fibrillation. If the last time was real, then just keep working.
Next, we have to take care of a bunch of shadows all over the liver. Use the ultrasound to detect them but don’t press A with it, just cut them out with the scalpel once you know their location. There are 7 shadows to take care of, and it helps if you memorize where they are so you don’t waste too much time looking around. There’s one just a tiny bit above the laceration you just sutured, and there are also 2 a bit to the right of the said laceration, as well as 2 more a bit more to the right of that, one around the top-right part of the liver, and one in the extreme top-left. As long as you know where those 7 are, you’ll do well because they will always be in the same place. Poke them with the scalpel, drain the blood, then suture the cut. These cuts are a bit smaller than the others and thus, they need less passes from the sutures for the cool. You may THINK they need just as many as the others because of what the white guidelines tell you but this is a LIE. If you make as many passes as the other lacerations you run a high risk of getting a good. So for these ones, I recommend you keep the number of passes down to around 3 or 4. And above all, make sure that they run the length of the entire cut and maybe even a tiny bit more. In fact, a good way to get cools on these guys is to just make three very large passes. Got it? Ok. That being said, it IS possible to get a single good and still manage the XS, but it’s risky.
Anyway, keep working until you’ve dealt with all 7 shadows, also remember to use gel on the places where there looks like drops of blood are spouting.
Finally it’ll be time to close up the patient. This suture is pretty easy because the wound is completely vertical! Make around 9 passes and be sure to cover the entire length of the wound. Afterwards gel and apply the bandage to finish. Be CAREFUL on the bandage. Take it slow so that you don’t accidentally get a good.
Like I said before, you CAN get one good and still manage the XS if you are fast enough. On the other hand, if you get all the cools you can afford to take it slow because the time limit isn’t that strict in this operation. You need around 12800 for the XS.
Mournful Hero
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-All patients transported
-Cool > 16 times
-Chest struck < 2 times
This operation isn’t too hard overall, but you have to be reasonably fast by doing things properly, not to mention it has two sticking points near the end that you gotta be careful with, one of which is particularly strange.
Hit the skip button as soon as the operation starts and the patient you’re on will undergo cardiac arrest. This guy will do this 3 times during regular intervals, and he won’t be stabilized until that happens so there’s nothing we can do other than continually go back and forth between him and the other patients. Like I said, he’ll do this immediately and you’ll have to start doing chest compressions. You already know how to do this from the first mission: Loosen up for this. Begin smacking down the wii remote as if you were hammering a nail with it. The way I like to do it is to have my palm facing downward so that I can snap my wrist more easily. Make sure to begin doing it as SOON as the hands appear. Hammer down each time the hands on the screen come down. You CAN simply hammer rapidly with no regards to anything and still get the cool but that’s tiring and there’s no reason to do that when doing it in tandem is so easy. It takes 5 compressions to get the cool. Count them so that you’re ready to switch patients after the fifth one.
Press A on the second patient icon. The one that’s got an exclamation mark on it. Don’t worry, you have plenty of time. In fact, you’ll have to press A many times before it will let you because there’s a couple seconds after the chest compressions during which you’re not allowed to switch. But anyway. There’ll be 3 icons to the left. First press the Talk icon, obviously. This guy’s got a nasty wound on his arm and we’re gonna have to apply the torniquet before we can begin moppin’ up the blood. If you try it’s just gonna keep on bleeding. Press A on the torniquet icon and you’ll see a white circle appear on his upper arm. Press and hold A on this circle to make a second circle appear on the other side of the arm. Just make the pointer touch this circle, then go back to the first circle and release A while the pointer is inside it. That’ll apply the torniquet. Nothing too complicated. The only way to muck it up is to release the A prematurely.
Once that’s done, grab the gauze on the right side of the screen and use it on the mass of blood pools. One gauze won’t be enough, so just apply it for a fraction of a second until it begins to get soaked and then grab another one to finish the job. Next, it’s time to place three synthetic membranes on the wound, so switch to the forceps. The area where you can place them is pretty lenient so you can do this quite fast without too much fear of getting misses. Also remember that if you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision, speed and control than having to press both A and B! Anyway, when they’re all placed, gel and tape over them. Make sure you tape over all 3 at the same time. Go from the top left down the middle to finish up on the bottom right. Don’t worry too much though, it’s pretty lenient.
This’ll stabilize the patient and send you back to the first one. However, if you did things fast enough it’ll still be a few seconds before this one goes into his second cardiac arrest. So forget him and immediately switch to the other patient instead. You’ll have to cut up his sleeve first, so choose the scissors and do it. You already know how to do this right? Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough, you can do it fast…but not SO fast that you get careless and miss.
There’ll be 4 burns on this dude’s arm. Spread gel over all of them and keep doing it until you get the OKs. Remember that you have to press the button, hold it, release it and press it again a few times, don’t just hold it the entire time and expect it to work. Next switch to the forceps and begin placing the membranes on the 4 burns. You can do this pretty fast just like the last one because this one’s pretty lenient on where you’re allowed to place them too. Place all 4 membranes, gel them and then switch to the tape. Now, we can’t get all 4 of these with a single tape so we’ll be taping twice. Again, don’t worry too much about this because it’s pretty lenient on what it will accept. Go from the top right in a straight line all the way to the bottom left corner of the bottom membrane. Sometimes this will get you the cool on 3 membranes, in which case you only have to tape the remaining one (I like to do it vertically), but sometimes it will only register on the top and bottom one, leaving the two middle ones. In this case tape from the top-left to the bottom-right of these. That’ll stabilize this patient, and two more will appear (unless you didn’t talk to that one patient before. But why wouldn’t you?!).
You’ll now automatically switch back to the first patient, who has been in cardiac arrest for a while now, but ‘s all good. Do the chest compressions on him now, same as you did the first time, then immediately switch to the second patient icon. Don’t even bother raising vitals. Leave ’em as is.
When you switch to this next patient you’ll have a few seconds to relax because the screen takes a while to transition. Have the stick held up for the antibiotic gel and begin applying it on the excision line even before the screen finishes settling in. It barely takes much to get the ok. Then grab the cutter over on the right with the A button and make the excision. You’ll now have to intubate this guy with a fucking PEN. That is RAW. You already know how to do this from the previous Maria operation: Point the cursor on the blue circle at the top of the tube and hold down A, then move the pointer in a straight line down all the way to the bottom, then release the A button, move the pointer again to the blue circle, hold down A and repeat it. Keep doing this the 3 or 4 times it takes until the tube is all the way in. You don’t even have to be careful or precise or NUTHIN’. This is even easier than the last intubation we did. Just ram that thing down his throat!
After this you’ll have to strike his chest. This is… slightly harder than the chest compressions. You have to hold down the A button while doing it, there’s no rhythm to it, and it seems to be harder for the motion to register. For this I recommend making the motion much stronger and bigger than with the chest compressions. Also do them repeatedly until you get 2 strikes. Two strikes should be all you need, and apparently if you get more than 2 you won’t get the fourth special bonus. Thing is, I’m not sure how it’s even possible to need more than 2 as it’s never happened to me. And if it’s never happened to me then it shouldn’t happen to you. That’ll stabilize this patient. You’ll automatically switch back to the first one, but if you did things fast enough then it should still be a few seconds before he goes into his third cardiac arrest. And those are some seconds we don’t want to waste, so forget this mother and switch to the other patient.
He’s got a gaggle of blood pools, so grab the gauze on the right and apply it. There’s too much blood though so you’ll need two. Just apply the first one for a second until it starts getting soaked (should happen REALLY fast), then go back and grab a second one to finish the job. Once you’re done with that the screen will pan out and you’ll have to cut his shirt off with the scissors. Same deal as just a few moments before, I’m not gonna repeat myself on how to do this.
When you open up his shirt you’ll see two wounds and 2 blood pools. Grab a gauze from the right and absorb those pools. Since there are only 2 of them you will only need a single gauze. After that, switch to the forceps and place the membranes on the 2 wounds. No need to gel beforehand. You do have to gel AFTER placing them though. But after gelling, stop. The first patient has been in cardiac arrest for a while now, so switch back to him right now. Do the chest compressions same as always for the third and final time. This will cause him to finally stabilize. ’bout fricken time. Now it’s just us and the last patient. Let’s end this!
NOT SO FAST THOUGH. Heads up. This part is the most dangerous one in the entire operation. I’m talking about these two wounds that you have to tape. These are known as the BULLSHIT membranes. Why? Because they’re so fucking deceptive in where they want you to tape. What’s that you’re saying? You just have to tape from one end of the membrane to the other, same as always? Hehe, isn’t that cute. But it’s WRONG! If you try to do this you’ll only end up with goods, especially with the membrane on the right, whose bullshit levels are at 9000. No, no, you have to be very careful with these guys. Slow down a little bit. First tape the one on the right. The way you should do it to get the cool is to start not on the top left corner but 1/3 of the way BELOW that. From there, go on a straight line to the bottom-right corner of the membrane but don’t stop there like logic would tell you. KEEP GOING a good ways past the corner and finish almost an entire membrane’s length PAST that to get the cool. Yeah, I know, makes no god damn sense. But that’s what you gotta do. Trying to apply the tape vertically or horizontally will NOT work and will almost always net you a good. The membrane on the left is slightly easier, but be careful here too. Apply the tape diagonally from the bottom-left to the top-right corner (or vice versa) but also make sure to go past the ends of the membrane on both sides slightly more than you usually would. Not as much as the membrane on the right but more than with standard membranes.
If you managed to get the cools on these two then you’re almost home free but not quite because there’s one more difficult part. The view will change. You’ll see a small excision line. Gel it, then grab the cutter on the right and open up a hole. You’ll have to ram a pen in, it’s the same as the intubation earlier except the other way. You have to grab it from below and push it up. Go ahead and do this fast, it’s not too difficult or dangerous. Once you manage to get it in though, you’ll have to wait a few seconds. Switch to the stabilizer and begin injecting while you wait. Inject three times and then place your cursor near the pen in anticipation for when you’ll be able to get it. Do NOT switch to the forceps yet because if you do, you’ll get no cue of when it’s time to get it out. Stay with the stabilizer, and eventually you’ll see a forceps icon pop up on the pen. This is your cue. Switch to the forceps and grab the pen from the middle (the MIDDLE. NOT the end), pull it down and then place it on the tray to the right.
Now CALM DOWN. You have to place a membrane on the hole but you need to be VERY careful and precise because this one is like 10 times more strict than all the others before it. It is NOT lenient at all, if you’re off by even a centimeter you’ll get a miss. So what I recommend is to grab that membrane and then take it slow. Don’t just drop it fast like you did on the others, keep it hovering over the guideline until you’re SURE that it’s properly placed, and hell, even grab your right hand with your left to keep it from shaking if you have to, and only release the button once you’re sure that it’s in the right place.
Once you’ve done that you’ve won. For the last thing all you have to do is apply tape three times. Once in a straight line from the top-left corner of the membrane to the top-right corner, then another from the top-left corner to the bottom-left corner, and finally a third one from the top-right corner to the bottom-right corner. This is pretty easy to do so there’s nothing to worry about.
And that’ll be it! 4 more patients in ultimate critical one-foot-in-the-grave condition will appear but the operation’s done. We ain’t care. Anyway, this operation can be done in like less than 1:20 but the requirements for the XS are far less than that. That’s why you can afford to take it slow for those two last difficult parts.
Love in the Ground
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Chain > 7000
-Treatment halted < 2 times
-Cool > 36 times
Wha…abluh…abuhbuh…just… what is this… I don’t even… glarbghl. Fucking… cuntass shitting christ on a bobsled… this operation is unbelievable. I am not joking this is ridiculous. If you can’t even imagine how to XS this I don’t blame you. This makes the previous Hank operation feel like we were on training wheels. In fact, I wouldn’t be surprised if this is the hardest operation in the entire game. You basically have to make a pact with Satan to XS this one. I will tell you how to do it. In detail. But ultimately, you will have to try many, many times until you can do it (unless you’re some kind of legendary surgeon, in which case why are you even reading this). Never before have the little things you can do to shave time off counted so much as now. You have to be so, so fast but also very precise.
First, let’s go over the proper way to hold the wiimote: hold it near the top part rather than the bottom, place your thumb around the area to the left, slightly bottom-left of the d-pad and upper left of the A button and grip firmly with it. In my experience this affords greater control. You should grip with the tip of your thumb so that you’re not actually pressing the A button, but if you have to, you can simply bring the rest of it down and easily press it with the joint between the proximal and distal phalanges while still maintaining the grip.
When the operation starts, don’t hit the skip button yet. Let Hank say his first line, and while he’s doing this, have your cursor hovering around the spot where you’ll start doing the incision. Memorize where that spot is. Press A once to pass the dialogue and then immediately make the incision as FAST as you can. And I mean FAST.
Throughout the operation, it’s important to keep one thing in mind: your chain is irrelevant. As long as you get above 7000 chain for the special bonus, having a higher chain won’t help you get the XS. The only thing that will is the time limit. So, it’s true that if you’re more precise and always stay exactly on the blue line you’ll get a bigger chain, but NEVER do this at the cost of speed. It’s better to get a lower chain and be faster than to get a higher chain and be slower. Got that? On the other hand, it’s better to be slower than to get a miss. Because a miss means you’ve forfeited the entire operation right there.
Hit the skip button while the screen is going inside the patient, and then go back to gripping the wiimote near the top part. We’re gonna cut the vertebral arches with the laser, and you need to do this EXTREMELY fast. To do this, you’re going to have to memorize the general location of where each blue circle is going to appear so that you can have your cursor already pointing there BEFORE it appears. When it does, press and hold A, then move it down the line. But I think “move” is the wrong word to describe how fast you should do it. I think it’s basically more like you’re snapping that thing down. You can do this that fast because the line isn’t that long, so there isn’t as much room to go out of it as later on. Keep cutting those bitches up, moving your cursor to where the next line will appear before it does so you can cut it as fast as possible. You have to do it 6 times. After that, you’ll have to make a big incision along the dura mater. Again, memorize where the blue circle will appear so you have your cursor there before it does and can begin cutting as soon as possible. Make this incision very fast as usual, but perhaps just a tiny bit slower than the previous ones because it’s so long and thus there are higher chances of getting a miss.
After this happens we’ll be cutting the mother of all tumors. Again, memorize where the blue circle appears so that you can begin cutting almost immediately without wasting time. Don’t just memorize the location of the first one, memorize the locations of ALL of them. You’ll be cutting 6 times. First time starts on the upper-right, after that you start on the upper-left, then on the lower-right, then on the lower-left, then on the upper-left, and finally on the lower-right.
Something that’s strange about this tumor is that it causes the pointer to move in a slightly jerky fashion while you’re cutting. This is different from how it moves when you’re cutting basically anything else or using the laser or whatever so watch out. Overall it’s not so bad though, after doing it a bunch of time you’ll get used to the new movement. Also, the camera will be moving throughout this procedure, which will also move the location of your pointer, so take that into account. Once you’ve started cutting, do NOT let go of the A button for any reason or it will end your chain.
The way you want to do this part is to always be hot on the heels of the yellow line but never go past it. The reason is because if you are close to this line it will move just a tiny bit faster, whereas if you stray too far from it, it’ll go slower and eventually stop (and we need every little bit of time we can get). On the other hand if you go PAST the yellow line you’ll get a miss which is the worst thing of all, so you don’t want to be too fast either. In conclusion, stay close to the yellow line. You can save a little bit of time by going extremely fast for the first few inches each time you begin cutting because the yellow line starts a ways out in front of you, and also by going extremely fast at the last few inches because once the trail has ended there’s no danger of hitting the yellow line.
Once you’ve dealt with the tumor you’ll have to deal with the outbreak of hemangioblastoma. You’ll be cutting the veins. It works exactly the same as you’ve been doing up to now, except you don’t have to worry about the jerky movements anymore, plus the camera isn’t moving. Which means you can cut MUCH faster than before, and you should, because the time limit for this operation is ridiculous. On the other hand, the yellow guideline still has a speed limit and you’ll get a miss if you go past it, but the limit is so high that reaching it is only likely in the easy, straight paths. Which means this procedure is one in which you can save the most time.
Just like the last part, you should memorize where each blue circle will appear so you can have your cursor near there before it appears and can begin cutting immediately without wasting any time. You can more or less tell where you’re going to have to cut by looking at the web-like paths beside the veins. There are two hemangioblastoma that you have to take care of, and you have to cut 4 times on each one. The first one has stationary paths, so you should cut them up extremely fast. After you’ve cut the fourth time and the camera pans out, have the cursor hovering over the thing and hold down A+B. This way you’ll grab it immediately as soon as you’re able. When this happens quickly drop it on the tray to the right.
The second one has paths that move in a wavy pattern, which makes it more dangerous. This is probably the easiest place to get a miss, and if you do, then the operation is forfeit. Therefore, I recommend taking it just a BIT slower than on the previous one, but still pretty fast because, like I said, the time limit is uber strict. Note that the parts that move the most are the first half. So you should go slightly slower here but once you get to the second half of each path you have more liberty to go faster. For example, on the third path, once you get to the halfway point you can just move to the right in a literal straight line. For the fourth path, once you get past the sharp turn it barely moves so you can go really fast here. Either way, just keep an eye on the movements of the path so that you don’t hit the margins and don’t make any sudden movements, keep it flowing smoothly.
Once that’s done the shadow will go away and it’ll be time to place eight screws. These are different from the screws we’ve done before. Be careful with these guys. Stay focused because if you get a SINGLE good (and it can happen pretty easily if you’re not careful) then you will definitely not get the XS. To make sure you get the cools on these screws, look at the silhouette. See that there’s a line just above where the silhouette meets the bone? You need to release the A button when the part of the screw that is attached to the spike is just about to overlap with that line. Now, if that’s not totally clear, then look at the drawing I’ve made to show you. That should clear things up:
That’s what you have to do to get the cool. Hold down A and release it JUST when those two lines are about to meet. Do this for all 8 screws. The last 4 are with a different view, but the same rule still applies.
After that you’ll have to pass two rods. Memorize where the blue circle will appear (hint: for the first rod, it’s just above the top screw) and as SOON as you’re able to, hold down the A button there and yank the cursor downward to start the rod moving. You can do this because you won’t get a miss early on if you go outside the path. You’ll only get a miss if you go out once the rod has been moving for a while. Therefore, your top priority at first is just to get that thing moving as fast as possible. Then once it’s already moving you have plenty of time to adjust your cursor. Place it far ahead of the blue arrow that appears to keep the rod moving at full speed but keep it steady in between the two red lines that make up the path. It’s not too difficult, it’s all about simply keeping the cursor steady. You shouldn’t have problems here. Do the same for the second rod.
Once the two rods are in place we’ll almost be done. It’ll be time to staple the patient shut. Now, just like during the hemangioblastoma, the stapling part is the other one where you can save the most time. The time limit for this operation is SO strict that you have to be ULTRA fast in applying those staples. You cannot afford to waste much time finding the right angle and aligning the stapler with the silhouette. So what can you do? One, twist your wrist counterclockwise while the screen is transitioning and memorize more or less the exact amount that you have to twist it so that when it comes time to staple, the amount that you have to change the angle to correspond with the silhouette is minimal. Two, hold your right hand with your left to keep it steadier. Three, when practicing the operation, instead of simply restarting immediately when you get a miss, take it all the way to the end every time so that you can practice this part a lot and it becomes more familiar.
The point is that you have to staple as fast as you can. To that end, it helps to keep two things in mind: there is no need to change the angle of the stapler for the 5 staples, only the location. And note that you CAN get a single miss in this part and STILL get the XS. Just one though. And NOT a good.
And that’ll be it. Like I said, this operation is very hard, so it’ll probably take many tries but don’t get discouraged. I know for a fact that it can be done so just hang in there and keep trying! You need to complete it in somewhere between 4:10 and 4:05 and get more than 17450 score for the XS.
Marionette’s Lament
Special Bonus
-Cool > 12 times
-Never pushed back to beginning
-Didn’t hit small intestinal wall
-Vitals didn’t fall below 20
This operation is pretty easy. Man… this is starting to become a trend with Tomoe’s operations huh? Oh well. I guess we needed a breather after that last unholy Hank operation. So just sit back, relax, take it easy. There’s no need to rush, as usual, the time limit is pretty dang lenient. The only thing about this operation is that it’s kinda long, but it’s still a pretty chill operation. You still have to get all cools though, so if you get a good somewhere, just restart.
Hit the skip button whenever you want and start going forward. You’ll see a polyp but just keep going forward. Eventually the game will center your view on it. When this happens, keep going forward just a tiny bit more and then bring out the snare. You already know how to deal with these guys. Same way as last operation: center the view on the blue circle, switch to the snare and hold Z to bring it out. Move it with the control stick and get it to overlap with the yellow ring. You can move the angle of the snare by twisting your wrist (the one grabbing the nunchuck of course) but truth is you BARELY have to do this. The snare almost always comes out at or close to the right angle. Just have it overlap with the circle and if nothing happens twist your wrist to either direction just a tiny bit. Eventually it’ll close around the polyp by itself. When this happens, let go of Z, open up the toolbox again and switch to the forceps to pick it up.
Keep moving forward and you’ll spot an inflammation. Bring out the syringe (not the stabilizer) and inject it with medicine. Remember that you have to get all the cools or you won’t get the XS, so stay alert. To get the cool on these you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it.
Keep going forward and you’ll see another polyp. Switch to the snare and deal with it in exactly the same way as the last one. Afterwards, it’s probably a good idea to raise vitals to max. You’ll be doing this several times throughout the operation. Remember that you can’t let them fall below 20 or you won’t get the XS. Once they’re back up, keep going. You’ll now be moving through an enormous tunnel and you’ll meet with two hemorrhaging areas along the way, as well as their respective blood pools (plus a rogue blood pool that’s there just for kicks). Use the drain to get rid of the pools beforehand, since they may interfere, and then use the hemostatic forceps to treat the hemorrhages. Make sure you get the cools here too. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. If you accidentally release it prematurely, don’t worry. You can still get the cool, just do it again, but since it’s likely extremely close to the sweet spot, release the button almost immediately after the hemostasis begins. Vitals have probably fallen down to like the 50s after you treat the second hemorrhage so raise them back up before proceeding.
The next stretch will have peristaltic movement, which means you have to be a bit careful because the walls will be moving. Don’t worry too much though because the tunnel is pretty wide and the area that is moving is short. In fact, you can probably get through it in one shot. Once you’re past it, you’ll come across 3 polyps. Treat the two on the right side first, because once you start treating the left one it’ll cause a hemorrhage. It’s probably not a bad idea to raise vitals a bit before doing it, just in case. You don’t want them falling below 20 while you’re doing this. Switch to the hemostatic forceps immediately after using the snare successfully, usually this’ll allow you to treat the hemorrhage immediately since it’ll appear right where you’re looking. Sometimes a blood pool will form near it and won’t let you, but that’s not common. Either way, take care of it, drain the pool and then pick up the excised polyp. When that’s done, there’ll be one last thing to take care of here. It’s an invisible ulcer. Check the radar and you’ll see the dot. Raise vitals to max and then look at the wall opposite where you came from. It’s there. Don’t get TOO close, but move your view up and down until the dot on the radar turns blue, then spray the wall there to reveal it. If nothing happens you have to get a bit closer. Once it’s revealed just inject it with medicine the same as any other inflammation.
Now look towards the right and you’ll see a valve we have to go through. Wait until it’s open (sometimes it fakes you out by opening and then closing again immediately. Sneaky bastard) and quickly go through. Raise vitals again here if you have to, but you probably don’t.
Now this is the small intestine so it’s narrower and more treacherous than before. You have to be careful not to hit the walls or you definitely won’t get the XS. The curves are pretty crazy so don’t rush too much. After all, it’s not necessary. Also, keep an eye out for the blue arrows that appear on the edges of the screen. They will tell you the direction you should be going. You’ll go through a very long stretch with nothing happening. After a while though you’ll come across a polyp. Deal with is, same as always, except this time you have to inject it with medicine beforehand. Nothing special though. Just, as always, make sure you don’t get a good. A hemorrhage will appear after you excise it so switch to the hemostatic forceps immediately after. It’ll appear centered on your view. Sometimes you can’t see the hemorrhage very well, this is where practice comes in handy because you have sort of a subconscious feel for how long you have to go before releasing the button. But anyway, same deal, same deal. MOVING ON. Raise vitals to max here and keep going.
Yet another stretch with peristaltic movement, except now it’s in the small intestine so it’s even more dangerous. What you have to keep in mind during these parts is that the walls move forward, therefore you move back because your movement is independent of them. Ok, that’s not really how peristaltic movement works but shut up. That’s how we’re going to look at it. So because of this, when you stop moving for a second or two (i.e: when you’re retracting your arm to go back into neutral position), you should understand that you’ve moved back slightly. Therefore, before you continue moving, you should compensate for that loss of ground by moving slight forward again before continuing. What happens if you don’t do that? Well, let’s say you stop just before a curve. While you’re retracting your arm said curve moves forward a bit, and if you’re expecting it to be in the same place, you may end up hitting the wall when you make the turn. And then you’re FUCKED. ’cause you gotta restart. Anyway, other than that, I also recommend getting used to moving forward while turning at the same time. At first we may instinctively stop moving while turning and only move forward in straight bursts. But again, stopping isn’t a good idea in these stretches.
Once it’s over you’ll get to a part with a lot of affected areas, specifically an inflammation, a hemorrhage and like 5 blood pools. But it ain’t nothing we ain’t seen yet so just treat it already and move on. Remember to raise vitals first though, they’re probably on the low side at this point. Now we’ll have to go through ANOTHER area with peristaltic movement. This one’s more dangerous than the last so be extra careful, but it’s still essentially the same so the same principles apply. When you get past it you’ll reach the end, where you’ll spot 2 polyps and 2 tumors. Treat the nearest polyp first. It’ll cause a hemorrhage to appear so treat that as well. When that’s taken care of, take a moment to raise vitals to max, then inject the tumor on the right. Remember to get the cool. Switch to the scalpel and cut along the dotted line. This will rape vitals, so that’s why it’s important that you have them at max before you start. Keep cutting (three times) until it’s done, then use the snare to excise it and then pick it up. Again, raise vitals to max because they will be low again after this, and there’s still a tumor left. Inject it and cut it same as the last one but then WAIT. Don’t use the snare yet. Raise vitals to max for the last time because after you snare this biatch a hemorrhage will appear, and we don’t want that to happen while the vitals are in the 30s.
Snare it, then perform hemostasis on the hemorrhage and drain the blood pool. Pick up the tumor and then there will only be the lone polyp to deal with. No need to even raise vitals anymore. Inject it and excise it with the snare same as always. Don’t get a good now, you’re almost done.
And that’ll be it for this very easy operation. I don’t even know how fast you have to be. Who even cares, it seems as long as you get all the cools and special bonuses you can take your time.
Waking from Terror
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Operation completed in 390 sec
-Blood pool formed < 10 times
-Needle only lost once
This operation is fun. I wouldn’t say it’s DIFFICULT… in the sense that it requires a lot of skill like the last two Hank operations…but it can be pretty overwhelming at first if you don’t know exactly how you should be doing things.
We’ll start by treating tumors in the pituitary gland. Hit the skip button whenever and let’s go! You can’t see the first one ’cause the place is inundated with blood pools, so start by draining all them blood. After you drain them, the first tumor will appear on the top left part. Keep the button held down on top of where it will appear so you drain the mucus immediately, then switch to the scalpel and begin cutting along the excision line. You need to cut as fast as you can because extra blood pools will form if you’re too slow. Then you’ll have to drain them again before proceeding, which has a ridiculous amount of negative consequences like wasted time, less chances of acquiring the third special bonus, and even the possibility of getting a good on the tumor excision. Note, however, that rather than simply doing it really fast, which bears the risk of missing dots, it’s generally better to make sure you get each dot on the first pass. If you don’t though, it’s not too big of a deal as long as it doesn’t happen too often, just got back to it.
You’ll be cutting 3 times. First a half circle around the tumor, then another half circle, and finally a full circle. You’ll have to drain blood pools in between all of these steps though because each time you finish an excision line at least one blood pool will form (two if a pool was close to forming before you finished the excision). Your goal should be to excise fast enough so that you only have to drain in between each successful excision and not have to stop in the middle of one. If two or three pools appear after you’ve finished with a line, that’s good because it means you’ll waste less time draining them than if you had to stop midway through cutting.
So here’s how it should go: drain the mucus, cut a half circle, drain the pools, cut another half circle, drain the pools, cut a full circle…now, drain the pools by holding down the A button, and as soon as the last pool has been cleared, keep holding down the A button, immediately switch to the forceps and simply press the B button to pick it up. Do this as fast as possible so that you don’t give any other blood pool a chance to form, and if it does, it’ll be too late because you’ve already picked up the tumor. If it forms before you pick it up, that could potentially prevent you from getting it, which means wasted time.
After that tumor’s done with, 2 more will appear. We’ll treat them in exactly the same way but keep one thing in mind: treat them ONE AT A TIME. Do NOT drain the mucus off the other one until you’re completely done with the first one because if you do, it will begin creating blood pools and you don’t want more pools than is absolutely necessary. As a corollary to this, when the tumor you’re working on creates blood pools, if one appears close to the other tumor, keep the drain as far away from it as possible while still draining the blood so that you don’t accidentally drain the mucus as well.
After you treat the first tumor, two more will appear, which means there will now be 3 of these fuckers. Don’t sweat it though, just keep working on them one at a time in exactly the same way. Don’t ever raise vitals during this part. If you do things correctly you should be able to finish treating all the tumors with the vitals at around 10.
We’ll now move on to the pancreas. Before making the incision, take the time to raise those vitals all the way back up to max. It’s a good opportunity to do so because nothing’s happened yet. Just keep pumpin’ that stabilizer until it’s back up, then gel the line and cut it.
Now we’re in! You’ll there are are a bunch of blood pools around here so have the control stick held in the direction of the drain and begin draining them all from right to left. When you drain the last one, the excision line will appear around the damaged area to the left. Cut it, and a couple more blood pools will form. Drain them and then close the wound with the forceps by grabbing from either side and then yanking it to the other side. Suture it shut. It’s a pretty standard suturing job, needs around 7 passes but you should probably go with a few more just in case. 8 or 9 will work. As usual, make sure you make them as wide as the white guidelines and around as long as the actual wound. After that, switch to the forceps and apply the two synthetic membranes from the tray on the left, then gel them in place.
Once you’ve taken care of that, keep the control stick held towards the syringe position because some inflammations will develop. We already know how to deal with these guys from two operations past, but just in case, I can repeat it: don’t worry, this isn’t New Blood where inflammations were a million times more terrifying than Cardia. You don’t have to inject EXACTLY in the inflammation points, you have a bit of leeway. In fact, it might even be more lenient than Second Opinion. That’s right. So let’s go for it! Before we begin, here’s something to keep in mind: a full syringe gives you enough to treat one large spot OR three small ones. Secondly, it’s a good idea to use what I call the warping strategy to shave a few seconds off your time:
When filling the syringe or injecting with it, you may notice that as long as you have the button pressed, and as long as the syringe hasn’t finished filling up/emptying out, you can move the wiimote as much as you want and the cursor won’t move. But as soon as the syringe is done filling/emptying, the cursor will appear where you are currently pointing the remote. Using this trick, you can save some time. You can move the remote over to the anti-inflammatory bottle while the syringe is injecting, and when it’s done you can immediately fill it up again. It works the same the other way. While it’s filling up you can move over to an inflammation and inject it immediately.
There’ll be 5 inflammations that you can see. Two big ones and three little ones. Here’s how you want to inject them: First the two big ones. Then fill the syringe up to max and start injecting the 3 small ones from right to left all in a single go. You want to do it like this because once there are only 2 inflammations left, a bunch of tiny tumors will appear, and you want to be done with the inflammation fast by then. If you leave the two big ones for last, it’ll take longer, giving the tumors more time to wreck vitals.
Anyway, next, switch to the laser and burn off those 6 tiny tumors. Gel ’em up, then move with the magnification tool a bit up and to the right. You’ll spot 4 tiny tumors and 6 inflammations. Laser the tumors, gel them, then inject medicine on the inflammations. Now move the view over to the top right of the organ where you’ll find 2 more tiny tumors and 2 more inflammations. Treat them all, then take the time to raise vitals back up to max before proceeding now that nothing too major is happening.
Once they’re back up to 80, check around the center to find a big tumor. Don’t light it up with the ultrasound, just cut it straight up. Drain the mucus, cut the excision line around it and then put it on the tray to the right. When that happens, 3 small tumors will form around the wound. Place the synthetic membrane, then switch to the laser and burn off the tumors, and then gel all the tumor holes and the membrane in one go.
Now move back down to the lower part of the organ. You’ll find 2 tiny tumors and 2 inflammations have formed since you were gone. (the second tiny tumor is waaaay down on the bottom-left, in case you were wondering). Now, there’s a big tumor hiding a bit down and to the left of the first small tumor. Cut it up and treat it same as the last one. As soon as you have gelled the synthetic membrane, quickly move down to the very bottom. A new damaged area will have appeared here. Treat it now quickly while no blood pools have formed yet. If you let it fester there it’ll build them up and that will cost you the third special bonus. While treating it, an inflammation and a small tumor will crop up, so take care of those too. Vitals will now be really low but don’t raise them yet. Move to the left part of the organ to find a single big inflammation that appeared here. Treat it, then move to the right of it to find the last big tumor. Cut it up, place the membrane, and burn off 3 of the tiny tumors that appear (but leave one). Gel them. Now that there’s only one small tumor left, take the time to raise them vitals back up to max. You’re going to need it for what comes next, and now is the best time since there’s nothing happening. When they’re at 80, burn off that last tumor and gel it.
We’ll now move on to the stomach. This is the toughest part so look lively! You’ll spot 3 blood pools so drain ’em, then move to the upper-right. Keep draining the pools you see. The big tumor shadow is under the last pool. Cut it out, but before draining the mucus, raise vitals back up to max. I know they’re almost at max already but DO IT fool, don’t question me. Drain the pool that forms, cut the exision line, then raise them again. Now pick it up, place it on the tray, then place the membrane and gel it. A bunch of new pools will form but IGNORE them. Quickly move down to the bottom part of the organ where you’ll find that a damaged area has sprung up. Drain the pools on top of it and treat it the same way you did the two previous times. Do it fast. Then drain the couple of pools just to the right of that. There’s a big tumor hiding under here. Shank it with the scalpel and treat it. Again, do it fast. When you put it on the tray 3 tiny tumors will form as well as two of those rashes that you have to gel. I dunno what they are man. Shiet. Keepin’ it real. Burn off the small tumors and then gel all the holes, the membrane and the rashes in one go. Next, quickly drain the couple of pools you see over on the left. There’s another big tumor hiding under here. Cut it up and treat it fast, same as the last one.
It bears mentioning that you need to do this part fast. It’s important to ignore everything else and concentrate on that damaged area and the two tumors because if left alone for too long, they’ll begin creating blood pools like it’s going outta style and then you definitely won’t get the third special bonus. Anyway, like I said, treat that tumor, but before picking it up, raise vitals up to around the 50s or 60s. Do it. When they’re up, you’re free to finish treating it, but then immediately move to the upper-right part of the organ. Again, ignore the gaggle of blood pools you see. You’ll find another damaged area up here. Drain the pools around it, then cut it and use the forceps to close the wound.
And just when you do that, the needle will fall in. Now this is the moment of truth. You’ll have to switch to the ultrasound and search around for it. You have to find that needle FAST, because while that thing isn’t sutured it will begin creating blood pools, and once it does that you will only get a good or maybe even a bad once you do suture it. The location of the needle is random. You can either get lucky and find it quickly, or have a standard amount of luck and find it after looking in a couple places, or get extremely unlucky and have to restart. Now, you should ignore the blood pools all over the place unless they are specifically blocking you from looking somewhere you think the needle could be. I recommend looking in five places. First, check just to the right of the damaged area. If you find it here, great! You just got extremely lucky (although actually, it seems to happen quite often that it ends up here. Maybe somewhere around 20% of the time). If it’s not there, look on the left side of the damaged area near the edge of the organ. Next, look around the top border of the organ. Then, check around the bottom border, and finally around the bottom-left part where the pyloric canal is.
Like I said before, if you find it on the first try, awesome. You’ll get the cool on the suture. If you find it after looking in a few places, you might get a good but don’t worry, is all good. You can still get the XS even if you got a good. On the other hand, if you can’t find it after looking around for a while, then you’re better off restarting and hoping you’re not so unlucky the next time. Don’t worry, it’s not that common to have to spend a lot of time looking for it. Note, however, that you have to be pretty eagle eyed. The needle looks like a small crescent moon and can be easily missed if you’re not careful. Either way, once you find it, press A with the ultrasound to make it grabbable (man… grabbable. Such a weird word), then pick it up with the forceps. Suture the wound quickly before more pools form, then place the synthetic membranes and gel it. Now you’re home free. Raise vitals a tiny bit if you have to, then start cleaning up. Drain all the pools around the organ and gel all the places that need it.
And we’re done. Close up that patient. This one’s a pretty easy one to suture because of the angle. I recommend somewhere around 12 passes. Gel it, and finally apply the bandage, but do it carefully and slowly to make sure you get the cool. If you got the cool on the damaged area after picking up the needle though, you can still get the XS even if you get a good on this bandage. Just sayin’.
And that’s pretty much it for this operation. Like I said, it’s not that difficult if you do it the way I’m telling you. The time limit special bonus is for 6:30, but you can finish this thing in less than 5:00. The less than 10 blood pools bonus is difficult to understand or even monitor, considering the extreme number of pools that appear throughout the operation, but all you really have to understand is that as long as you do things like I’ve told you, and do them fast, you will get this bonus. Finally, the losing the needle only once bonus? HOW IS IT EVEN POSSIBLE TO LOSE IT TWICE. I’m pretty sure the only way that could happen is if you were deliberately trying to assassinate the patient.
Hesitant Spirit
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-All patients transported
-No burns worsened
-Taped > 3 burns together at once
Another fun operation, but, again, not difficult after what we’ve been through with Hank. However, it CAN be an extremely overwhelming operation at first, and you can get caught just frantically going back and forth injecting stabilizer just to keep everyone from dying. But don’t worry, that’s what I’m here for. I’ll tell you the best way to do this. If you follow my instructions you’ll see that it’s really not so bad.
Let’s begin! There’ll be 4 inital patients to take care of. The first one you’re on has 3 glass shards stuck on ‘im as well as three burns. Here’s what you should do: First, extract the two glass shards on the bottom, but leave the one on the top. Make sure you get the cools when extracting those shards! If you get a good, just restart. Remember to use proper forceps technique throughout this operation: If you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! Next, apply gel over the two wounds the shards were in as well as the 3 burns. Keep spreading it around, it takes a bit to get the OK. Remember that you can’t just hold the button down the entire time while spreading the gel, you have to let go and press again several times.
Once you get the OKs, switch to the forceps and place the membranes from the tray on the left on the burns. I don’t have to tell you to avoid getting a miss right? Although, to be quite honest, you actually can miss twice and still get the XS. This game is funny like that. You can get two misses and still be fine, but sometimes getting a good is enough to fuck you over. But where was I? Oh right. The operation. After placing the three membranes, gel over all of them, then switch to the tape. Now, tape the two burns on the right side in a single shot. Just take the tape from the top-left corner of the top membrane down to the bottom-right corner of the bottom membrane. Don’t worry, it’s pretty lenient. Finally, remove the third glass shard. DON’T DO ANYTHING MORE. And definitely don’t talk with the patient. If you gel the final shard wound or tape the final burn that’ll bring in the next patient and we don’t want that just yet. Leave this muhfugga for now, don’t even raise his vitals, and switch to the second patient. He’ll be fine man, it’s just an untaped membrane and an ungelled wound.
The second patient is in bad condition. He has FIVE burns and a few blood pools. If you did the previous part fast, you’ll only have to deal with 3 blood pools, if you took a bit longer you’ll have 4 pools. It really doesn’t matter though since a gauze will only absorb 2 pools. Grab said gauze from the right side of the screen with the A button and absorb them pools. If you place it in between two pools you’ll be able to absorb two at the same time. Once the pools are gone you’ll be able to deal with the burns. Spread the gel all over them until you get the five OKs, then place the synthetic membranes on them. Same deal as last time, don’t get misses. Gel over the membranes now switch to the tape. First, tape the top two ones. They’re pretty far apart, so take each separately just to be safe. Again, these’re pretty lenient, so don’t worry too much about whether or not you’ll get the cools. Just tape each one from left to right and it’ll work out unless you’re, like, WAY off. Next, tape the bottom three burns ALL in a single shot. Take the tape from the left side of the left membrane alllll the way over to the right end of the rightmost membrane. It’s important that you do this because that’s how you’ll be getting the fourth special bonus. If you don’t do it you definitely won’t get the XS.
Once this is done, the next patient will be brought it, but it’s all good, we’re ready for that bitch. Don’t think we’re done with this one quite yet though! He’ll go into cardiac arrest so you’ll have to do chest compressions. You remember how to do this from the previous Maria operation right? Well just in case, here it is: Loosen up for this. Begin smacking down the wii remote as if you were hammering a nail with it. The way I like to do it is to have my palm facing downward so that I can snap my wrist more easily. Make sure to begin doing it as SOON as the hands appear. Hammer down each time the hands on the screen come down. You CAN simply hammer rapidly with no regards to anything and still get the cool but that’s tiring and there’s no reason to do that when doing it in tandem is so easy. It takes 5 compressions to get the cool.
Finally you’ll have to intubate him. Again, we already know how to do this. This is pretty easy and lenient so you can do it fast without having to be very precise. Point the cursor on the blue circle at the top of the tube and hold down A, then move the pointer in a straight line down all the way to the bottom, then release the A button, move the pointer again to the blue circle, hold down A and repeat it. Keep doing this the 3 or 4 times it takes until the tube is all the way in and this dude is stabilized! You shouldn’t have raised vitals at ALL during this entire patient.
You’ll automatically switch to the first patient. Tape the last burn on this guy that we left alone last time real quick. You can do this now because the next patient has already arrived. But LEAVE THE SHARD WOUND ALONE. Do not gel it. Now switch to the very last patient. This guy’s got a beam stuck on him as well as some blood pools. First, clean up the pools. Grab the gauze from the icon on the right and absorb them. You’ll need to grab two because there are four pools. As soon as you clean the last pool, the hydraulic cutter icon will pop up, so press it. Have the stick held towards the stabilizer while the cutter’s coming in, and once you can move again, inject two full doses of stabilizer in this guy. This’ll keep him alive for now while we attend to more pressing matters. Switch over to the second patient.
This one’ll have a gaggle of blood pools all centered around his arm. There are a LOT of them so you’ll need to use three gauzes. Also they’ll get soaked in like a microsecond so get new ones fast. Now the camera will pan out. You’ll have to cut open his sleeve with the scissors. Nothing special. Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough but don’t rush so much that you get careless and miss.
Now the sleeve will be open. There’ll be a lot of blood pools but before we can deal with them we’ll have to apply a torniquet. Press A on the torniquet icon and you’ll see a white circle appear on his upper arm. Press and hold A on this circle to make a second circle appear on the other side of the arm. Just make the pointer touch this circle, then go back to the first circle and release A while the pointer is inside it. That’ll apply the torniquet. Nothing too complicated. The only way to muck it up is to release the A prematurely.
Now we can mop up the blood. You’ll need to use two gauzes for this. Then, place three synthetic membranes along the wound, gel over them and tape over all three membranes in a single shot. Not too tough. That’ll be it for this guy. You shouldn’t have raised vitals at all for him.
You’ll go back to the first patient, but this isn’t where we want to be. Switch over to the second one. He’ll have 3 burns. Same shit as always, do I gotta keep repeating myself? Gel the burns, apply the synthetic membranes and then gel again over said membranes. However, after this, don’t tape them just yet. The hydraulic cutter has been done for a while now and the last patient is almost dead, so switch over to him real quick. We’ll have to secure a quick blood transfusion before he’ll stop nagging, so gel over the dot, then grab the needle from the bottom right icon and shove it in the green circle. Don’t rush too much. Or do whatever you want. I mean, you can miss twice throughout this whole operation and still get the XS so whatever. once you’ve put the needle in, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circle that appears to the right of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it. This’ll finally shut this guy up.
You’ll automatically get moved back to the second patient. Great! That’s where we want to be. Begin taping the three membranes you left last time. You can tape two of them in a single shot. Either the two bottom ones or the two left ones. Take your pick, doesn’t really matter. Next we’ll move on to the arm. Vitals are gonna be critical at this point but just ignore them. We can finish before he dies. There’ll be two burns and a single blood pool. Absorb the pool first, then gel the two burns, place the membranes on them, gel again and tape over both of them in a single shot. Now we’ll move to the other arm. There’s a burn and a laceration. Here’s what you should do. First gel over the burn and place a synthetic membrane over it. At this point you might be tempted to go ahead and place the rest of the membranes on the laceration as well but don’t do it. First gel over the burn and tape it. Why? Because the game has a tendency of giving you a miss and then a bad when you try to tape this burn if the other membranes are placed as well even if you do it correctly. Don’t ask me why. But better safe than sorry yeah? When the burn’s taken care of you can place the other two membranes, gel them and tape over both in a single shot. That’s it for this guy. See? No need to ever raise vitals.
Now we’ll go back to the very first patient. He’ll be almost dead but not quite. See, I told you he’d be fine! Press the talk icon, then gel the shard wound that we left way back at the start. This’ll stabilize him and bring in the final patient. This is why we didn’t want to talk to him until the very end. Because as long as the patient isn’t brought in, he CAN’T die. And we don’t have to waste time worrying about him.
Now it’s just us and the final patient with good vitals. So we can take this last part chill. No need to raise them at all. First absorb the two blood pools with a gauze, then move on to treating the three burns. Same deal as always. Tape either the two on the left or the two on the bottom in one shot (I didn’t in my video ’cause I suck balls).
We’re almost done. It’s a broken ankle, we’ll have to realign the foot. Press A on the bone icon on the bottom right. Now press and hold A on the foot, then move it to the left as far as you can. You’ll have to release the button and grab it a second time to pull it all the way though. Two times should be enough to get the ok. The trick with these disclocations is to move the foot FAST. Don’t hold it for very long or vitals will get pulverized. If you do it right you should get it done and have vitals still in the 50s, whereas if you hold it for very long it can get to critical in a couple seconds flat. Don’t worry about being gentle. That’s a lie.
Once it’s realigned, quickly press the A button the splint icon to the right. This’ll cause the blue circle on said splint to show up. Press and hold the A button on this blue circle and yank it to the right. Don’t worry about being gentle, just do it fast. When you do, a second splint will come up on the other side. No need to press the splint icon again. Just grab it from the blue circle and yank it over to the right. Finally, press the bandage icon to have two white dots come up. You know what to do. Bandage him up in exactly the same way you did for the blood transfusion just a few seconds ago and you’re done!
See, that wasn’t so hard! As long as you get all the cools and did everything like I told you, you’ll nab that XS. You can finish this operation in less than 2:00 but you can be waaay slower than that and still get the XS anyway.
Broken Heart
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Drill miss < 1 times
-Mallet swung < 23 times
-Cool bone chipping > 2 times
This operation is not difficult. It’s lenient as hell. In fact, I’d say it’s TOO lenient. You can take it all super omegalith slow and still get the XS. You can miss and still get the XS. You can get several goods and still get the XS. In short, you can play like total ass and still get the XS. Still, there are a few things you have to be aware of. The mallets especially can be confusing at first, but we’ll get to that.
Let’s start! We’ll first make the incision on the leg. You can either press the skip button whenever or manually pass through the dialogue so you don’t have to waste time readjusting your grip on the wiimote and wait till the screen is transitioning to hit skip. It doesn’t really matter ’cause like I said, you can take your sweet dang ol’ time with this operation.
Once we’re in, we’ll be manning the saw. Just press and hold the A button and do NOT let go of it until the end. To control the saw you just have to twist the wiimote to make the turns. You don’t even have to point it at the screen. Overall it’s not tough, it’s a pretty chill procedure but one thing you have to understand is that twisting the remote ONLY makes the saw turn. What I mean by this is that you might be inclined to think that when you make a turn, you have to keep the remote twisted to continue going in that direction. But that’s not true, as long as you keep the remote twisted the saw will continue turning indefinitely. You have to go back to neutral position after making a turn if you want to go straight. Also, the saw might look really big, but the only part that matters is that little red arrow on it. That’s the part that needs to stay inside the path. The rest can go off the margins and it doesn’t matter. Still, it helps to look at the entire thing to know where you’re going. A good tactic is to try having the blue guideline in between the two sticks. But whatevs. This is probably the easiest part of the whole thing.
Next, you’ll be cutting out a synthetic bone with the laser. This is old stuff so you already know how to do this right? Well just in case… Press A on the blue circle to start the laser. You have to go along the path and stay as close to the blue guideline as possible at all times. If you move out beyond the red lines you’ll get a miss, but beyond that, simply straying too far from the blue line means you’re getting less points. Not that it really matters. This procedure is similar to the adenoma cuttinh in the first Hank operation but not nearly as hard because there aren’t any crazy curves or ultra narrow paths. Though I BELIEVE the paths are narrower than in previous synthetic bone laserin’ ops. There are two other things you need to remember. Do NOT let go of the A button at any point for any reason. Second, do not go over the lit circle or the laser will stop. Always stay within this circle and let the camera move the laser forward for you while you concentrate on staying within the guideline. It’s usually a good idea though to stay relatively near the fringes of the lit circle because this causes the camera to move faster, but it’s definitely not necessary for this operation. The closer you go back to the center of the circle the slower it’ll go until it stops completely. Generally speaking, I recommend letting the camera take you forward during the straight paths but moving forward yourself during the curves.
There’s one new gimmick here though, and that’s the machine giving us static. If you try to continue along the path while the static is present you’ll get a miss, so what you have to do is stop moving forward once you hear the static. To stop moving, simply slowly move the laser back along the path until the lit circle finishes catching up to you. You’ll stop moving as long as you’re right in the middle of the circle. Just wait a few seconds for the static to go away, then continue moving forward.
There are two areas with static. Like I said before, you will know they’re coming because you’ll hear them. Other than that, I suppose it also helps to know where they’ll be in advance. The first one will come up right after the path starts moving straight downward. After that, the second one will come after the path starts moving straight upward again. Anyway, after you finish this part, and while the screen is transitioning, I recommend holding the remote with both hands. That’s because you’ll have to place the synthetic bone now, and your hand has to be steady for this. Also, have the remote twisted a bit counterclockwise before you grab the bone so that when you have to turn it clockwise your hand is in a more neutral position. Make sure the right side of the bone (the straight part) is properly aligned with the silhouette and let it go. This one’s not super strict but there’s no need to rush either.
Next, you’ll have to drill a few holes. We’ve done this before as well. Press and hold A on the blue circle that appears, then move the cursor away from the drill to start moving it in. Try to keep it in more or less a straight line, though don’t worry too much because it’s pretty lenient in this regard. Keep in mind that the farther away you pull the faster the drill goes. To get the cool here you have to bring the tip of the drill as close to the red line at the end without actually touching it. If you do touch it you’ll get a miss. I recommend taking it reasonably slow for this. Pull the drill a lot at first, but once it gets closer to the end move back a little to slow it down. This way you can get the cool without much danger. You’ll have to drill 3 holes.
Next you’ll have to apply the screws. Watch out, these guys are deceptive. And getting the cool on these is different from screws before. Here’s the deal. Watch the screw. See the ring the point is attached to? You have to press and hold the A button and release it when that ring is just about to touch the yellow silhouette. Not once it’s already touching it. Just BEFORE that point. If you’re still not sure where you should release the button, just look at this picture:
Anyway, you gotta put in 3 screws. Stay alert. While it’s true that you are allowed to get goods, you don’t want to get them if you can help it. Next, you’ll have to pick up 3 broken bone shards. …yeah. That’s right, we’re doing cleanup duty now. Whatever, put ’em on the tray and forget about ’em. After that, it’s another saw section. Same shit as last time, the only difference is now the turns are sharper. It’s still nothing special though. I recommend treating the path like a racetrack and the saw like your car. Start turning slight before you get to a hairpin turn so that you can clear it more easily. Don’t worry about the blue line, just stay inside the path and it’s all good. Or cool. I meant cool. Good means bad in this game.
Now we get to the mallet part. We’ve done this part before but it can still be a little confusing nonetheless so let me now dispel all confusion regarding this procedure.
The first thing you have to understand is that the mallet has three levels of power, indicated by the power meter on the right. You’ll notice that there are 5 segments. The number of segments that light up indicate the power of a swing. Now, this is important: there are 5 segments on the meter but in reality there are only THREE levels of power. The levels are: strong (or full power), which is indicated by all 5 segments lighting up. Weak (or minimum power), which is indicated by a single segment lighting up. And mid power, which is indicated by either two, three, or four segments lighting up.
Each nail requires a different combination of strikes to be driven in in as little strikes as possible while not going overboard, which will net you a miss. Well. Actually there is a bit of leniency and you can do more strikes than is actually necessary if you make them weaker than you should, but I’ll only tell you what you need to drive it in with as few strikes as possible.
Now, you’re going to have to make hammering motions with the remote to drive the nail in. I recommend changing your grip. Normally you have your thumb up on the buttons, but for this it should simply wrap around the remote as if you were grabbing the hilt of a sword or a hammer. Before making the hammering down motion, I actually recommend having the cursor on screen. Not sure why but this seems to help with the motion registering. Specifically, if you’re going to do a full power swing, have the cursor as far to the top of the screen as you can (while still being inside the screen), and then swing down so that the cursor moves down across the screen as fast as possible. It’s not just about the cursor moving fast though. The actual motion has to be strong (though contrary to what you may think it doesn’t actually have to be THAT strong, but since you can’t go past full power, it doesn’t hurt to be a bit stronger than necessary). Snap your wrist when doing the motion to give it that added oomph.
On the other end of the scale, the minimum power strike. For this one, you want to make the weakest motion possible. Do NOT snap your wrist at all when doing it. Keep it locked firmly in place and simply shake your arm up and then down. The amount that your arm has to move is minuscule. I’m talking like barely an inch or some shit. It’s actually pretty easy to do and I recommend tending towards making the motion TOO slight. Why? Because if the motion is too weak then it simply won’t register, and all you have to do is try again, making it ever-so-slightly stronger. Finally, for the mid power strike, I suggest making a motion similar to the weak strike but moving your arm a little higher before swinging. Say… 4 inches maybe? Whatever, you know what I mean.
Anyway that’s the gist of it. The first nail that we have to drive in requires two full power strikes, a mid one, and a weak one. You can do them in any order you want, it’s up to you. I like to leave the weak strike for last because it’s the easiest one. I’m not entirely sure what’s easier between the full power and mid power strikes. Logic would tell me the full power one is easier because there’s nothing to calculate, all you have to do is make the motion as strong as possible. But in practice…hmm… it seems different from the last operation somehow. Either way, just do it in the order that seems easier to you.
The second nail (it’s not actually a nail but you know what they say. When you got a hammer everything looks like a nail! Wait… is that really how it goes? Shiet, I don’t even know what I’m saying anymore). The second nail requires the exact same as the first one. Two full power strikes, one mid, and one weak.
After that, it’s time for a new procedure! We’ll be shaving the bone. Move the shaver closer to the bone by tilting the control stick. If you tilt it all the way it’ll go SUPER fast and that’s a little dangerous because it’s pretty easy to get a miss or a good that way. Truth is there’s no need to rush, so just tilt it partway and make minuscule adjustments as you go. You’ll probably want to make it go slower as you get near the sweet spot. To get the cool you have to stop shaving (that is to say, return the stick to neutral position) when the shaver is just about perfectly overlapping with the silhouette. That’s all there is to it. I recommend looking at line of the half ball and letting go when that line is touching the same line of the silhouette.
For the third nail, you need a single full power strike and a weak one. I like doing the strong one first and then the weak one. After that we’re done with this patient and we’ll have to close him up with the stapler so assume stapling stance while the screen is transitioning. You know what I mean. Grab the remote with both hands and twist the remote counterclockwise. Press and hold the A button so that you can use the stapler by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Now watch the guideline and make minute changes to the angle of your remote until you match it. Position the cursor so that the stapler overlaps the guideline. There’s some leeway, but try to have it overlap as perfectly as you can. Finally, remember that you don’t have to change the angle at all for the 5 staples, only the location! Feel free to take it as slow as you want. We’ve got more than enough time.
Once that’s done we’ll move on to the next patient. We’ll have to make another incision, same as the start of the operation. Careful not to go out of the line! I’m saying because the stapler section might have rattled you a bit and you might not be in the right state of mind. That always happens to me. I can do the beginning incision smooth and flawless but this one? I’m just trembling all over the god damn place. But I digress. Let’s go inside.
Oh jesus! This guy’s leg exploded or some shit. Grab all the bone fragments strewn about and place them all on the tray to the right. Doesn’t matter in what order you get ’em. When that’s done, you’ll have to reassemble the bone. Ok. Now calm down and take it slow. Believe it or not this is the most dangerous part of the operation. It’s extremely easy to get goods when placing the bones if you’re being too fast and there’s absolutely no need to! Also, at this point I recommend holding your right hand with your left to increase stability as well.
First you need to realign both ends of the fibula which are dislocated. You’ll see the blue circle pop up where you need to grab them. Move them over to the left and release them when they’re aligned with the silhouette. Be extra careful with the bottom one, it’s easy to get a bad here if you do it too fast. Hold it over the silhouette for a bit if you have to and only release it once you’re sure it’s in the proper place. Also make sure your hand doesn’t move when you’re releasing the button.
Once that’s done we’ll begin reconstruction by placing the fragments we previously picked up. They’ll come at you in random order from the tray on the left so I can’t really tell you where each one goes (though you CAN look at my video to see). Rest assured though that you will never get a fragment that can’t be connected to what’s already there. So ALL you have to do is check whether the fragment will fit on the top or the bottom. Simple! The fibula has two fragments you need to place and the tibia has four. Again, take it VERY slow here because this part is deceptively dangerous. Watch the straight end of each fragment and make sure it’s aligned with the straight end of the silhouette before releasing it.
After that you’ll drill 4 holes in the bone. Same thing as last time. Treat it the same way. The holes are a little bit smaller and are thus more lenient but they’re still not quite small enough that I would recommend ramming the drill in as fast as possible. Just do it the same way as last time.
Next, it’s screwing time! These screws are different from the ones on the previous patient. You’ll have to use a different cue to know when to release the A button on them. Look at the bottom line of the ring the screw’s tip is attached to. To get the cool you have to release the A button when that line touches the top line of the silhouette cap. If you’re not sure what I mean, look at this picture:
After that we’ll drill again, but this particular drill is loooong and more similar to the rods that we had to insert on the patient in the previous Hank operation than anything else. As such, it’s also REALLY easy. Hold down the A button on the blue circle and yank the cursor downward to start the drill moving. You can do this because you won’t get a miss early on if you go outside the path. You’ll only get a miss if you go out once the drill has been moving for a while. Then once it’s already moving you have plenty of time to adjust your cursor. Place it far ahead of the blue arrow that appears to keep the drill moving at full speed but keep it steady in between the two red lines that make up the path. It’s not too difficult, it’s all about simply keeping the cursor steady. You shouldn’t have problems here.
Now it’s mallet time again! I already told you the basics about this procedure a few paragraphs back. This first nail is a long one. It requires THREE full power strikes and a mid power one. The second nail (yeah, yeah, it’s not a nail) requires a full power strike, a mid, and a weak. The third one only one full power and one weak. In between that you’ll also have to shave the bone twice. It’s the same deal as last time though. Just let the stick go back to neutral position once the shaver is completely overlapping with the silhouette.
And we’re done! Staple the bitch shut using the same technique you did a couple minutes ago. This operation is too long, clanky. But it’s easy as well. Maybe they were trying to overcompensate after how crazy they made the last Hank operation?
The Healing Warrior
Special Bonus
-No bads
-Gates opened < 6 times
-Operation completed in 200 sec
-Ran into wall < 2 times
As usual for Tomoe operations, this one isn’t very hard. However, it is trickier than the others because the lungs make for quite the confusing labyrinth. Is all good though. I’ll tell you exactly where you have to go.
As soon as you start, a big sign telling you there’s a time limit will pop up. This is a good time to hit that skip button since that big sign will stay there for a few seconds and won’t let you move. Oh, also it’s a big lie. 6 minutes? No. The real time limit is 3:20. That might seem like it’s not much time at first but it really is. In fact that’s 30 to 40 seconds too much. See, Atlus? I’m better than whatever XS requirement testers you got around there. I’d even do it for free so start firing some motherfuckers.
Ahem, where was I? Oh right. As soon as the sign leaves, start moving forward until you get to the fork in the road. Look to the left and you’ll spot a hemorrhage and a blood pool. I recommend treating the hemorrhage first IF the blood pool isn’t in the way so that it doesn’t create any extra pools and you save some time. But treat the pool first if it’s in the way or you already have the drain out anyway. You already know how to treat these things. Center on the blue circle on the hemorrhaging area and switch to the hemostatic forceps. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. The timing probably takes a bit of practice to get down. What I recommend is doing it enough times that you more or less have a “feel” for how much time is required before letting go of the button. On top of watching of course. If you accidentally let go to soon, it doesn’t matter, just do it again, but make sure to release it almost immediately as soon as the hemostasis starts again because chances are you’ll be very close to the sweet spot. As always, it’s important to try to get those cools but you can get a good (maybe more?) and still get the XS.
Let’s continue. You’ll see three gated paths. One of the paths has a pool of blood on it. That’s what will indicate to you the path you should take. In fact, that’s what you should do all the way until you reach the ruptured bulla. Just keep following the paths with affected areas. You also don’t need to ever raise vitals until you reach the bulla.
Anyway drain the pool and go through the gate. There’ll be another hemorrhage and a pool past it, then a fork in the road. Take the left path and you’ll see a gate as well as more affected areas. Treat them all and go through the gate. That makes 2 gates we’ve opened! Remember that our limit is 6. Treat the pool past the gate, then continue on the path that goes upwards. The tunnel here is pretty narrow but at least there’s no peristaltic movement like the last operation so it should be fine.
Treat the affected areas here and go past the next gate. That makes 3. You’ll immediately and easily see a blood pool after you go through, so drain it and go down that path. There’ll be another pool followed by the fourth gate. Past it is a single hemorrhage. Perform hemostasis on it and then quickly go down the path to the left of it to find the bulla!
The game will tell you to spray it but ignore that. It’s a lie. OH GOD THE LIES! Haha, no, in reality there’ll be severe hemorrhaging that’ll prevent us from sealing the thing. So really, it’s a waste of time to even try. However, the game won’t let us proceed until we’ve treated at least 4 hemorrhages here. As soon as you get here, the first hemorrhage will pop up. Treat it same as always. You can be more bold than usual here because these hemorrhages will only give you OKs. It’s impossible to get a good on them. Anyway, after treating that first one, instead of trying to spray the bulla like the game tells you, take the time to inject stabilizer and raise vitals. It’s pretty much the best time to do it since we’re stuck here for the time being. Make one full injection in between treating each hemorrhage. Make sure to count them.
As soon as you treat the fourth hemorrhage, press down on the d-pad to retrace your steps. This is the tough and confusing part so listen up! Keep retracing as you go back through the first gate…then the second one… from there, once the path begins curving, stop. Do not keep retracing past a third gate. Look down from where you are and you’ll spot a hemorrhage. Treat it and keep going down that path past the gate. That makes five that we’ve opened! Drain the pool past it, then keep going until you get to the fork. Take the bottom path and you’ll quickly find the cause of the severe hemorrhaging. A thrombus? The hell is up with this guy’s lungs.
Now, before we begin treating it, raise vitals ALL the way to max. Make sure they’re maxed out, if you don’t…well you’re going to regret it. Then switch to the syringe (the bottom one, not the stabilizer) and inject it with medicine. It’s going to need two separate injections to get enough. I recommend making the first injection small so that the second injection needs to be bigger and you have more time to see where you should release the button. To get the cool on this you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it.
Once enough medicine has been injected, switch to the scalpel. You’ll see excision dots appear on the thrombus. If you don’t see them appear, it means you’re too close! Back. Off. Baby. Switch to the scalpel and cut along the dotted line. You have to make sure to pass along every dot. This will rape vitals, so that’s why it’s important that you have them at max before you start. Keep cutting (three times) until it’s done. Remember that each time a new line appears, you can’t start cutting immediately! You have to wait a fraction of a second. If you don’t wait, you’ll blow past the first one or two dots without cutting them and will have to go back.
When you’re done, vitals will be at turbo critical. Switch to the stabilizer and do three full injections before proceeding. Then switch to the snare to excise the thrombus. Move it with the control stick and get it to overlap with the yellow ring. You can move the angle of the snare by twisting your wrist (the one grabbing the nunchuck of course) but truth is you BARELY have to do this. The snare almost always comes out at or close to the right angle. Just have it overlap with the circle and if nothing happens twist your wrist to either direction just a tiny bit. Eventually it’ll close around the thrombus by itself. This’ll cause a hemorrhage and a pool to appear. Switch to the hemostatic forceps and treat it (unless the pool appears on top of it), careful because the view is kinda shitty. Drain the pool afterwards and pick up the thrombus with the forceps.
We’re done here! Time to go back. Listen up so you don’t get lost. Hold down on the d-pad to retrace your steps. Keep going until you go past the gate, then when the path begins curving after said gate, stop and look up. You’ll see another open gate. That’s where we came from. Move through that gate and keep going straight through the next gate after that. Once you get past it, take the left path to get back to the bulla. There’ll be a shitload of hemorrhages so perform hemostasis on them all. Don’t be afraid, you can’t get cools on these. On the other hand, don’t go overboard with them either. Once they’re all dealt with, switch to the spray and use it on the bulla. Keep holding down the button there until the operation finishes and that’s it!
As long as you took the path I told you you will have opened less than 6 gates and will have easily finished in less than 3:20. As long as you also got all the cools you’ll get the XS, and hell, even if you got a few goods you still will. Not a tough operation overall.
Blade of Resolve
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Vitals didn’t fall below 30
-Burn worsened < 1 times
-Membrane fell off < 1 times
Fffffffuuuuuuuuck. Shit just got real. This operation is extremely difficult. And I mean EXTREMELY. I’d put it right up there with Love in the Ground. Hell, maybe even higher than that. Point is, the gloves are off. This is going to take many tries. It’s insaaane. To get the XS for this operation you not only have to get all the cools, but you also have to complete it in less than 1:20! (actually, you will get the XS if you do it in exactly 1:20). That’s a ridiculously short amount of time and it makes even the smallest things like split second hesitations, or your finger slipping on the control stick or missing the bottle of stabilizer have profound consequences. You need to be flash gordon, you need to memorize exactly what you have to do and be able to do it without even thinking. In addition to that, there is a very important trick to getting the XS. We’ll get to that later.
When the operation starts, don’t hit the skip button immediately. Unfortunately, Unlike previous Trauma Centers, you can’t hit the skip button before the operation has started. The hell is up with that? It’s a problem because having to press that button all the way down there forces you to change the position of your hand on the wiimote, and it costs precious seconds to readjust. And those seconds matter with an operation this difficult!
The first thing we’ll do is drain the 3 blood pools. If you see that 2 pools appeared touching each other, then guess what, you are one lucky bastard because you can place the drain in between them to drain them both at the same time and save like a second or two. Oh you think it doesn’t matter? Hehe… isn’t that cute. BUT IT’S WRONG! I’m not saying it’s NECESSARY, but oh, it matters believe me.
Either way, set your cursor on the topmost blood pool, have the control stick pressed toward the bottom-right and begin passing the dialogue with A. When Tomoe says “This’ll be a race”, press and hold the A button. You’ll now begin draining the pool you have the cursor on. Memorize just how long it takes to drain a pool so that you can quickly move on to the next one wasting as little time as possible. Again, the tiniest things make a difference. Go from top to bottom draining the 3 pools.
When the last one is drained, keep the A button held down and quickly switch to the forceps. You’re going to keep the A button held down so you can use the forceps with one button, remember, if you keep the A button held down, you’ll be able to use the forceps by only pressing the B button, which will allow you must greater precision and control than having to press both A and B! This is important because you’ll now want to place those synthetic membranes on the second degree burn at the bottom faster than speedy gonzales. Keep in mind that the area where you can place them is lenient enough that you can do it VERY fast without much fear of missing. Let me reiterate. You need to place membranes VERY fast in this operation. This is one of the places where you can more safely shave off time compared to others.
After you’ve placed the two membranes, switch to the antibiotic gel and spread it over them as well as the two rashes on either side. Do it quickly and then switch back to the forceps. If one of the rashes didn’t go away because you switched back to the forceps too fast, it’s fine, don’t worry. We’ll get it later.
Now pull out the glass shard on the right. The trick with the shard is to grab it and then pull it out making as straight a line as possible the entire way. Of course, said line must be perpendicular to the cut the shard is lodged in. If you’ll notice, the cut on this one is almost vertical but a bit tilted to the left which means we don’t want to extract it exactly to the right but more or less towards the 2 o’ clock direction. This should get you the cool, then place it on the tray to the right.
Next, and while we’ve got the forceps in hand, it’s time to extract the wire. As usual, the wires are not straight. There is literally no time to check with the ultrasound so you should memorize their shape so that you can extract them without using it. This particular one is only bent once, to get it out properly, you should extract it upwards and just a little to the left. There is no need to change the direction you’re pulling it, just pull it more or less towards the 11 o’ clock direction in a single go. You should be able to do it reasonably fast. Put it on the tray and then gel both the wire wound, the shard wound, and any rash you might have left before in one go (you’ll have to pass a single line of dialogue after extracting the wire).
We’ll now turn our attention towards the 3 lacerations. These are cunts. They’re deliberately placed in just the right position to fuck us up as much as possible. Horizontal lacerations are just really difficult to deal with compared to more vertical ones. You just can’t be as fast when suturing them. Furthermore, it’s easier to accidentally get goods on them, especially on the last one that you suture for some reason. Nevertheless, what I recommend to get cools on these is to make a “w” shape with the sutures. And I don’t mean the capital W (though this can work too), I mean the squiggly lower-case one. Make them relatively big so that they cover the length of the lacerations and you’ll get the cool. If you get a good in any place you will definitely not get the XS so just restart unless you want to practice the rest of the operation.
If you did things correctly and fast enough, the vitals should still be just above 30. Remember, you can’t let them fall below that or you won’t get the XS. Take the time to inject just a single syringe of stabilizer to get them up to 40, then begin work on the 3rd degree burn. Like Tomoe says, you gotta inject the coolant from the blue vial into the burn. Note that the amount you have to inject is absolutely TINY, so there is no need to waste time filling the syringe. Just get a tiny bit, inject it, and it’ll work. This’ll make the scalpel line appear around it. Switch to the scalpel and begin cutting. You have to pass through all the dots. It’s very important that you do it fast but not so fast that you start missing dots and have to go back. Do go back if you miss a dot, but generally speaking it’s just plain better if you get them all in one pass. After you’re done, grab the burn with the forceps and place it on the tray. Here’s something to keep in mind: if you did it fast enough, there will only be a single blood pool when you remove the burn. If a second blood pool forms, that means you were too slow and you’re off to a bad start. It doesn’t necessarily mean you can’t get the XS, I mean, you could save time in other places… theoretically.
Anyway, drain that pool, then place 4 membranes on the burn. Remember, it’s lenient enough that you can place those membranes VERY fast. Once all 4 are in place, don’t gel them just yet. Now that nothing major is happening yet, take the time to inject three full syringes of stabilizer and get the vitals close to max. It’s important that you do this fast and that you don’t accidentally miss the bottle when refilling. What’s that you’re saying? “Who cares if I miss the bottle?” Maaaan you don’t get it. Every tiny seemingly insignificant waste of time makes a difference in this operation. Use the warping method too.
When filling the syringe or injecting with it, you may notice that as long as you have the button pressed, and as long as the syringe hasn’t finished filling up/emptying out, you can move the wiimote as much as you want and the cursor won’t move. But as soon as the syringe is done filling/emptying, the cursor will appear where you are currently pointing the remote. Using this trick, you can save some time. You can move the remote over to the stabilizer bottle while the syringe is injecting, and when it’s done the cursor will already be over the bottle, which means you can immediately fill it up again. It works the same the other way. While it’s filling up you can move away from the bottle and inject immediately.
Now gel over the 4 membranes. Once this is done, we’ll have to move over to the legs with the magnification tool. At this point you can finally hit the skip button, but make sure that you have the control stick pointed towards the ultrasound and begin moving to the left with B immediately. We’ll treat the bottom burn first since it’s not so bad and if we leave it like that it’ll turn into a third degree one. First drain the two pools, then switch to the forceps.
We’re going to extract the wire first. This one’s tough at first. It might seem like it has a really weird shape and that you have to extract it in a funky way, but in reality we can keep it pretty simple. You just have to extract it in two directions. First to the left, and when it’s halfway out, change the direction you’re pulling to the 10-11 o’ clock direction. Don’t be recklessly fast with it. Keep the speed down to the limit where you can reliably make the change of direction. Place it on the tray to the right and then immediately begin placing the 2 membranes on the burn while you have the forceps out. Then gel them both as well as the wire wound in one go.
Next we’ll move on to the lacerations. These are actually easier than the first 3 we sutured before. Maybe because they’re slightly more vertical? Either way, drain the blood pool on them and suture them. Keep the number of passes somewhere between 4 and 7 and you should get the cools. Like I said, these seem to be more lenient than the previous ones so it shouldn’t be much of a problem.
Once that’s done, switch to the forceps and extract the glass shard. This is a long one so make sure that you pull straight perpendicular to the wound and keep pulling until it’s ALL out. Don’t go jumping the gun and stopping prematurely. Just pull it really far up to be safe. Then gel the wound and switch to the syringe.
Vitals should now be in the 40s, which is cutting it kinda close, so inject a single syringe full of stabilizer to get them up to the 50s. Then quickly inject the coolant into the burn on the right. If you’ve done things fast enough, no blood pool should have formed by now on it. If a pool did form, it means you’re being too slow and you’ll get a miss if you try to inject the coolant. The scalpel line will appear around the burn. Hey, is it me or does this burn have an African shape? I mean look at it. Anyway, furthermore, if you are fast enough, you can cut out this burn and then remove it before the pool forms! If you’re too slow, the pool will form while you’re cutting. In that case, just ignore it, finish cutting, and drain it after you’ve removed the burn with the forceps. Don’t worry, you won’t get a miss from removing it if there’s a blood pool in the way. Once that’s done, drain the pool (or pools if you were too slow), and then place 3 membranes on it, then gel them.
We’ll not move on to the burn on the far left. It’ll probably have accumulated 2 pools by now, so drain them both. At this point vitals are probably in the 30s, which is, again, cutting it kinda close, so inject stabilizer once to get them back up to the 40s, then inject the coolant. Remember, the amount of coolant you have to inject is tiny, so don’t waste time filling up the entire syringe or nuthin’. Cut it out same as last time, then remove it. Drain the single pool that’ll form and then place the 2 membranes. Now, before you gel them, inject 2 full syringes of stabilizer so that you get the vitals up to 60. This’ll be the last time you raise them. Now gel the 2 membranes and immediately move back to the right with the magnification tool.
There’ll be 2 new burns (HOW?!) as well as a shitload of rashes. When moving to the right, adjust the screen so that when you arrive, you’re able to see the entire area, from the topmost rash down to the one on the very bottom.
First, drain the 2 blood pools, then switch to the forceps and place the 4 membranes one right after the other. 2 on each burn. When that’s done, start gelling them as well as ALL of the rashes in one go. The way I recommend doing this is to first gel the membranes on the top burn but spread it wide enough that you also get the 2 rashes on each side, then move on to the membranes on the bottom and gel in a circular motion so that you get the 4 rashes around it. I also recommend that you memorize more or less how long it takes to get the OKs so that you can stop immediately without wasting time.
We’re almost done, but there are 3 shadows under the skin that we have to treat. Two of them are above where the bottom burn used to be, and the other one is to the left and a bit below. Again, I suggest that you memorize the locations of the shadows so that you can get them out immediately. They will always appear in the same spot. Use the scalpel to open them. Unlike previous Trauma Centers, judicious use of the scalpel won’t cause lacerations, so feel free to keep it active the entire time while cutting the shadows. Cut all three of them one after the other, then drain the three blood pools, and then suture them in the same order that you drained the pools (otherwise a second pool might form on the first one). To get the cools on these lacerations you just have to make 3 passes. So all you have to do is make an “N” shape. You can make more passes if making only 3 is too uncomfortable but it’s not necessary.
And we’re done, but there’s one final thing to do. The patient will go into cardiac arrest and we’ll have to use the defibrillator. This is the important trick to getting the XS that you have to be aware of: you do NOT have to revive the patient. You only have to use the defibrillator once. That means it’s not necessary to stop the gauge in the green part! So what I recommend doing is this. As soon as you’ve sutured the final laceration, pull your arms back so that they’re close to your torso and HOLD DOWN the Z and B buttons! Wait for the nunchuck icon to appear (do NOT jump the gun please, god), and then extend your arms forward. If you’re already pressing Z and B then the defibrillator will activate immediately once you extend your arms and the operation will end.
And that’ll be it. Again, this operation is really fucking hard. If you get even one good you’ve failed. But even if you get all the cools you still have to work TURBO fast so that you finish in 1:20. It’s going to take a huge amount of tries, but don’t get discouraged. It’s not impossible! Hang in there and you’ll eventually get it. And the more times you do it, the more consistently you’ll be able to XS it.
Desperate Rescue
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-All patients transported
-Cool > 25 times
-Defibrillator used < 1 times
Lol. This operation is really easy (or maybe it just looks easy compared to the previous operation). Mainly because you can be slower than a snail, do everything totally calm and calculated, or get a couple goods, hell, even a bad, 2 misses, and STILL get the XS. COME ON guys, kinda going overboard with the leniency here? Still, it’s got some pretty epic music so I’ll forgive them…this time.
Hit the skip button as soon as the operation starts and the patient you’re on will go into cardiac arrest. Like Mournful Hero, this guy will do this 3 times until he can be stabilized. However, unlike Mournful Hero, he won’t do it during regular intervals. It’ll be random, and depending on when he decides to go into cardiac arrest (fickle bastard), you’ll do things a little bit differently. But like I said, he’ll do this immediately and you’ll have to start doing chest compressions. You already know how to do this from the first mission: Loosen up for this. Begin smacking down the wii remote as if you were hammering a nail with it. The way I like to do it is to have my palm facing downward so that I can snap my wrist more easily. Make sure to begin doing it as SOON as the hands appear. Hammer down each time the hands on the screen come down. You CAN simply hammer rapidly with no regards to anything and still get the cool but that’s tiring and there’s no reason to do that when doing it in tandem is so easy. It takes 5 compressions to get the cool. Count them so that you’re ready to switch patients after the fifth one.
After the fifth compression, press A on the second patient icon to switch to her. It might take a few presses because the icons don’t become available after a couple seconds when the chest compressions are done. The screen will pan out and the scissor line will appear. Press A on the scissors icon to the right. This’ll make the scissors appear. We gotta cut the patient’s shirt off now. Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough, really. You can do this part pretty fast. Not that you have to. You never have to rush at all throughout this operation.
Once the shirt is off, you’ll find 3 wounds. Two of ’em have a blood pool so grab a single gauze from the right and absorb both pools with it. Now switch to the forceps and begin placing the synthetic membranes. Two on each wound. Note that they are smaller and slightly less lenient than on the previous operation, so you should try not to rush. Just place them all calmly so you don’t get a miss. Once all 6 are in place, gel over them and then switch to the tape. Now. Be careful in this part. We are going to apply 3 tapes. The ones on the right are not much of a problem, but the one on the left can be a little tricky. So tape that one first. To get the cool I recommend going from left to right. Start from the left edge, about 1/4 of the way up from the bottom-left corner, and finish on the right edge about 1/4 of the way down from the top-right corner. Don’t go very far past the edge of the membrane or you risk getting a good. Not that it would make you fail the operation, but if we get all the cools it means we can be even slower so why not. After that, tape the other two. Those are more lenient, so you can do it with less fear. You should tape diagonally from top to bottom.
Once that’s done, the camera will transition to, I dunno, a bit higher up on the patient? Whatever. More importantly, once that happens the reinforcements will arrive. All patients’ vitals will max out and the epic music will start! Let’s do this thang! Grab a gauze from the lower right while this is happening and begin absorbing the blood pools. There are only 2 so you only need to use one gauze. Once they’re absorbed, switch to the forceps and place the two membranes on the wound. This one is mildly deceptive so you’ll want to take it slow. I recommend going diagonally from left to right. Start on the left edge of the membrane, about 1/4 of the way up from the bottom-left corner. When you start, stick closer to being inside it rather than outside the edge. Take the tape all the way to the top-right corner exactly and end there. That should get you the cool.
That’ll stabilize the patient and we’ll move back to the first one. If you’re lucky, he’ll go into his second cardiac arrest here. If he does, go ahead and do the 5 chest compressions. If he doesn’t, welp, that’s too bad, we’ll just have to move on and come back later. Either way, switch to the second patient icon now. Yeah, the one with an exclamation mark. That one.
Oh jesus! This one’s ugly. He’s got 6 wounds and 4 glass shards stuck in him. This is actually the hardest part of the operation, so heads up. And not because of the glass shards. First, hit the talk icon down there. Then switch to the forceps and begin extracting all the shards. The trick with these guys is to grab them and then pull them out making as straight a line as possible the entire way. Of course, said line must be perpendicular to the cut they’re lodged in. As long as you keep it steady and don’t take them out too fast you’ll get those cools. Once that’s done, you’ll have to place 8 membranes on the wounds. The two big ones require 3 membranes each, while the two small ones only require one. The tiny ones just need to be gelled, which you should do along with all of the membranes after you have placed them all.
Switch to the tape. Now comes the difficult part. Why difficult? Because those two small wounds are cunts and very likely to give you goods. They’re just not lenient. Fortunately, I’ll tell you exactly what you have to do to ensure those two cools. Unlike all the previous ones, you should not try to tape these diagonally because the risk of getting a good is too big like that. Instead, you should apply the tape vertically from top to bottom. First of all, take this extremely slow. You want to make sure that you start EXACTLY on the top edge of the membrane right in the middle and then end EXACTLY on the bottom edge, again, right in the middle. Do not go over the edges even a little bit. Make sure that the tape is VERTICAL when you finish placing it. Again, remember to do it very slowly!
Once those two are done, you can relax because the worst part’s over. Tape the other two series of membranes diagonally from the top-left corner down to the bottom-right corner. Try not to go too much over the edges, but don’t worry, these aren’t as bad as the other two. That’ll stabilize this patient.
You’ll go back to the first one. If he didn’t have his second cardiac arrest yet, chances are he’ll have it now, so do the 5 chest compressions same as last time. If he already had his second cardiac arrest previously, chances are good he won’t have the next one right now. A new patient will also arrive at this point, and this is the next one we have to treat, so press A on the last patient icon. Now, immediately after you press it, pull back your arms close to your torso! We’re using the defibrillator! It’s very important that you revive the patient in a single shot by hitting Z and B on the green part of the bar. It’s pretty easy, after doing it a few times you should be getting it every time without much effort. If you don’t, though, then just restart because you’re not getting the XS.
After that, you’ll do chest compressions. Wha? I thought we just used the defibrillator successfully. Why do we need chest compressions. Whatever man, I ain’t no doctor. Do the 5 compressions same as always. Then we’ll have to intubate. This is pretty easy and lenient so you can do it fast without having to be very precise. Point the cursor on the blue circle at the top of the tube and hold down A, then move the pointer in a straight line down all the way to the bottom, then release the A button, move the pointer again to the blue circle, hold down A and repeat it. Keep doing this the 3 or 4 times it takes until the tube is all the way in and you’re done with this patient!
You’ll now move to the third patient, and a brand new one will get added to the list! If the first patient had his second cardiac arrest at the earliest possible, he might be having his third one right now. But, then again, maybe not. So fuck ‘im. He can resist anyway. Switch to the newly arrived patient. The fourth one. Yeah. That one.
Oh another cardiac arrest? This is starting to get ridiculous. Is that the hip thing to do nowadays? Do the 5 chest compressions it takes. Then we’ll move on to the right arm. There are two wounds but the left one is bleeding. Bleeding bayud. So we gotta apply a torniquet. If you try to mop the pools it’s just gonna keep on bleeding. Press A on the torniquet icon and you’ll see a white circle appear on his upper arm. Press and hold A on this circle to make a second circle appear on the other side of the arm. Just make the pointer touch this circle, then go back to the first circle and release A while the pointer is inside it. That’ll apply the torniquet. Nothing too complicated. The only way to muck it up is to release the A prematurely.
Once that’s done, grab the gauze on the right side of the screen and use it on the mass of blood pools. One gauze won’t be enough, so just apply it for a fraction of a second until it begins to get soaked and then grab another one to finish the job. Next, it’s time to place three synthetic membranes on the wound, as well as 2 on the other wound to the right, so switch to the forceps and do it, then tape them both diagonally. These are pretty lenient so don’t worry. Just do it the same way you’ve done the rest.
Bitch isn’t stabilized quite yet though, we still have to secure a blood transfusion. Gel the white dot, then press A on the needle icon that appears on the right and inject it right on the green dot. Remember that the dot is small and you have to be very precise or you’ll get a miss. Not that getting one miss matters here or anything, but come on. Besides, he’s almost dead anyway, you don’t know if poking him with that needle will finish him off. So take this part slow and make sure you know where you’re injecting that thing. Either way, once you’ve put the needle in, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circle that appears to the right of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it. Alternatively, you can just shake the wiimote up and down, or, I dunno, diagonally, or however it feels best to you. Doesn’t really matter. Point is, the patient will now be stable.
We’ll now move back to the third patient, but quickly switch to the first one because this guy’s heart stopped beating like a year ago and he’s almost dead. You’ll now do chest compressions on him for the third and final time. After that, you’ll have to intubate him. Do it exactly the same way as the other patient and we’re done with this guy. ’bout fuckin’ time.
Only two left. We’re almost done. The left one is actually immortal or some shit as long as you don’t ask him what’s wrong, so leave him alone for now and move to the right one. Cut the pant leg off with the scissors, same way as last time.
Nothing special or out of the ordinary here. Just two wounds. Drain the single blood pool with a gauze, then place 4 membranes, gel them and tape them diagonally. You’ll want to go from the middle of the top edge down to the middle of the bottom edge with both of them. It’s pretty lenient though so don’t sweat it. Once that’s done, we’ll have to cut the OTHER pant leg. This time there’s only one wound but it’s a pretty big one with 3 blood pools so you’ll have to use two gauzes and place 4 membranes. Apply the tape diagonally from the top-left corner all the way down to the bottom-right corner. We’re done here.
Ok! Last patient! Talk to him and we’ll find out he has a broken wrist. Oh that’s it? Walk it off, pussy. I regularly break my wrist playing this game.
Anyway, press A on the broken bone icon, and you’ll see the blue circle appear on his hand. Press and hold A on it, then move it to the right as far as you can. You’ll have to release the button and grab it a second time to pull it all the way though. Just remember, the second time you grab it you need to press A on the hand itself and not in the blue circle. The trick with these dislocations is to move the arm FAST. Don’t hold it for very long or vitals will get pulverized. If you do it right you should get it done and have vitals still close to 60, whereas if you hold it for very long it can get to critical in a couple seconds flat. Don’t worry about being gentle. That’s a lie.
Once it’s back in place, press A on the splint icon to have the splint appear. The blue icon will appear outside of the splint this time. Press A on the splint itself and then yank it to the left. This’ll cause the second splint to show up on the other side of the arm. Grab this one and yank it to the right in the same way, then grab the bandage and apply two of them on the white dots. You already know how to do this.
We’ll not move to the other arm. Oh what, this one’s broken too? And that ain’t all, there’s actually one more patient left after this. But we’ve got it under control. Hit the talk icon, then the broken bone icon and yank the arm all the way to the right. You can actually get it all the way in a single shot! But if you don’t, no big deal, do it in two. Apply the splint just like you did a few seconds ago and then bandage twice to finish with this patient.
The final patient will now arrive. This is the last one for really realz this time. There’s not much to do here but you have to be careful. He has 2 glass shards stuck on him as well as 3 wires. We can’t do anything about the wires ’cause that’s CR-S01’s job. Maria’s too small-time for that. So anyway, all we have to do is extract the shards, BUT, you can’t hit the wires while you have a shard grabbed. Why? …good question. I guess Maria forgot that she can actually move in 3 dimensions? Who the fuck knows. Anyway, first extract the bottom shard. Same way as always, making as straight a line as possible perpendicular to the wound. Once all of it is out, don’t just move it to the right like you normally would to place it on the tray! You’ll hit the wire on the right. Instead, move back down the exact opposite direction you extracted it in and go below the right wire to place it on the tray. Next, pull out the other shard, making sure that you move in between the wires and don’t touch either of them, then keep moving down, below the right wire and place it on the tray. Finally, gel both wounds and we’re done! This patient normally develops blood pools on the wires that we have to absorb but if you leave him for last like this you won’t have to deal with that.
And that’s that. If you do things like I told you, you won’t even have to use stabilizer at any point. And if you get all the cools you can do it soooo slow and still get the XS, which is what I prefer rather than trying to rush and getting goods.
I Want to Believe
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Treatment halted < 1 times
-Cool > 24 times
-Tore soft tumor < 2 times
Ok, so, this supposedly impossible to extract tumor is actually piss easy. The hell is up with those Concordia pussies? The other parts of the operation are harder than that. But anyway, overall it’s nothing too rough, the only thing is that you MUST get every single cool and you must be somewhat fast. But not fast enough for it to actually be hard.
We’ll start by making the incision as usual. Normally I’d tell you to pass the dialogue manually so that you can make it faster, but the intro dialogue is kinda long. On the other hand if you skip immediately then it’ll take you a bit of time to readjust your grip on wiimote. Welp, have I got a dirty trick for you! Memorize where the blue circle is going to appear and have your cursor there, then press the skip button with your left thumb! That way you’ll be able to make the incision immediately because you don’t have to change your grip.
Anyway, that’ll get us in. Ew, this guy’s got spinal goop comin’ out of his crushed spine. We’ll be cutting it out with the saw. It works the same as in the previous Hank operation. Just press and hold the A button and do NOT let go of it until the end. To control the saw you just have to twist the wiimote to make the turns. You don’t even have to point it at the screen. Overall it’s not tough, it’s a pretty chill procedure but one thing you have to understand is that twisting the remote ONLY makes the saw turn. What I mean by this is that you might be inclined to think that when you make a turn, you have to keep the remote twisted to continue going in that direction. But that’s not true, as long as you keep the remote twisted the saw will continue turning indefinitely. You have to go back to neutral position after making a turn if you want to go straight. Also, the saw might look really big, but the only part that matters is that little red arrow on it. That’s the part that needs to stay inside the path. The rest can go off the margins and it doesn’t matter. Still, it helps to look at the entire thing to know where you’re going. A good tactic is to try having the blue guideline in between the two sticks. But whatevs. This is probably the easiest part of the whole thing. The only thing that you have to keep in mind compared to the previous operation is that the saw is upside down. Don’t let that confuse you when it comes to turning left and right.
Next, we’re going to drill the spine to open a hole in it. I would say that this is the most important part of the operation because this is where you can save (or waste) the most time. You need to drill fast but still get cools. Press and hold A on the blue circle that appears. Try to more or less memorize where they will appear so you can do it immediately as soon as they appear. Then move the cursor away from the drill to start moving it in. Try to keep it in more or less a straight line, though don’t worry too much because it’s pretty lenient in this regard. Keep in mind that the farther away you pull the faster the drill goes. To get the cool here you have to bring the tip of the drill as close to the red line at the end without actually touching it. If you do touch it you’ll get a miss and will have to restart the operation.
Like I said, you need to do this part fast but still get all the cools, so the way I recommend doing it is to start moving the drill, then quickly move your cursor to only about an inch past the red line (I GUESS the distance may vary based on how big your screen is. Check my video if you need to see more or less where you should place it). What this accomplishes is that it moves the drill pretty fast, but slows it down just a tiny bit near the end to make it easier to get the cool. You COULD simply pull it all the way as far as you can and do it faster, but it’s dangerous because it’s easier to accidentally get goods and misses like that and it’s just unnecessary to get the XS. Doing it the way I tell you will strike a good balance.
After 9 drills you’ll open the hole and reveal the…snrk…impossible tumor. First you’ll have to cut around it with the scalpel. Nothing new, just follow the blue line around it. But don’t go fast because you’re not allowed to move past the yellow guideline and it moves pretty dang slow. Once that’s done you’ll be able to pick up the tumor with the forceps. Press and hold A+B over it and begin moving it. It’s a soft tumor so you need to pull it slow or it’ll tear. SLOW DAMMIT! Pull it towards the right and keep the movement steady. It’s sudden jerks (otherwise known as changes in acceleration) that cause it to tear, even small ones, so stay calm and take it out smoothly. Once it’s removed, quickly throw it on the tray.
We’ll now move on to the second tumor. It’s the same except bigger. Cut around it the same way, not too fast, then pull it to the right with the forceps slowly. You can actually pull this one a little faster than the previous one. It seems the bigger they are the more lenient they get, I suppose? Put it on the tray and then you’ll have to get a third, even bigger one. It’s still exactly the same procedure though. Since this one is even bigger you can pull it even faster.
That’s IT? THAT was the impossible tumor? What. A dis. Appointment. Anyway, we’ll move on to cutting out the synthetic bone to repair the broken spine. Press A on the blue circle to start the laser. You have to go along the path and stay as close to the blue guideline as possible at all times. If you move out beyond the red lines you’ll get a miss. Be careful because this time the path is really damn funky compared to previous operations. There are two other things you need to remember. Do NOT let go of the A button at any point for any reason. Second, do not go over the lit circle or the laser will stop. Always stay within this circle and let the camera move the laser forward for you while you concentrate on staying within the guideline. It’s a good idea though to stay relatively near the fringes of the lit circle because this causes the camera to move faster. The closer you go back to the center of the circle the slower it’ll go until it stops completely. I would say that the bottom part of the path is the most dangerous one, so here I’d recommend letting the camera move the laser forward while you just move it up and down to stay within the path.
Also, the old machine’s giving us static again. If you try to continue along the path while the static is present you’ll get a miss, so what you have to do is stop moving forward once you hear the static. To stop moving, simply slowly move the laser back along the path until the lit circle finishes catching up to you. You’ll stop moving as long as you’re right in the middle of the circle. Just wait a few seconds for the static to go away, then continue moving forward.
There are three areas with static. Like I said before, you will know they’re coming because you’ll hear them. The camera isn’t moving as fast as in other operations either so you’ll also have fair warning to stop. Wait until you hear the static noise twice, then you can continue forward.
Once you’re done, twist the remote slightly to the right and have the cursor pointed on the left side. The synthetic bone will appear on the tray here and you’ll use it to plug the hole we made earlier. Grab it and twist your remote back to neutral position, then place it on the hole. Don’t worry, this is super lenient. Getting the cool is very easy.
Finally, we’ll secure it with two screws. Don’t screw up here! Hehe, get it? Urp, oh god I think I just vomited in my mouth. But seriously, we’re almost done and you’re not allowed to get any goods. To get the cools on these two watch the screw. See the ring the point is attached to? You have to press and hold the A button and release it when that ring is just about to touch the yellow silhouette. Not once it’s already touching it. Just BEFORE that point. If you’re still not sure where you have to release the button, check out the illustration:
When that’s done, all that will be left is to close up the patient. Unlike ALL the previous operations, this time the incision was vertical. While the screen is transitioning, grab the remote with both hands and hold down the A button so that you can use the stapler by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Make sure the remote is completely straight, not twisted to either side. This is the angle you’ll need for all 5 staples, do not change it. Only move the location of the stapler so that it overlaps with the silhouette.
And that’s it for this operation. You don’t have to be inhumanly fast to get the XS, just reasonably so. The two places that make the most difference in time are the drills and the stapling at the very end. The rest of the parts can’t really be done THAT much faster since you’re limited by outside forces. Also, you NEED to get every single cool if you hope to get the XS. Just one good means you’re outta luck.
Resolution
Special Bonus
-Video feed disrupted < 1 times
-Didn’t reach same survivor twice
-Ran into wall < 2 times
-Operation completed in 180 sec
The only tough part about this operation is knowing where to go. The place is a labyrinth so if you don’t know, you’ll end up wandering around for a while. Once you DO know exactly where you have to go, it’s piss easy. It can be completed in like a minute. Not that you even have to. The XS is actually really lenient. Something like, I dunno, more than 2 minutes maybe? Who cares.
Anyway we’ll have to find 5 victims throughout the operation. Four random people we don’t give a rat’s ass about and Gabriel Cunningham. It’ll start by flashing us the 10:00:00 time limit. REALLY guys? Ten fucking minutes? Try 1 minute. Bitch. Anyway, hit the skip button while that time limit sign is out, then wait until it leaves before you start moving forward.
From where you start, you’ll see that there’s a fork in the road. You can either go straight or go left. It’s worth noting that every time you find a patient, you’ll automatically return here, and that you have to alternate between these two paths each time. Just keep that in mind and it’ll make it easier to remember.
Go straight first, past the first gate, then the second one, then the third one and you’ll get to another fork. Take the right path, past the next gate, and you’ll get to yet another fork. This time take the left path, and follow it all the way through to the end to find the first person. You’ll then be taken back to the entrance.
Like I said, we have to alternate in the first fork, so this time, take the path to the left. The place will shake just before you go past the gate. This is a good time to reposition your arm back so that you can get more distance in the next stretch, which is a long one. Since it’s so damn long though, there is no way you’ll get to your destination without having to retract your arm several times. But anyway, go past the first and second gates, in the next stretch, be careful with the rubble above. You have to pass beneath it so make sure you don’t move up or you’ll have to stop, move back, and try going through again. Which is a waste of time. Keep going past the third and fourth gates. After the fifth one, you’ll get to a fork. You can either go straight, or left. Take the left path and follow it all the way to the end to find the second victim. You’ll then be taken back to the entrance.
This time take the straight path again. The place will shake again. Go through the first, second and third gates to reach the fork in the road. We already took the right path when we were looking for the first victim, so this time take the left path.
You’ll start to hear the person groaning. This is useful to lead you to where they are because every time you get to a fork, you will hear the groan each time you chose the correct path. If you hear no groan, it indicates that you chose the wrong path, and you should go back and take the other one instead. In reality this is all useless though because I’m already telling you exactly where to go.
Anyway, back to where we were. Like I said, take the left path this time. This’ll be the fourth gate you go through. Keep going past the fifth gate (watch out for the rubble!), and you’ll get to another fork. You can either go down or to the right. Take the path to the right, but take note of the down path because that’s where Gabriel is. Go past the sixth and seventh gates to get to the next fork. Take the left path and keep following it past the 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th and 12th gates. After the 12th gate, do not keep going straight. Look up and take that path instead. Follow through to reach the third victim.
We’re back at the start. Since we took the straight path last victim, this time we’ll take the left path. Go past the first 5 gates until you reach the first fork. We’ve already gone down the left path, that’s where the second victim was. Don’t go there or you’ll fail the second special bonus. Go straight past the sixth and seventh gates to reach the next fork. Here you can either go straight or down. Go straight. When you get to the next fork, take the path to the right and you’ll find the victim here.
Ok, we’re back at the start and we just gotta find Gabriel now! He’s the hardest one. Go straight (the place will shake again), past the first, second, and third gates to reach a fork. Take the left path past the fourth and fifth gates to get to the next fork. Remember that we already took the right path for a previous victim. This time go down.
In a related note, is it just me, or do ALL of the victims’ groans sound retarded except Gabriel’s? Also, is it just me, or does Gabriel sound an awful lot like Ragna the Bloodedge? Seriously! It’s uncanny!
…where was I? Oh right. I was telling you to go down. Right. Go past the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th gates to get to the next fork. You can either go up or down. Go down. Just before you go past the 10th gate, the place will shake again and the light will go out. Is all good though, the magical gates will tell us the way. All you have to do is keep going through the gates. Anyway, go past the 10th and 11th gates to get to the next fork where you can go either left or up. Go left, past the 12th, 13th and 14th gates and you’ll reach another fork. This time you can either go down or to the right. Take the right path. You’ll see many gates stretching out into the distance. Go past the 15th, 16th, 17th, 18th and 19th gates and you will reach the final fork. The light will also return here. Just take the right path and follow it through to the end to find Gabriel and finish the mission!
Since Gabriel is tougher to find than the other victims and you have to go through a lot of forks, what I recommend doing is just reciting “down, left, right, right” and know that these are the paths you should take after you get past the first two forks where you KNOW the paths you shouldn’t take because you already took them previously to find the other victims.
For the rest of the victims, it’s just a matter of doing it a few times until you memorize where you should go. Or you can just, like, pause the game and check the directions if that’s what you feel like. It’s all the same. Overall though, as long as you don’t get lost this mission is really easy. Running into the walls isn’t really a problem because the tunnels are very wide, and the time limit is way more time than you can complete it in. I did it in less than 1:20 and I wasn’t even trying!
Waking Heart
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-Vitals didn’t fall below 25
-Membrane fell off < 4 times
-Wound reopened < 0 times
Aright, now we got ourselves a real operation! I wouldn’t call this one difficult, but it’s not exactly free either. Generally speaking, as long as you get every cool and complete it in somewhere under 5 minutes you’ll get the XS. Alternatively, you can complete it in closer to 4 minutes, get a single good, and still get the XS. So it’s not super tough or anything. Other than that, it just requires a bit of memorization and knowing how and when to do things.
Hit the skip button as soon as you start and you’ll pick up where you left off last time (using the defibrillator). So make sure you start by having both your arms pulled back and close to your chest, that way the sensor bar will easily register the motion when you thrust them forward. Nothing is gayer than getting the defibrillator stuck because the motion didn’t register. Also wait for the nunchuck icon to actually show up. Don’t jump the gun. Try to revive the patient in a single shot by hitting Z and B on the green part of the bar. It’s pretty easy, after doing it a few times you should be getting it every time without much effort. I don’t think anything particularly bad happens if you miss the green part, other than wasting time, but it’s easy to get it right so why not.
Now the view will turn sideways. It’s time to go inside the patient. But before we do that, quickly inject two full syringes of stabilizer to get the vitals close to max. They’re close to 50 at this point and they should be close to 75 when you’re done injecting. Then gel the line and make the incision with the scalpel to go inside.
Aw man, the music changed? I like the other one better. Oh well. Anyway, there’s some pretty serious damage. The entire ribcage basically exploded (weak bones if you ask me) and there’re wounds everywhere. Now, what you have to keep in mind throughout the entire operation is that vitals cannot fall below 25 or you won’t get the XS. You’ll see a hugeass wound immediately. We’re not going to treat it right now though. It takes too long and there are other easier wounds that are also draining vitals, so start by having the control stick pressed towards the ultrasound as the screen is going inside and have the cursor pointing upwards with B pressed so that you immediately move up once you regain control.
You’ll spot two lacerations here. Suture them both quickly. Do around 4-8 passes. Don’t worry, the lacerations in this operation are very lenient. Just make sure that you cover most of the length of the cut and that the lines stay on it and you should get those cools easy. Once both are sutured, move the view over to the bottom-left quadrant. You’ll find yet another hugeass wound a well as two lacerations beneath it. Suture the lacerations first. Depending on you luck, there might be a pool of blood from the big wound covering up one of the lacerations and this’ll prevent you from suturing it. You’ll know this because the suture lines won’t appear on it. If this is the case, first drain the pools from the big wound and THEN suture the lacerations.
When those two are treated, it’ll be time to work on the big wound. Move the view a bit up if you have to to get the entire thing into view. Drain all of the pools if you haven’t already, then switch to the forceps. First you’ll have to close the wounds with the forceps before you can suture them. However, you have to take them one at a time. If you try to close more than one at a time they’ll reopen and you’ll fail. So first close one shut. You’ll see the blue circles pop up. You can grab with the forceps here yank it to the other side to close it. Or you can also grab from the opposite end and yank towards the blue circle. Both ways are good.
When you close it, 4 blood pools will appear. Drain them first, and then suture the wound you just closed with the forceps. Sometimes you can suture before draining the pools but often they’ll obscure the field so let’s keep it consistent by always draining first and suturing second. Suture the laceration same as any other. It’s impossible to get this wrong. You can’t get a cool, a good or a bad. You’ll just get an OK. So do it without fear. After suturing, switch to the forceps and close one of the other wounds. Drain the pools that form and suture it. Then close the other one, drain the pools again and suture it as well. Now it’ll be time to place the membranes. Grab them from the tray on the right and place 5 of them along the guidelines. When that’s done, don’t gel them just yet! Once you do that, some more damage will show up, and vitals are starting to get pretty low (in the 30s). So take the time to inject three full syringes of stabilizer and get those vitals back up to the mid 60s. Once that’s accomplished begin gelling the membranes. Start with the bottom 3 and then gel the top two diagonally left to right. Keep gelling in this fashion even after you get the OKs because when that happens 2 rashes will show up here. The gel you’re spreading here will immediately treat them.
Before moving on, switch to the scalpel and cut just below the bone fragment on the right. A shadow appeared here after you treated the big wound, and we’re already here so might as well take care of it. You can use the ultrasound to check its location but just memorize it and cut it without looking. Drain the pool and then suture the cut. This cut is smaller than the previous lacerations but still lenient. Make around 5 passes. When that’s done, move the view over to the top-right quadrant, where you’ll see that a large wound has formed for no reason. Drain the 3 pools, then grab the end of it with the forceps to close it. Make sure not to accidentally grab the bone fragment sitting dangerously close above. Suture it just like the other lacerations, and then gel the rash above it.
Now we can get to treating the huge wound we saw when we got here. Move down to the bottom-right quadrant. By now there’ll probably be like 10 or so blood pools on it. Drain them all. Place the drain over several of them at once to drain them at the same time and speed things up. Pools will continue forming as long as there are other pools, but once you drain the last one, no more will appear. When that’s done, cut to the right of the huge wound with the scalpel because there’s a shadow here. Drain the pool that comes out and suture the cut. Then gel the rash above and begin treating the huge wound. Do it in exactly the same way as the last one. Don’t bother raising vitals anymore. Place the 5 membranes and gel them immediately.
Finally, we gotta pick up all the bone fragments. It doesn’t matter in what order you do it as long as you get them all. For the ones that are stuck inside the organ, make sure that you pull them out in a straight line perpendicular to the wound they’re lodged in to get the cool. It’s pretty lenient to be honest, but getting an accidental good isn’t totally unheard of either. Move in quadrants. First the bottom-right where you already are. There are 2 lodged fragments and a a free one. Then on the top-right quadrant there are three lodged ones and a free one. On the top-left quadrant there are 4 lodged ones and a free one way up on the top left outside of the organ. Finally on the last quadrant there are 2 lodged and a free. That makes for 15 fragments. Remember to gel all the wounds after extracting the bones. You should have finished here with around 8:25 left in the clock. 8:30 if you’re fast.
Now it’ll be time to reconstruct the ribcage with the bones we recovered. Have the control stick set on the forceps to make the tray appear and begin placing them. There’ll be 3 areas where we can place the fragments, left, middle and right. You can move between these areas with the control stick WHILE having a piece grabbed with the forceps. If you do not have a piece grabbed then you will only switch tools if you try to move the control stick, so don’t forget.
Now this is the part where you can save (or waste) the most time. Mostly because you can waste a lot of time trying to find where each piece is supposed to go. They give you the fragments in random order, so the order can’t help you. Honestly, the best way to do this is to just do it so many times that you can memorize where each piece is supposed to go and can recognize it even before grabbing it. That being said, there are a few tricks you can use to remember where the pieces go.
Firstly, there are two pieces that are easy to identify because they have an odd shape. While most of the pieces tend to be much longer than they are wide, these two have a closer length to width ratio. The smaller one goes in the very bottom-right of the middle area, and the larger one goes in the bottom-left of the right area.
Next, the left area is worth noting because this one is only missing a measly 3 fragments and they are the smallest/thinnest/straightest ones. So when you see fragments that looks like this, you’ll know to go to the left area.
For the right area, when you get a piece that has two points like a V-shape, you’ll know that it goes on the top-right. When you get a piece with a little hook, or pick shape on the left you’ll know it goes on the bottom. The one above that is also very easy to recognize because it’s the biggest, longest fragment of all. The one above that can be recognized by the fact that it’s similar to the top piece that goes on the left area, except the one on the left area is straight and smaller, while this one is a bit bigger and rounder.
For the rest of the pieces, you’ll know to be in the middle area. Of those, probably the most easily recognizable is the one that kind of looks like the half of a yin-yang symbol (or a mitama, if you’re demonically inclined). That one goes in the middle left. The rest of the pieces also kind of have their quirks that sets them apart, but they don’t jump out nearly as much. You can also memorize where they go just from doing it many times until they’re familiar to you though.
Before grabbing a piece, make sure that you have identified where it goes WHILE IT’S STILL ON THE TRAY. Don’t wait until you already picked it up to start identifying it. The reason for this is because you should first recognize in what direction you will have change the angle of the fragment, and twist your wrist in the OPPOSITE direction before you pick it up, so that when you change the angle your wrist is closer to a neutral, more comfortable position. This way you can place the piece more precisely. If you’re trying to place it while your wrist is turned all the way in some funky way you tend to get pretty shaky.
The angle is actually really lenient, it doesn’t have to be close to the silhouette to get the cool when you place it, unlike in other operations, but don’t push your luck either. The (slightly) bigger problem seems to be getting a miss from your hand shaking at the last moment when you’re releasing it. But as long as you’re careful and remember to keep your wrist close to a neutral position you should be good.
If you finish placing all the fragments before 7:30 on the timer, then you’re doing good. It’ll now be time to gel them. You shouldn’t have bothered using stabilizer at all at this point. Vitals should be close to 40. Your goal is to get them up to 45 with the gel while you’re spreading it on the bones. Don’t go any higher than 45 though because once you’re done gelling all the bones they’ll automatically drop to 45 anyway, meaning anything higher than that is just wasted time.
Anyway, now we’re in the last stretch of the operation. There’s a lot of damage here. There are two huge wounds, two lacerations, and 3 rashes (there’s also a shadow but forget that). Start by applying gel on the rashes. First the two on the left and then the one on the right. However, if you’re unlucky, the middle rash might be obscured by a blood pool from the huge wound. If this is the case you won’t be able to gel it. You will have to drain the pool closes to it before you can gel it. Do so, but make sure to ONLY drain that single pool that’s obscuring it. Do not drain the rest.
When the rashes are taken care of, move down to suture the 2 lacerations. At this point the EKG will warn you that ventricular fibrillation is incoming. Remember that you can’t be touching the patient when this happens or you’ll get a miss, so you have to act fast. Gauge how much time you have left from the warning to when it happens. Quickly suture the two lacerations the same as previous ones, with around 5 or so passes. You can do it very quickly because they’re in a good vertical orientation. Then, immediately switch to the stabilizer and inject a quick one. Depending on how fast you did things, you may only have time to inject half a syringe, a full one, or maybe even two. Point is, gauge how much time you have before Alyssa goes into cardiac arrest and stop just before that. Use the defibrillator in the same way you did at the very start of the operation. Try to get it on the green bar on the first try.
From here on out she’ll go into cardiac arrest on regular intervals after a warning from the EKG. It may be a real one or it may be a false alarm. It doesn’t seem to be completely random though. It actually seems to be tied to how much you’re sucking. If you’re doing really well, you’ll probably have to deal with all of them being real. If you’re sucking a little bit, one of them may end up being fake. And if you’re deepthroating a massive one, ALL of them may end up being fake. Regardless, stop what you’re doing just before it’s about to happen, and if you see that the organ stops having those crazy spasms, you may continue.
Anyway, after that first use of the defibrillator, before continuing, take the time to inject four needles of stabilizer. Remember that you can’t let vitals fall below 25 or you won’t get the XS. While you’re doing this, the shadow above the huge wound on the left will burst. That’s good. Continue until you’ve inject stabilizer four times. You should be able to get vitals up to like 60 or 70 depending on how much you injected before using the defibrillator. Drain the blood pool that formed on the shadow that bursted just now, and suture it shut. Then begin draining all of the pools on the huge wound beneath that. Start treating it in exactly the same way you did with those same wounds during the first part of the operation. The EKG will almost certainly start spazzing out before you’re done. Gauge how long you have and keep working until just before it happens, then use the defibrillator.
Keep working on the wound. Place the membranes, and then check out the the vitals. If they’re over 40, you’re good, gel the membranes and keep going. If they’re below 40, inject stabilizer until they get to 40 (should only take a single injection), then gel the membranes. This’ll be the last time you raise vitals.
After you finish treating the wound, 2 rashes will appear on either side of where it used to be, so just continue spreading gel to treat them immediately. Then move the view up to the top-left of the organ where a large laceration has appeared for no reason. Drain the 3 pools on it, close it with the forceps and suture it just like any laceration. Finally, move to the right where the second huge wound is. A single rash appeared above it, so gel that first, then begin draining the pools. Your goal should be to at LEAST have drained all of the pools before the next cardiac arrest happens. If you managed to do even more than that, great! Now finish treating the wound before another one comes. Place the 5 membranes and quickly gel them, then pull back your arms and get ready to use the defibrillator!
You’re going to use it three times in a row, but heads up, this time it’s a little deceptive and it’s trying to throw off your timing. The first time you use it, the bar will move SLOWER than usual, so take this into account. Don’t jump the gun when press Z+B and try to get it in one shot. After that, pull your arms back again. Wait until you hear the beeeeeeeee~ to extend them forward. The second time, the bar will move the same speed as usual. Then the third time, it will move FASTER than usual, so you have to be quicker.
So that’s how it’ll move. First slow, then normal, then fast. Try to get them all on the first shot, but if you don’t, it’s no big deal. There’s no special bonus for it or anything. We’re almost done. Time to close up the patient. This final suture is very lenient and easy because it’s vertical. You should have no trouble getting the cool as long as you cover most of the length of the opening and make around, I dunno, 8 passes. Then, gel the area, grab the bandage from the left icon with A, and then calm down. The bandage is harder than the suture and your hand may be shaky at this point. Hold your right hand with your left to help keep it steady if you have to, go from the top of the line to the bottom in a straight, steady line before you release it to get the cool. If you’ve been doing very well up to now, you can actually get away with getting a good here and still get the XS. But it’s better to just take it slow and make sure you get the cool.
And we done. To get the XS, your goal should be to get all the cools and finish in less than 5 minutes (although you can finish in less than 4). Other than that, the only thing you have to watch out for is keeping vitals above 25 at all times, which you should accomplish if you’re doing what I tell you. The other special bonuses just fall into place themselves as long as you’re not doing crazy mistakes.
So Begins Death
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-Cool > 12 times
-Convulsions occured < 10 times
-Vitals didn’t fall below 12
Bahaha. This operation is easy street USA. It’s really short and has a very small number of cools to get. You don’t even have to get all of them (though you can get away with being quite slow if you do).
Well whatever. There will be five patients, but you should know that you only have to work on two of them. We’ll start with the first one. Hit the skip button as soon as the operation starts and immediately inject her once with a full syringe of stabilizer. You’ll only be able to get one off before she starts convulsing. The stabilizer bottle will disappear while this is happening, but keep the cursor exactly where it should be and keep the button pressed so that when the convulsions stop and the bottle comes back, you’ll immediately begin filling the syringe. Inject her 3 more times. The goal is to get her vitals up to 60. You should only need 3 injections to accomplish this. When they reach 60, a new patient will arrive. Leave this one here as is and switch to the second patient immediately.
While the screen is transitioning, have the control stick pointed towards the stabilizer and the cursor pointed where the bottle will appear so you can begin injecting immediately. Only inject this guy twice. Again, your goal is to make his vitals reach 60. When this happens, the talk icon will appear on the right. Press it to have the next 3 patients be brought in. Leave this guy as is. We’re also going to completely ignore the third patient. We will only work on the fourth and fifth ones. Switch to the fifth one. We’ll take care of that one first because he’s quicker.
We’ll first have to cut off his sleeve, so have the cursor pointed where the scissor icon will appear on the bottom-right and press A on it when it does appear. Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough but don’t rush so much that you get careless and miss.
When the sleeve is off, you’ll find 2 innocent cuts. They don’t even have blood pools or nothing. Switch to the forceps and place 2 membranes on each. No need to rush and get a miss. Remember that these aren’t quite as lenient as CR-S01’s membranes. But as long as you’re careful they’re nothing to worry about. Gel them when they’re in place and then tape them. All of the tapes in this operation are lenient, so you generally shouldn’t have problems getting the cools on them. Tape these diagonally from right to left. You can (and probably should) go a bit over the edges. Tape the top one from the middle of the right edge to the middle of the left edge, and for the bottom one, go from the top-right corner to past the bottom-left corner.
Now we’ll move on to the left arm, which happens to be broken. Press A on the bone icon on the bottom right. Now press and hold A on the arm, somewhere near the blue circle. Not necessarily on the circle but close. Then move it to the left as far as you can. You’ll have to release the button and grab it a second time to pull it all the way though. Two times should be enough to get the ok. The trick with these dislocations is to move the arm FAST. Don’t hold it for very long or vitals will get pulverized. If you do it right you should get it done without the vitals suffering much, whereas if you hold it for very long it can get to critical in a couple seconds flat. Don’t worry about being gentle. That’s a lie.
Once it’s realigned, quickly press the A button the splint icon to the right. This’ll cause the blue circle on said splint to show up. Press and hold the A button on the top end of the splint (not the blue circle) and yank it to the left. Don’t worry about being gentle, just do it fast. When that’s done, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circles that appear to the left of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it. Alternatively, you can just shake the wiimote up and down, or, I dunno, diagonally, or however it feels best to you. Doesn’t really matter.
Next we’ll move to the leg, which is also broken. Nothing special here, it works exactly the same as the arm. Grab it from the ankle, close to the blue circle and yank it to the left until it’s realigned. Then place the splint and bandage twice, same exact deal. When you’ve finished with both bandages, that’ll be it for this patient. It’s time to move on to the fourth one, but before we do that, make sure to inject two full syringes of stabilizer. Otherwise this guy is going to die while we’re treating the other one.
Anyway, when you get on the fourth patient you’ll see that she has 3 glass shards stuck on her. Switch to the forceps and begin extraction. This is actually the most dangerous part of the operation, especially the top shard, which is a deceptive cunt and can easily give you a good or a bad. Usually the strategy for removing shards is to grab them and then pull them out making as straight a line as possible the entire way perpendicular to the cut they’re lodged in. But for the top shard, you’ll want to move it just a bit lower than you normally would to get the cool. The other two can be treated normally. Careful with the one on the left though, it’s a long one.
Gel the wounds and it’ll be time to cut the shirt open. Before you do that though, inject stabilizer once. Just once to get vitals up to the 50s. That’s all you’ll need to finish. Anyway, open the shirt to reveal three wounds and 2 blood pools. Grab a gauze from the icon on the right and use it to absorb the two pools, then switch to the forceps and place two membranes on each wound. Gel them up and tape them as before. There’s nothing to worry about, these are extremely lenient. You can even go way past the edges.
You’ll then move to the right arm. Again, you have to cut it with the scissors. There’s a wound bleeding profusely here, we’re gonna have to apply the torniquet before we can begin moppin’ up the blood. If you try it’s just gonna keep on bleeding. Press A on the torniquet icon and you’ll see a white circle appear on her upper arm. Press and hold A on this circle to make a second circle appear on the other side of the arm. Just make the pointer touch this circle, then go back to the first circle and release A while the pointer is inside it. That’ll apply the torniquet. Nothing too complicated. The only way to muck it up is to release the A prematurely, so just don’t rush it and make sure the pointer is on the white area when you release it.
Now we can mop up the blood. You’ll need to use two gauzes for this. Then, place three synthetic membranes along the wound, gel over them and tape over all three membranes in a single shot. We’ll then move to the left arm and it’s the exact same thing as the other. Exact same thing. So just repeat what you already did. Once that’s done, the last thing you have to do is secure a blood transfusion, so gel over the dot, then grab the needle from the bottom right icon and shove it in the green circle. Don’t rush too much, you don’t want to get a miss. Make sure the pointer is on the dot before pressing the button. Then, just bandage it up. The vitals should be at around 15 by this time.
And that’s all. Quite an easy operation. Like I said, vitals should be at around 15 by the time you’re done, which is just above 12 for the special bonus. The vitals of all the other patients are irrelevant. Just the one you’re on matters. You should complete this operation in about a minute and a half. Other than that, not much to say.
Stolen Memories
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Focus regenerated < 2 times
-Foreign objects passed < 10 times
-Collisions < 2
This operation is pretty cool. Not difficult, but cool. Mainly because the Rosalia bruises look like a fucking demonic claw is clutching the organ and squeezing it. REALISM. There’s not very many cools to get but you basically have to get them all. In addition, you have to finish in less than 2 minutes. But in reality you can finish in quite a bit less than that.
You start the operation with the patient at half vitals. 47 to be exact. Your gut instinct might be to raise them before starting, but don’t do it. Believe it or not, you can finish the entire operation without ever raising vitals and you have a much better chance of clearing the time limit if you don’t waste time doing so. Start by immediately gelling the line and making the incision with the scalpel.
Now we in. We gotsta remove that focus, so have the control stick towards the drain and place it over the black ball while holding down the button. It’ll take a few seconds before it’ll start draining, but eventually it will. Once you get the ok, switch to the syringe. There’ll be two vials. The blue one is the vasoconstrictor which is what you have to inject first, and the orange one is the sodium hypochlorite which you have to inject second. So make sure you remember that! Blue first, orange second.
Be careful when injecting, make sure you do it on the focus and not on the organ. The focus isn’t small or anything, and it’s pretty lenient so it’s not hard, but if you do miss then you’ll have to restart. The vasoconstrictor only requires a small amount to be injected (about half a syringe), but the sodium hypochlorite requires close to a full syringe to have an effect, so make sure that you fill it up all the way and that you inject the entire thing, don’t stop before it’s done or you’ll have to waste time injecting again.
After you’ve injected both substances, the excision dots will appear around the focus so cut around it with the scalpel. The shape is a bit funky but you can pretty much cut in a circular shape and it’ll work out as long as you touch all the dots. Once it’s cut, grab it with the forceps and place it on the tray to the right.
This’ll cause 2 more foci to appear. It’s still the same procedure though, so treat them in exactly the same way. You can either treat them one at a time or both at the same time, doesn’t really matter, just do it already!
When the second focus is placed on the tray, foreign objects will begin moving through the blood vessels. They will all start coming out from the large opening on the bottom right. As soon as you place the focus on the tray, switch to the ultrasound and place it over this opening. You’ll see a single foreign object coming in. To get it out, you have to first light it up with the ultrasound by pressing A. Then when it’s lit up, switch to the scalpel and cut a hole on it to bring it out. Switch to the drain and drain the blood pool that appears, but keep draining after the pool disappears because you also have to drain the object itself. After that, gel the cut shut and switch back to the ultrasound.
There will be more foreign objects coming in. After that first one though, you’ll want to start treating them two at a time. Wait until 2 objects come out. They will be close to each other because they’re coming out of the same opening. Light them both up with the ultrasound, and then cut between them with the scalpel in such a way that you get them both out with a single puncture. Then drain both pools and both objects at the same time with the drain (because they will be close to each other). Switch back to the ultrasound again and wait for the next two. The first one will come out like an entire second or two before the second object, so don’t jump the gun. Wait until they’re both out so that you can treat them both at the same time.
When you’re done with those two, two more foci will appear. In other words, it takes until you’ve treated five foreign objects for the next two foci to appear. Now you’ll have to remove them. However, the foreign objects will continue to move through the blood vessels while you do this. Here’s the thing though: for the most part, you can IGNORE these foreign objects. Absolutely nothing happens if you let them pass through the vessels (as long as less than 10 manage to pass through, which is easily achieved if you treat the foci fast enough). The only thing you shouldn’t allow is for an object to collide with a focus. Since you can see the objects’ shadows even without the ultrasound, what you should do is concentrate on removing the foci while ONLY stopping to cut out a foreign object if you see that it’s on a path towards the focus and you will be unable to remove it before it gets there. Note that there’s a lot of branching paths so wait until you’re absolutely sure that it’s going to collide with the focus. Otherwise leave them alone.
You should first remove the focus on the right, because that’s where most (if not all) of the first few foreign objects have the highest probability of going. If you’re fast you can probably remove it without having to cut out any objects. Then once that’s done, get to removing the other one. Hopefully the foreign objects are still moving towards where the other focus used to be and you can again remove it without having to deal with anything else. But if you do, no biggie.
When the two foci are treated, the demonic claw will appear. It’s nothing special though. The only thing it does is it changes the direction the objects are moving when it squeezes the organ. Shouldn’t be a problem. Hell, if you’re fast it won’t even get to do it ONCE. What a pussy. Another focus will now appear on the bottom left. Treat it immediately. Foreign objects will RARELY ever move towards this area so I doubt you’ll have to cut any out, and even if they do, you can probably remove it fast enough that it doesn’t matter.
When that’s treated, two more foci will appear in the same place the old ones did. Again, I recommend removing the one on the right first because this seems to be where most of the objects go. However, keep an eye on the actual situation. If you see that an object is currently moving towards the one on the left, maybe you should treat that one first. It all depends on what’s going on. And if you see that while you’re treating one, and object is about to collide on the other one or on the one you’re on before you can finish, make sure to cut it out. If you’re fast you shouldn’t have to deal with very many at all though.
When those two foci are removed, the black claw will disappear. We’re about done, but before we can finish up we have to take care of the remaining foreign objects. Usually there will be three floating around. Switch to the ultrasound, light them all up, cut them, drain them and then gel the wounds.
The dude’s probably got one foot in the grave at this point, but hey, as long as he’s not dead it doesn’t make a bit of difference guys. It’s not like this is Trauma Center where we had to raise vitals to 99 before finishing up. Anyway, suture up the opening. It’s a pretty easy, vertical lenient one so it shouldn’t be a problem. You should have no trouble getting the cool as long as you cover most of the length of the opening and make around, I dunno, 8 passes. Then, gel the area, grab the bandage from the left icon with A, and then calm down. The bandage is harder than the suture so take it a bit slower so that you don’t accidentally get a good or miss. Hold your right hand with your left to help keep it steady if you have to, go from the top of the line to the bottom in a straight, steady line before you release it to get the cool.
And that’s all. Your goal is to get all the cools and finish in less than 2:00:00. Not that difficult. If it had been 1:30, THEN we’d be looking at a difficult operation. But as it is, nah.
Spreading Infection
Special Bonus
-Miss < 2 times
-Drill miss < 6 times
-Cool > 90 times
-Mallet swung < 5 times
Ok. This operation is ENDLESS. Seriously jesus fucking christ it just goes on forever. But because of that, the requirements for XS rank are incredibly low, so it ends up not being as hard as it should be. In fact, I believe that as long as you get all 4 special bonuses you’ll get the XS, which means that you can miss twice throughout the operation without it really mattering. Also, due to how long it is, the time limit is pretty much irrelevant. You can take as much time as you need.
There’s not much introductory dialogue, only one speech bubble, so instead of pressing skip immediately, pass it with A so that you can make the incision immediately and then press skip while you’re going inside the patient.
The first thing we’re doing is new! We gotta chip out this bone tumor, and to do it, we have to use the mallet and chisel. The mallet is used similarly to how it’s been used in previous operations, but the chisel is new. You have to twist your wrist (the one holding the nunchuck) to rotate the chisel around the tumor and align the yellow line on the chisel with one of the yellow lines on the tumor before hammering. What makes this difficult is that the nunchuck is pretty sensitive, and when you make the hammering motion with the remote you may accidentally move your other hand a little bit and get a miss.
There are a few things you should understand when it comes to the mallet in this procedure. It’s not like the mallet in previous operations, it’s actually much easier to use (probably because they figured if you had to keep your other hand steady you wouldn’t be able to make the strong hammering motion previous operations required). Therefore, it’s not necessary to use excessive force when doing the motion. Just a moderate amount of force will get you the maximum power. The second thing you have to understand is that you need to keep the pointer on the screen when hammering, otherwise the game has a hard time registering the motion. Third, it should also be noted that force is irrelevant when chiseling the tumor. It doesn’t even matter if you achieve full force on every strike or not! You’ll get the cool regardless.
With this information, we can use a simple trick to avoid the problem of accidentally moving our other hand when doing the hammering motion. When you’ve aligned the chisel line with the tumor line, just make a VERY light tap with the remote. This will minimize how much you move and will get the chisel in. Once it’s already in, slight movements of your nunchuck hand will not move the chisel out of the line, which means you can hammer as hard and as fast as you can.
So that’s what you should do. First strike should be an extremely light tap. Once it’s in, just go nuts on that bitch. Also, when aligning the chisel line with the tumor lines, obviously it’s best to get it exactly, but when in doubt, I find that it’s best to tend more towards the counterclockwise direction than the opposite.
There’s one last thing you should be aware of. For the lines on the left hemisphere, you have to twist your wrist counterclockwise, and vice versa for the lines on the right hemisphere. If instead of doing this, you twist it the wrong way and simply get there by going the entire way around, once you strike the first time, the chisel might SUDDENLY slant completely even though you haven’t moved at all, and then you’ll get a miss if you try to strike a second time like this. You’ll have to change the angle to what should have been the correct one. Be careful about this phenomenon.
Here’s a pretty cool tip to help keep your nunchuck steady: place your thumb to the right of the control stick and press down with it hard. Not only will this keep it steadier than if your grip is loose, but also, if you notice, the harder you press down with your thumb, the nunchuk will move ever so slightly clockwise, and as you release pressure with your thumb, it will move slightly counterclockwise. In this way you can make more minute changes to the angle while still keeping it pretty steady.
When it’s all broken off, you’ll next have to cut out a synthetic bone with the laser to replace what you just broke. Press A on the blue circle to start the laser. You have to go along the path and stay as close to the blue guideline as possible at all times. If you move out beyond the red lines you’ll get a miss. There are two other things you need to remember. Do NOT let go of the A button at any point for any reason. Second, do not go over the lit circle or the laser will stop. Always stay within this circle and let the camera move the laser forward for you while you concentrate on staying within the guideline. It’s a good idea though to stay relatively near the fringes of the lit circle because this causes the camera to move faster. The closer you go back to the center of the circle the slower it’ll go until it stops completely. Generally speaking, I recommend letting the camera take you forward during the straight paths but moving forward yourself during the curves. This one ain’t anything special, the only part you should be careful about is when the path goes down to the bottom and then starts moving to the left, because you’ve got quite a bit of downward momentum at this point and you’re going pretty fast, which means you’re in danger of colliding with the bottom wall, so you need to start moving the laser up as you’re nearing this part to make sure you don’t go off.
Once you’ve cut it out, twist your wrist a bit to the right, hold down the A button and hold your hand with the other one to help keep it steady. It’ll be time to place the synthetic bone and believe me, these parts are deceptively hard to get the cool in. You need to place it at just the right angle and location on the hole. Grab it by holding down B and then twist your wrist a bit back to the left. Now, the part of the bone that you should be looking at when placing it is the V-shaped crevice on the top. This is VERY important, because if you’re looking at, say, the bottom part, it won’t help you at all and you’ll most likely get a good. This is because the shape of the synthetic bone is NOT actually identical to the shape of the hole and the bottom part will end up being completely slanted in relation to the hole. Jeah… told you they was trying to throw us off. But anyway, seriously, look at the V-shaped part at the top and try to get it to match with the corresponding V-shaped part of the hole. That’s the only part that matters when it comes to getting the cool. If you place that part right, you’ll get it.
After that, we’ll have to drill some holes in the bone. Press and hold A on the blue circle that appears, then move the cursor away from the drill to start moving it in. Try to keep it in more or less a straight line, though don’t worry too much because it’s pretty lenient in this regard. Keep in mind that the farther away you pull the faster the drill goes. To get the cool here you have to bring the tip of the drill as close to the red line at the end without actually touching it. If you do touch it you’ll get a miss and will have to restart the operation. You’ll have to drill four holes. I recommend taking it reasonably slow for this. Pull the drill a lot at first, but once it gets closer to the end move back a little to slow it down. This way you can get the cool without much danger.
Next you’ll have to apply the screws. Normally these guys are pretty deceptive, but they seem to be just a tiny bit more lenient in this operation. Stay alert though, because there will be a lot of them and it’s still not uncommon to accidentally get a good because you weren’t concentrating and your thumb stuck to the button too long or something. Here’s the deal. Watch the screw. See the ring the point is attached to? You have to press and hold the A button and release it when that ring is just about to touch the yellow silhouette. Not once it’s already touching it. Just BEFORE that point. This’ll be the cue for basically all the screws throughout the operation unless stated otherwise.
Once all 4 are screwed, you’ll have to realign the next broken bone. This part is pretty easy. Just grab each tip where the blue circle is and move it to the right, then release it when it’s aligned with the silhouette. It’s pretty lenient so don’t worry too much.
Again, you’ll be drilling holes in the bone (this time three). These are much shorter than the other ones but I still recommend taking it reasonably slow. Better safe than sorry. You’ll then have to screw the plate. Same deal as last time, same place you have to release A. Then only thing is that you should be more careful with these and know that you’ll have to release the A button sooner than the others!
Now we’ll have to chisel out another bone tumor. Except this one is harder than the last one because it has a funkier shape and with the exception of the top longest line, your chisel will be farther away and your line will not be touching the tumor lines, making it harder to align them. You just have to imagine that your chisel line keeps extending past where it actually ends and align that imaginary extension with the tumor lines. Other than that it works exactly the same as the last time. The only one that you should probably watch out for more than the rest is the line that extends to the bottom-left. I dunno, it’s just deceptive for some reason. When you’re about to strike this one, make sure that your chisel is NOT touching the bone on the left. Move it until it’s just past this bone before striking and you’ll get it in.
After that, it’ll be time to laser out another synthetic bone. This works the same as last time, except with an all new gimmick! Now tiny bone fragments will erupt and fall down the screen, if they touch your pointer as they’re falling down you’ll get a miss, which is extremely bad. You have to manuever your cursor in between these pebbles. These pebbles are dangerous bitches. Not necessarily right now, but later on they are dangerous as fuck.
You can probably wing it for these and just avoid ’em as you see ’em coming, but it’s safer to know where you should be ahead of time. The first eruption isn’t that dangerous and it’s tough to get hit by it. As long as you’re moving forward at a good pace and not, like, touching the fringe of the circle, you’ll avoid it. For the second one, which is when you’re going down a straight path, you’ll want to be hugging the right wall (by wall I mean, of course, the red line that makes the border you’re not supposed to go past). Seriously. Because a pebble will be coming down straight through the left side of your path (unless it doesn’t, in which case that’s even better!)
For the third one, you should remember to hurry! Be as close to the fringe of the circle as you can, and you’ll avoid them. The next one isn’t dangerous, just keep going at a normal pace. You’re going pretty slow anyway and you’ll be able to see them coming down. The eruption AFTER that one, though, is SUPER dangerous because they will launch up higher than the camera can see them! What cunts! Don’t worry though, I gots your back. There’s only one thing you have to remember: Slow down! If you’re going too fast and you reach the curve, you WILL get hit. So what you should do is slow down and make sure that you do NOT reach that part until after the pebbles have fallen. Got it? Good. That’s the last one. Before we move on, I will say one thing, and this is IMPORTANT. You MUST move quickly by having the laser relatively close to the edge of the lit circle. If you’re going slow, the pebbles fall in a totally different pattern, which will throw you off and possibly get you a miss. So to keep it consistent, you must remember to move at a brisk pace.
The bone will be cut out after this. Twist your wrist a bit to the left, hold down the A button and hold your hand with the other one to help keep it steady. Grab the bone with B. For this one, that part you should be looking at is the finger on top. Man really, look at that bone shape, it looks like a fucking arm and a hand that is flipping you off! It’s totally giving you the finger! FUCKING SERIOUSLY. LOOK AT IT. Anyway, yeah. Stay focused on the finger and just make sure that it’s properly aligned and placed on its respective slot. As long as that part is placed properly, you’ll get the cool. This is important because if you’re looking at the bottom part and trying to align THAT, you’ll never get the cool. The bottom part is TOTALLY off of where it has to be when you’re aligning it properly. Only the top part matters.
After that, you’ll drill 4 holes. Use the same strategy as usual. Then you’ll screw the plate it. Same strategy as well. Then after that you’ll chisel off yet ANOTHER bone tumor. It’s not any different from the last one though, so just do it in exactly the same way.
We’ll then laser off another synthetic bone piece. This time around, we’ll be dealing with static. Which is honestly a LOT less dangerous than pebbles. In fact, I would even go as far as saying that it is most definitely not, in fact, shit. If you try to continue along the path while the static is present you’ll get a miss, so what you have to do is stop moving forward once you hear the static. To stop moving, simply slowly move the laser back along the path until the lit circle finishes catching up to you. You’ll stop moving as long as you’re right in the middle of the circle. Just wait a few seconds for the static to go away, then continue moving forward. Nothing too special or difficult.
Once it’s cut off you’ll have to place it. Again, you should concentrate on the top part of the piece. Make sure the top protrusion is correctly angled and fitted into its corresponding place on the hole. As long as that’s correctly in place, you’ll nab the cool. After that you’ll have to drill 4 holes and screw the plate it, blah blah we already know how to do this. It’s the same.
Next, you’ll be picking up 3 scattered bone fragments and placing them on the tray to the right, then realigning the broken fibula. Simply grab each tip where the blue circle is and move it to the right, then release it when it’s aligned with the silhouette. It’s pretty lenient so don’t worry too much. After that, you’ll have to reconstruct the tibia by placing the 3 fragments you previously picked up. Watch the straight end of each fragment and make sure it’s aligned with the straight end of the silhouette before releasing it. They’ll come at you in random order from the tray on the left so I can’t really tell you where each one goes (though you CAN look at my video to see). Rest assured though that you will never get a fragment that can’t be connected to what’s already there. So ALL you have to do is check whether the fragment will fit on the top or the bottom. Simple! Plus, they’re only 3 fragments so it’s even easier. Also, it seems to be more lenient than in other operations. Probably because this op is SO. DAMN. LONG.
You’ll drill some more holes next. These are on the fibula so they’re tiny. Normally I’d tell you to just do them fast because these tiny ones are more lenient, but this operation has dragged on for so fucking long that this point I’ll just recommend you keep playing it safe and go slow so you don’t get a miss. After those two holes are drilled, you’ll have to screw the plate. Now, the cue is the same as usual, but be CAREFUL. The second screw is a trap! You have to release the button much sooner than you would think! I mean, like, before the view has even finished moving. It’s really soon. Sooner than all the other screws.
After that you’ll drill even more holes. Christ. This will never end! The strategy remains the same, and the screws afterward are the same as all the others, although they happen to be even more lenient than before (or maybe it’s just that it takes longer before you have to release the button), so they’re easier to get the cools in.
Oh you are shitting me. ANOTHER bone tumor? It works the same as always. Only difference, I guess, is that the shape is even funkier now. For the ultra tiny line pointing up-right, I recommend using the top part of the tumor (or the hole, if you’ve already broken the part off) as a guide. Keep moving the chisel to the right until it looks like it won’t touch that part of the tumor, and that’s where you need to strike to hit that tiny line.
Guess what’s next? Oh, we have to laser off a synthetic bone piece? Big fucking surprise. This time around, we have to deal with BOTH static and pebbles. The static, as always, is not a problem. But the pebbles this time are extremely dangerous, so listen up. This is what you have to do. For the first ones that erupt, you have to move FAST to avoid them. But not at, like, the fringe of the lit circle the entire time. Yeah, yeah, I know that sounds vague. To specify, right after the pebbles come out, you’ll get to a curve on the path. At this point you should not be at the edge of the circle. Keep going, and just before you get to the next curve, you’ll see a pebble zoom by in front of you. As soon as you see this, move at TOP speed to the edge of the circle to avoid the pebble that’s coming down on top of you. That sounds kind of complicated, but it really isn’t because it’s actually extremely hard to be going so fast that the first pebble actually hits you. So in practice, all you have to remember is that you have to go fast.
For the second eruption, you must STOP! It erupts just as you get to a curve, right? Well, you must NOT go past that curve. Stay right where you are until the pebbles fall and you should be fine. What you need to remember is that you must be going slow even BEFORE the eruption happens. Just say near the middle of the circle and when it erupts, stay where you are. This is important because if you’re not going slow enough, the pebbles will fall in a totally different pattern which will make it harder to avoid them. For the third eruption, whatever. Just go at normal speed, this one isn’t dangerous. It’s easy to avoid. For the fourth eruption, you must again go FAST. As long as you move fast and stay near the edge of the circle you’ll avoid them. Finally, for the fifth eruption, you should again go fast, go past the curve when they erupt, and then go BACK to the curve. Stay there and wait for the pebbles to fall, then keep going.
We’ll now place the synthetic bone in the hole. As always, hold your remote hand with your other one to help keep it steady. The bone’s shape is TOTALLY not the exact same as the hole so listen up. To get the cool here, this time you should concentrate on the bottom part of the fragment. Keep your gaze focused on the two teeth on the bottom, and get their angle to coincide with their respective place in the hole. As long as you get this part correctly aligned, you will get the cool. Note that the top part will look COMPLETELY out of place with the hole. That’s how much of a trap this is. But it doesn’t matter.
Once that’s done you’ll drill some more holes and screw the plate in. Whatever. We’ve already done this like, I dunno, a jillion times. Do it the same. After that, though, we’re STILL not done. The hell is up with this operation. We’ll have to reconstruct another bone. This time around there are 5 fragments scattered about. Pick them all up and place them on the tray. When they’re all recovered, switch your stance. Hold your remote hand with your other one to help keep it steadier. Yeah, I like to do this when placing bones. I mean, it’s still more lenient than in other operations, but hey, I’m fucking tired by this point. Don’t judge me. Watch the straight end of each fragment and make sure it’s aligned with the straight end of the silhouette before releasing it. They’ll come at you in random order from the tray on the left so I can’t really tell you where each one goes (though you CAN look at my video to see). Rest assured though that you will never get a fragment that can’t be connected to what’s already there. So ALL you have to do is check whether the fragment will fit on the top or the bottom. Nowhere else. Pretty simple.
After that’s done, stay in your current stance! Keep both your hands together! You’ll now be drilling a hole through the entire length of the bone. You’ve done this before, but this time around it’s actually DANGEROUS, I shit thee not. So you REALLY need that extra hand to keep you steady. Hold down the A button on the blue circle and yank the cursor downward to start the drill moving. You can do this because you won’t get a miss early on if you go outside the path. You’ll only get a miss if you go out once the drill has been moving for a while. Then once it’s already moving you have plenty of time to adjust your cursor. Place it far ahead of the blue arrow that appears to keep the drill moving at full speed but keep it steady in between the two red lines that make up the path. This used to be easy but this time it’s tough. You REALLY have to keep that pointer steady, and even adjust its position WITHIN the red lines when the drill is going too far in a direction. Here’s a tip: you should tend more towards the bottom wall than the top. It seems that the way the camera moves causes your pointer to naturally get closer to the top margin, so you should compensate by tending towards the other side. Don’t go overboard though!
After that, we’ll be driving a nail through the bone with the mallet. This isn’t too tough. We’ve been using the mallet for a while and it’s not really any different. What IS different, though, is that the power of your strikes matters now. You have to use the fewest strikes possible, but if you drive the nail too far in you’ll get a miss. The first thing you have to understand is that the mallet has three levels of power, indicated by the power meter on the right. You’ll notice that there are 5 segments. The number of segments that light up indicate the power of a swing. There are 5 segments on the meter but in reality there are only THREE levels of power. The levels are: strong (or full power), which is indicated by all 5 segments lighting up. Weak (or minimum power), which is indicated by a single segment lighting up. And mid power, which is indicated by either two, three, or four segments lighting up.
Now, you’re going to have to make hammering motions with the remote to drive the nail in. I recommend changing your grip. Normally you have your thumb up on the buttons, but for this it should simply wrap around the remote as if you were grabbing the hilt of a sword or a hammer. Before making the hammering down motion, I actually recommend having the cursor on screen. Not sure why but this seems to help with the motion registering. Specifically, if you’re going to do a full power swing, have the cursor as far to the top of the screen as you can (while still being inside the screen), and then swing down so that the cursor moves down across the screen as fast as possible. It’s not just about the cursor moving fast though. The actual motion has to be strong (though contrary to what you may think it doesn’t actually have to be THAT strong, but since you can’t go past full power, it doesn’t hurt to be a bit stronger than necessary). Snap your wrist when doing the motion to give it that added oomph.
On the other end of the scale, the minimum power strike. For this one, you want to make the weakest motion possible. Do NOT snap your wrist at all when doing it. Keep it locked firmly in place and simply shake your arm up and then down. The amount that your arm has to move is minuscule. I’m talking like barely an inch or something. It’s actually pretty easy to do and I recommend tending towards making the motion TOO slight. Why? Because if the motion is too weak then it simply won’t register, and all you have to do is try again, making it ever-so-slightly stronger.
For this nail, you don’t need to deal with the mid power strike. It requires 3 full power strikes and 1 weak. So, since the weak strike is the easiest to do, you should first do the 3 full power ones and leave the weak one for last. IF you mess up and accidentally get a mid power strike while you’re doing the full power ones, though, not all is lost. You simply have to change the strikes to 2 full, 2 mid, and one weak.
Now stay calm, keep the wiimote held with both your hands. Twist your wrist counterclockwise in preparation while the screen is transitioning. This is the end, DON’T SCREW UP HERE. You already know how to staple the wound shut: Press and hold the A button so that you can use it by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Now watch the guideline and make minute changes to the angle of your remote until you match it. Position the cursor so that your remote overlaps the guideline. There’s some leeway, but try to have it overlap as perfectly as you can. Remember, don’t rush on this part! Though I will say one thing. You actually CAN get two misses and STILL get the XS so if you haven’t missed up to now you’ve basically got nothing to worry about. Miss as much as you like, it doesn’t make a bit of difference guys.
And we’re FINALLY done. Jesus. Too long, Clanky. TOOO LOOOOONG. I don’t approve of such long operations. Not only because of youtube’s gay ten minute limit, but also because how can a man be expected to operate for this long?! What if my hand gets tired? What if I have to scratch my nose? What if my eyes get tired and I have to blink a lot? These are all actual things that have happened! But anyway. This operation is just long. It’s not hard. You can get 2 misses at any point and still get the XS. You can get a huge number of goods and still get the XS. Probably, like, in the ballpark of over 10. And let’s face it, no one’s going to get that many goods.
Chloe’s Change
Special Bonus
-Cool > 15 times
-Ran into wall < 2 times
-Blood pool formed < 30 times
-Stabilizer used < 25 times
Wait, we’re operating on a cat now? It’s a fuckin’ cat, man. Just let it die. No one cares. Bitches swallow shit all the time. We deal with this, it’s just gonna find something else to choke on.
Ok, no, we gotta do it. First off let’s go over technique: Have your arm pulled all the way back so that your wrist is touching the side of your torso. Lean back on your chair. That’s the neutral position. When moving the endoscope forward, you want to do it as fast as you can and without having to back into neutral position midway if you can help it. From the neutral position, to go forward simply hold down A+B and extend your arm out in front of you. You can get a lot of distance this way and very fast. Once your arm is completely extended, you should begin leaning your entire body forward to get even more distance. If you do this, you’ll be able to get to a lot of destinations without having to waste time retracting your arm, as we’ll soon see, but this is also helpful during the parts with peristaltic motion, where it can be very dangerous to stop moving long enough to pull your arm back if you’re in a bad spot. Just remember that you’re supposed to lean towards the sensor bar and not the TV. Seems obvious but sometimes we may forget.
Anyway, hit skip as soon as the operation starts and move forward as fast as you can without moving the camera. You’ll get to the first affected area without having to retract your arm midway. It’s a hemorrhage and a blood pool. Pretty standard stuff. First drain the pool since it may be obscuring the hemorrhage. Then center on the hemorrhaging area’s blue circle and switch to the hemostatic forceps. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. The timing probably takes a bit of practice to get down. What I recommend is doing it enough times that you more or less have a “feel” for how much time is required before letting go of the button. On top of watching of course. If you accidentally let go before the hemostasis is complete, don’t worry, just do it again. You can still get the cool, but you should make sure to release the button pretty much immediately after the cauterization has started (since chances are good that only a minuscule amount more is needed for the cool). It’s important to get cools throughout this operation. It’s not actually necessary to get ALL of them, but if you get more than 4 you should just restart.
After those two are treated, keep moving forward until you get to an inflammation. This one requires the syringe, so center the camera on the blue circle and choose the needle. To get the cool on these you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it. There’s going to be a lot of these throughout this operation. Here’s my suggestion. When in doubt, tend more towards releasing the button earlier. This is because if you go past the line even a tiny bit, you’ll get a good, but before the line there’s a bit of leeway where even if you’re not touching it you’ll still get the cool if you’re close enough.
Keep going forward a little bit to get to a blood pool. Drain it and then keep moving forward until you get to the valve. Careful with this. Stop just in front of it and wait until it opens to go through. If it closed just as you got there and it looks like you’ll end up waiting a couple seconds for it to open, you can inject stabilizer once while you wait, but go through quickly once it’s open.
You’ll be able to see the fragment clearly on the opposite wall as you’re going in, so keep moving forward without stopping until you get to it. Once you do, inject stabilizer once to get the vitals back up. Note that you can only use stabilizer 25 times on this operation. It’s a large number, but it’s not impossible to go over it if you’re not careful, so whenever you inject, try to empty the entire syringe so as to maximize your returns on each use.
Pick up the fragment with the forceps (not the hemostatic ones) to reveal the Rosalia colony underneath. The music that starts when you do is pretty nice too. Immediately pick at it again with the forceps. When you do, it’ll burst and blacken the whole area and cause major damage. Vitals will drop by 30. While it’s bursting there’s some time before the affected areas appear, so immediately after picking it, switch to the stabilizer and inject once until the syringe is empty. This’ll get vitals back up to the 50s and the affected areas will appear by the time you’re done. We’ll have to treat them all. A hemorrhage and a blood pool appeared to the left. Treat those first since the hemorrhage is dealt with pretty fast and does a lot of damage. Then check the lower right to find a polyp. center the view on the blue circle, switch to the snare and hold Z to bring it out. Move it with the control stick and get it to overlap with the yellow ring. You can move the angle of the snare by twisting your wrist (the one grabbing the nunchuck of course) but truth is you BARELY have to do this. The snare almost always comes out at or close to the right angle. Just have it overlap with the circle and if nothing happens twist your wrist to either direction just a tiny bit. Eventually it’ll close around the polyp by itself. When this happens, let go of Z, open up the toolbox again and switch to the forceps to pick it up.
Finally, there’s a single blood pool above. Before draining it, though, take some time off to inject a full syringe of stabilizer to max out the vitals. We’ve still got quite a few areas to treat and it’s not farfetched to think that they might get dangerously low if we don’t max ’em out now. Once that’s done, switch to the drain and take care of the pool. The black area will become smaller and more affected areas will appear. Specifically, 2 blood pools, a hemorrhage, and an inflammation. Since we’ve already got the drain out, deal with the 2 pools first. When those are out, treat the hemorrhage, and then the inflammation with the medicine.
The black area will get even smaller and another wave of affected areas will appear. Since we’ve already got the needle out, move the camera to the left and treat the inflammation first. Next treat the hemorrhage above, then move down to start working on the polyp. This polyp is worse than the other one and requires an injection of medicine before we’re able to excise it with the snare. The reason we didn’t treat it after the first inflammation is because once you snare it, it’ll cause another hemorrhage and blood pool to appear. Since the hemorrhage will appear exactly where you’re pointing the camera, immediately switch to the hemostatic forceps and treat it right there. The only exception to this is if the blood pool appears right on top of it. In which case you will have to drain it first. Drain the remaining pools and pick up the excised polyp. We’re done with this colony, but turns out there was another one, so we ain’t done. You’ll automatically get moved to the intestine, where you’ll immediately see a blood pool on the right, an inflammation on the left, and a polyp above. Drain the pool first, then the inflammation. You’ll have to move forward a tiny bit to get in range of it. Then snare the polyp and pick it up.
Vitals will be stupidly low at this point, but if you did things correctly you won’t have had to raise them yet. Now that we’re outta the woods (for now), though, take the time to inject two full needles of stabilizer and get them back up. When that’s done, it’ll be time to move forward. Now you’ll have to start being really careful because the parts with peristaltic motion begin here, and it’s even MORE dangerous than before since this damn cat is so damn small. What you have to keep in mind during these parts is that the walls move forward, therefore you move back because your movement is independent of them. Ok, that’s not really how peristaltic movement works but shut up. That’s how we’re going to look at it. So because of this, when you stop moving for a second or two (i.e: when you’re retracting your arm to go back into neutral position), you should understand that you’ve moved back slightly. Therefore, before you continue moving, you should compensate for that loss of ground by moving slight forward again before continuing. What happens if you don’t do that? Well, let’s say you stop just before a curve. While you’re retracting your arm said curve moves forward a bit, and if you’re expecting it to be in the same place, you may end up hitting the wall when you make the turn. And then you’re screwed. ’cause you gotta restart. Anyway, other than that, I also recommend getting used to moving forward while turning at the same time. At first we may instinctively stop moving while turning and only move forward in straight bursts. But again, stopping isn’t a good idea in these stretches.
But that’s not all, like I said, the peristaltic movement is even worse in this cat, so unlike before, now it’s not just a matter of you hitting the wall, but that if you stay still the wall will slam into YOU. So it’s even more important than ever that you stay moving. Do not stop for more than a second at a time. In this one, you can actually get through the entire part with peristaltic movement without retracting your arm if you use proper technique. Also, for the curves, don’t make sharp turns through them. I recommend that you keep going forward for a bit before turning. Note that you can actually bump into the walls twice and still get the XS. But obviously this isn’t recommended.
Once you’re past that area keep going and you’ll arrive to the next affected area. There’s a hemorrhage, a blood pool, and an inflammation. Pretty standard stuff. Drain the pool first, cauterize the hemorrhage and inject medicine on the inflammation, then inject stabilizer once before proceeding. You’ll have to get through another area with peristaltic movement. This one’s short and not too bad though. Be careful and use the same strategy to get through it. When you’re past it, you’ll reach the next affected area. There’s a hemorrhage, an inflammation, and a tumor. First drain the pool(s), then perform hemostasis on the hemorrhage, then treat the inflammation and leave the tumor for last. Before you begin removing the tumor, make sure that vitals are at least at 50. If they’re not, inject once to get them back up there.
When they’re up to 50, it’s tumor time. Inject medicine the same way you’d do to an inflammation, although keep in mind it requires a bit more dosage. Then switch to the scalpel. Resist the urge to center the view on the ends of the excision line. Just center it on the blue circle then hold down Z. Move the scalpel with the control stick. Go up till you cut through the dots, then go down again to go through the remaining ones. Don’t let go of the Z button. A new line will show up. Wait just a bit to let it set in. If you move too fast you won’t cut the first few dots. Wait a second, then begin going up through the dots. When you cut them all, a third line will appear. Do the same thing for this one, just wait a sec, then go down through them. This will have destroyed vitals, but as long as they’re above 50 you can finish the procedure. Finally switch to the snare to excise it and pick it up with the forceps.
Move a bit down and to the right to find the valve you have to go through. Be careful with this one. Position yourself right in front of it before you attempt to go through and wait until it’s open before you move. Once you’re through, inject stabilizer once and keep going through another stretch with peristaltic movement. It’s longer than the last one, but the same strategy applies. When you’re through, raise vitals again and keep going to the next affected area. It’s just a hemorrhage, some pools and a polyp, although it’s one of the worse ones that require some medicine before you can snare it. Treat them all, same as always, then inject stabilizer once to get the vitals back up.
Keep going forward. You’ll get to the last area with peristaltic movement. This is the last and worst one. It’s much, much longer than the previous ones so you’ll have no choice but to retract your arm mid-way. Just make sure that you don’t do it in a bad spot, and that after you have done it, you account for the amount of time you spent still by checking that a wall didn’t suddenly move in your way.
When you’re through, keep going a bit to reach the last area. There’s an inflammation to the right, so treat that with medicine first, then move forward towards the foreign object, and look to the left of it to find a hemorrhage and some blood pools. Treat all of those first, then move back to the fragment. You know what to do. This’ll be the same as when we removed the first one. There’ll be a colony under it, and when we pick it, it’ll burst, blackening the whole area and deal 30 hit points of damage. That’s right, I just called ’em hit points.
Anyway, raise vitals, then make it burst. Remember to inject stabilizer immediately after it bursts because it takes a second for the affected areas to appear. When you’ve done that, start treating them. Note that at this point, all of the hemorrhages, inflammations etc that you treat will only give OKs, meaning it’s impossible to get goods. So if you’ve reached this point and have gotten all the cools, then you’re pretty much homefree unless you do something really stupid. Point is, there is no longer anything to worry about. Perform hemostasis on the hemorrhage below, then excise the polyp on the top left. Note that once you do, it’ll create another hemorrhage, so immediately switch to the hemostatic forceps and treat it before picking up the excised polyp. There’s a lone blood pool up above. You might have to back up a bit to see it. Before you drain it, take some time off to raise vitals to max. When you do, the black area will decrease and the next wave of affected areas will appear.
There’ll be two inflammations and a hemorrhage. Just treat them quickly, same as always, it’s impossible to get goods so no need to be afraid. It’ll become even smaller. Another inflammation and a blood pool will appear as well as a tumor. Leave the tumor for last. Treat the two other things first. At this point vitals are most likely below 50. You can’t treat the tumor unless they’re above 50, so inject stabilizer to get them up (ideally to 60). Inject medicine on the tumor and begin removal the same way you did previously. When you’re done cutting with the scalpel vitals will be red again, but don’t worry, we’re almost done. Use the snare on it, and get ready because once you do that, a hemorrhage and a blood pool will appear. Since the hemorrhage will appear exactly where you’re pointing the camera, immediately switch to the hemostatic forceps and treat it right there. The only exception to this is if the blood pool appears right on top of it. In which case you will have to drain it first. Once those are dealt with, simply pick up the tumor with the forceps to end the operation.
And that’s it. Decent operation, although not very difficult. The only thing you have to be careful about is that you don’t run into the walls (and even then you can do so once), and that you don’t abuse the stabilizer. You don’t have to be super fast or anything either. Try to finish in less than 7 minutes and the XS is easily yours.
Missing Girl
Special Bonus
-Miss < 3 times
-All patients transported
-No mistakes with antiviral drug
-Convulsions occured < 5 times
This operation is cool. Awesome music, lots of patients, and it can seem pretty tough to keep them all alive at first.
Throughout the operation, we’ll be injecting antiviral drugs into the rosalia bruises to suppress them. There are three vials; red, blue and yellow. Each patient with a bruise requires a specific color to be injected into them, and if you inject the wrong one they’ll die. The white vial is the immunoglobulin reagent which tells us which drug to use once we inject it, but it’s irrelevant because the trick to XSing this operation is first and foremost to memorize which drug to inject on which patient. There’s no time to waste using the reagent and waiting ages for it to work. Fortunately the type of drug required for each patient isn’t random so if you know what to inject, you don’t need it.
Hit skip whenever you want. The patient you start with has a rosalia bruise on the neck, and that’s it. She requires 3 shots from the red vial to be stabilized, but the next patients coming in depend on you finishing with the current ones, so let’s not stabilize her immediately. Inject her with the red drug just once, then immediately switch to the last patient. From here we’ll begin stabilizing each patient one by one in backwards order (the game will automatically take you in this order so no need to manually switch).
This guy isn’t infected, he only has a broken arm and that’s easily taken care of. You already know how to do this. Press A on the bone icon on the bottom right. Now press and hold A on the hand, somewhere near the blue circle. Not necessarily on the circle but close. Then move it to the left as far as you can. You’ll have to release the button and grab it a second time to pull it all the way though. Two times should be enough to get the ok. The trick with these dislocations is to move the arm FAST. Don’t hold it for very long or vitals will get pulverized. If you do it right you should get it done without the vitals suffering much, whereas if you hold it for very long it can get to critical in a couple seconds flat. Don’t worry about being gentle. That’s a lie.
Once it’s realigned, quickly press the A button the splint icon to the right. This’ll cause the blue circle on said splint to show up. Press and hold the A button on the blue circle (yes, right inside the circle) and yank it to the left. Don’t worry about being gentle, just do it fast. This’ll cause a second splint to show up. Do the same thing with this one, except this time you’re yanking it to the right. When that’s done, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then quickly press and hold A on the circles that appear to the left of the arm. Don’t worry here, you can’t get a miss if you somehow don’t hit the circle. When you do, make circles with the remote. Just go wild and spin it as fast as you can, you can’t get a miss here. My recommendation for doing this is to make the circles counterclockwise if you’re right handed like me and to make them as small as possible so you can complete them faster. It should take you less than a second to do it. Alternatively, you can just shake the wiimote up and down, or, I dunno, diagonally, or however it feels best to you. Doesn’t really matter. This’ll stabilize the patient and automatically send us to the fourth one. Have the control stick held towards the syringe and the pointer close to the vials.
This one is infected on the arm. He requires the same drug as the first lady. The red one. Inject it first, then grab a gauze from the icon on the right to begin treating the blood pools. If you’ve worked fast up to now, he should only have 2 pools on the right and 1 or 2 on the arm. Drain the 2 pools on the right by placing the gauze between them and holding A, then get a fresh one and drain the ones on the arm. There’s a small wound there, so switch to the forceps and place a synthetic membrane over it, gel it and then tape over it. To get the cool on this you’ll want to tape from the edge of the top-right corner to the edge of the bottom-left corner. That’ll stabilize this patient and we’ll move on to the next one. Have the control stick held towards the syringe and the pointer close to the vials.
Before you can do anything, 2 new patients will get wheeled in. But don’t worry about ’em for now. This guy we’re on is also infected in the arm. As soon as you regain control inject some of the yellow drug on him, then switch to the forceps and begin extracting the glass shards on his torso. At this point he’ll begin convulsing and his vitals will drop, but don’t worry about that. You can extract the shards while he’s shaking and still get the cools (or you can wait a second for the shaking to stop if you don’t feel confident about it). As always, the trick with these guys is to grab them and then pull them out making as straight a line as possible the entire way. Of course, said line must be perpendicular to the cut they’re lodged in. As long as you keep it steady and don’t take them out too fast you’ll get those cools. Gel the wounds after all three are extracted and that’ll stabilize this one. We’ll automatically move on to the next patient we gotta treat, who happens to be almost dead, but is all good. Also another one will arrive.
This guy isn’t infected, he’s only got two wounds, one of which has 4 blood pools on it. His vitals will be critical, but there’s no need to raise them, we can stabilize him before he dies. Grab a gauze from the icon on the lower right and absorb the blood pools first. You’ll need to use two gauzes so grab a fresh one after the first one gets soaked. When the pools are gone, switch to the forceps and place 3 membranes on the left wound and 2 on the right. Gel and tape them. To get the cools on the tapes for these, for the left wound you’ll want to take the tape from the middle of the top edge down to the middle of the bottom edge, without going over too much. For the right wound you’ll want to take it from the top-left corner over to the bottom-right corner, again without going over the edges too much. When you finish doing this, the patient will go into cardiac arrest and you’ll have to use the defibrillator. So make sure you start by having both your arms pulled back and close to your chest, that way the sensor bar will easily register the motion when you thrust them forward. Nothing is gayer than getting the defibrillator stuck because the motion didn’t register. Also wait for the nunchuck icon to actually show up. Don’t jump the gun. Try to revive the patient in a single shot by hitting Z and B on the green part of the bar. It’s pretty easy, after doing it a few times you should be getting it every time without much effort. Besides, he’ll be so close to death by this point that you don’t want to waste more time than you have to.
Before he’ll be stabilized though, you have to secure an airway. This is pretty easy and lenient so you can do it fast without having to be very precise. Point the cursor on the blue circle at the top of the tube and hold down A, then move the pointer in a straight line down all the way to the bottom, then release the A button, move the pointer again to the blue circle, hold down A and repeat it. Keep doing this the 3 or 4 times it takes until the tube is all the way in and you’re done with this one!
Now we automatically move back to the original patient. She’s almost dead but still holding it down. We can go ahead and stabilize her now. Inject two full syringes of the red vial on her bruise and she’s done.
Alright, we’ve finished treating the first wave of patients. We’re far from done yet, but as I said, the key to this operation is simply memorizing which drugs to use. For this first wave, it’s pretty easy to remember. Just repeat in your head “Red, red, yellow”. That’s all. Simple.
Anyway, now we move on to the next wave. When you’ve stabilized the original patient, you’ll automatically move on to a guy with a bruise on the neck and nothing else. Fuck this guy though, he can resist for now. Switch to the second patient, who is the one most likely to die right now. She has a rosalia bruise on the neck moving up on to her face. First of all, you’ll see a talk icon on the lower right so hit that immediately, then switch to the syringe and inject a shot of the blue vial on her neck. She also has two small wounds on the chest so place membranes over them and gel them. Be careful with the tape though! These are deceptive and it’s easy to get goods on them accidentally. To make sure that you get the cools, do NOT tape them diagonally like the arrows would have you believe. Also, it might LOOK like they’re in a good position to be taped both in one diagonal shot, but don’t do it. It’s not a good idea. Take them individually. For the one on the right, take the tape from the middle of the top edge to the middle of the bottom edge. Make sure that the tape stays as vertical as possible (not diagonal), and do NOT go over the edges of the membrane. Keep the length of the tape the same as the membrane. For the one on the left, do it the same way but HORIZONTALLY. Go from the middle of the left edge to the middle of the right edge. Again, do not go over the edges. Keep the length of the tape the same as the membrane. That’ll stabilize this one and a new patient will arrive.
You’ll go back to the guy with no wounds but he’s still doing good so fuck ‘im. Two more patients will arrive now. Switch to the third one. We’ll treat this one first because she’s a bit of a cunt in that after we treat her wounds she can spend a long time crying wolf with the EKG and making us waste time. This means if we leave her for later we may end up wasting a lot of time just waiting for her to hurry the hell up and fibrillate already. So towards that end, first gel her three burns until you get the OKs. It’ll take quite a bit of spreading. Then place the membranes on them and gel again. Getting the cool on these tapes is very easy, so you have nothing to worry about. Just tape them all diagonally and it’ll work out. Now stop wasting time here. We’ll come back later when she makes up her damn mind about whether or not to go into cardiac arrest. Switch to the fourth patient. I think this one’s pregnant or some shit. Anyway it’s easy and fast, only two burns and that’s it. Gel over them, place the membranes, gel again, and then tape over both of them in a single shot diagonally to get the cools.
You’ll now switch back to the previous patient. She might have finally gone into cardiac arrest by now, if so use the defibrillator, same as the last time to stabilize her. If not, just switch to the second patient and come back later. This second guy has three glass shards stuck on him. Extract them with the forceps the same way you did last time, then gel over the wounds. This’ll cause scissor lines to come up. We’ll have to cut open his shirt. Move the position of the scissors by turning your wrist to the right or to the left. You’ll have to cut along the blue lines from one dot to the next. To do this correctly you have to align the left blade (the one that’s glowing yellow) with the line. It’s not too tough but don’t rush so much that you get careless and miss.
Turns out this guy is infected too! Switch to the syringe and put a shot of the yella paint into his bruise, then grab a gauze from the lower right and absorb the blood pools. Place the membranes on the wounds, gel and then tape them. To get the cools on these, for the top wound just tape from the middle of the left edge to the middle of the right edge. For the bottom wound take it from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner. That’ll stabilize this guy and we’ll move back to the guy with no wounds. His vitals will be much lower now, but he’ll still be alive. Put a shot of the blue vial into his bruise and he’ll flatline. Use the defibrillator same as usual to stabilize him.
When you move on to the last patient, four more will get wheeled in! Let’s take care of the one we’re on first. He’s easy. Just two wounds. Place membranes on them, gel them and tape them. These are pretty lenient so getting the cools won’t be a problem. Tape the top wound diagonally and the bottom one vertically. That’s it for this guy.
And we’re done with the second wave. Remembering which drugs to inject on this wave is pretty easy, all you have to do is repeat to yourself “Neck = blue, body = yellow”. That’s it. Both of the ones who have the bruise on the neck require the blue drug, and the other one requires the yellow one.
Moving on, only 4 more patients left to go. First off, switch to the third one. We’ll be treating this one first because if we leave him alone for a bit he’ll go into some pretty nasty convulsions, which is a bad combination with the fact that he’ll require a lot of treatment. Anyway, he has a bruise on the arm. It requires a shot from the yellow vial. The way to remember that you need to inject the yellow one here is to remember the guy on the first wave that also required the yellow drug. He had the EXACT same bruise on the EXACT same place on the EXACT same arm and he had the EXACT same shirt. In fact, he’s probably the same fucking guy for all we know! But yeah, if you think about it that way, it’s easy to remember. Once you’ve injected him, place membranes on all 3 wounds and gel them. To get the cools on the tapes, for the top one go from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner. For the left wound, go from the top-right corner to the bottom-left corner. Finally for the other one, just tape horizontally through the middle. When you finish this, he’ll flatline and you’ll have to do chest compressions (what, did the defibrillator stop working?). Oh well, this is easier than using the defibrillator anyway. Loosen up for this. Begin smacking down the wii remote as if you were hammering a nail with it. Make sure to begin doing it as SOON as the hands appear. Hammer down each time the hands on the screen come down. You CAN simply hammer rapidly with no regards to anything and still get the cool but that’s tiring and there’s no reason to do that when doing it in tandem is so easy. After 5 compressions you’ll get the cool. Finally you’ll have to intubate him. It works the same as last time. Get that tube in and he’ll be stabilized.
Three more patients left to go. Switch to the first one, who is in slightly worse condition than the second one. Cut open his shirt with the scissors and check inside. Yep, he’s infected. He’s got a huge bruise on the torso. This one requires the red drug, so inject it first, then treat the 3 lacerations. To get the cools on the tapes, take it from the top-right corner to the bottom-left corner for the wound on the bottom. For the one on the left take the tape from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner, and for the other wound take it from the middle of the top edge to the middle of the bottom edge. Before he’ll be stabilized we have to secure a blood transfusion though. Gel the white dot, then grab the needle from the bottom right icon and shove it in the green circle. Don’t rush too much, remember that the dot isn’t as lenient as other things. Or do whatever you want. I mean, you can miss thrice throughout this whole operation and still get the XS so whatever. once you’ve put the needle in, grab the bandage on the bottom right with A, then apply it the same way you did to the broken arm at the start.
Two more patients to go. Ok, this guy’s vitals are a bit too low at this point, so before you cut his shirt, inject a single shot of stabilizer to get him back up to 20. Anyway, go inside and let’s see what we got here. Oh, another bruise on the torso. This one requires a shot from the yellow vial, so do that, then mop up the blood pools with a gauze (or two if necessary), and treat the single laceration he has. To get the cool on the tape just take it from the middle of the top edge to the middle of the bottom edge. Finally, secure a blood transfusion on him in exactly the same way you did for the previous patient to finish up.
Welp, final patient! This one…seems to be going pretty good actually. High vitals, no wounds. Just a bruise on the neck. Well. Remember what I told you? Neck = blue. Always. For this one, though, you’ll have to inject twice with the blue drug. Just once won’t cut it. Once you do, though, she’ll flatline and you’ll have to punch her in the tits. This is… slightly harder than the chest compressions. You have to hold down the A button while doing it, there’s no rhythm to it, and it seems to be harder for the motion to register. For this I recommend making the motion much stronger and bigger than with the chest compressions. Also do them repeatedly until you get 2 strikes. That should be all you need. Finally, intubate her and we done!
To help remember which drugs to inject on the last wave, just think of it like this. Neck = blue, always. For the two guys with the bruises on the torso, the first one requires red, the same as the first patient of the operation, and the second one requires the other color.
That’s it for Maria’s last operation. Those were a lot of patients, but it’s actually not quite as long of an operation as you might think at first. You can complete it in less than 3 minutes and you can even miss more than 3 times. Talk about lenient. You can also get away with a few goods, and as long as you memorize the drugs you need to inject and do things like I told you, you’ll save all the patients and get less than 5 convulsions, which means getting that XS.
Friends
Special Bonus
-Miss < 4 times
-Treatment halted < 2 times
-Tore soft colony < 2 times
-Blood vessel readhered < 4 times
Oh man, this operation is awesome. Probably my favorite one in the game. The big key to this entire operation is the fourth special bonus. That is the big decider. Whether or not you can get the XS revolves around this. At first it might seem insane. It might even seem impossible. But it isn’t. We’ll get to that later.
Most of this operation is actually extremely similar to Love in the Ground. As such, we’re going to be using a lot of the same strategies at first. Anyway. We’ll start by making the incision as usual. Normally I’d tell you to pass the dialogue manually so that you can make it faster, but the intro dialogue is kinda long. On the other hand if you skip immediately then it’ll take you a bit of time to readjust your grip on wiimote. Welp, have I got a dirty trick for you! Memorize where the blue circle is going to appear and have your cursor there, then press the skip button with your left thumb! That way you’ll be able to make the incision immediately because you don’t have to change your grip.
Alright, now we’re in. We’re gonna cut the vertebral arches with the laser, and you should do it pretty fast. To do this, you should memorize the general location of where each blue circle is going to appear so that you can have your cursor already pointing there BEFORE it appears. When it does, press and hold A, then move it down the line. But I think “move” is the wrong word to describe how fast you should do it. I think it’s basically more like you’re snapping that thing down. You can do this that fast because the line isn’t that long, so there isn’t as much room to go out of it as later on. Not to mention, the operation has just started, so even if you miss, big deal. Just start over. Keep cutting those bitches up, moving your cursor to where the next line will appear before it does so you can cut it as fast as possible. You have to do it 6 times. After that, you’ll have to make a big incision along the dura mater. Make this incision very fast as usual, but perhaps just a tiny bit slower than the previous ones because it’s so long and thus there are higher chances of getting a miss.
After this happens we’ll be cutting out the ependymoma. Again, memorize where the blue circle appears so that you can begin cutting almost immediately without wasting time. Don’t just memorize the location of the first one, memorize the locations of ALL of them. Unlike the one in Love in the Ground, you’ll only be cutting this guy 4 times. First time starts on the upper-right, after that you start on the lower-right, then on the left, and finally on the lower-right.
Something that’s strange about this tumor is that it causes the pointer to become VERY slippery and move in a slightly jerky fashion while you’re cutting. This is different from how it moves when you’re cutting basically anything else or using the laser or whatever so watch out. Overall it’s not so bad though, after doing it a bunch of time you’ll get used to the new movement. Also, the camera will be moving throughout this procedure, which will also move the location of your pointer, so take that into account. A lot of times you’ll want to let the camera move you forward while you simply move laterally to get through curves without hitting the walls.
The way you want to do this part is to always be hot on the heels of the yellow line but never go past it. The reason is because if you are close to this line it will move just a tiny bit faster, whereas if you stray too far from it, it’ll go slower and eventually stop. On the other hand if you go PAST the yellow line you’ll get a miss which is bad, so you don’t want to be too fast either. In conclusion, stay close to the yellow line. You can save a little bit of time by going extremely fast for the first few inches each time you begin cutting because the yellow line starts a ways out in front of you, and also by going extremely fast at the last few inches because once the trail has ended there’s no danger of hitting the yellow line.
When you’ve fully removed the tumor, the black bruises will appear as well as the virus colony. This is the critical part of the operation. You’ll be cutting the veins, and you have to do this for three colonies. Now, the first one is easy. It has stationary paths and no surprises. Once the second one comes out though…woah. Ok. Shit just got real. Not only do the paths start moving in a wavy pattern, which makes it harder and more dangerous, but also it will start secreting mucus, which after a while will cause all of the vessels you severed to readhere, making you start over.
Now here’s the deal. Each time the blood vessels readhere, the time it takes for them to readhere the NEXT time increases. The first time you begin cutting the vessels, it’s absolutely impossible to finish. Go ahead and cut them just for practice but don’t expect to finish.
Now look at the fourth special bonus. It says that you’re only allowed to have the blood vessels readhere 4 times at most. That is NOT a typo. That’s 4 time TOTAL. You know what that means right? It means they can only reattach twice on this one and twice on the next one! And what this means is that you have to be EXTREMELY fast in cutting them. At first it might seem insane. It might seem like it’s too little time to finish and that there must be some mistake. But there isn’t. That’s really what you have to do and it’s not impossible.
To that end, there are a few things I recommend. Firstly, I’m going to recommend that you use your other hand to support your remote hand. Yeah, seriously. The problem is that getting misses is totally out of the question here because they make you waste too much time, but at the same time you have to go so fast that it’s not easy to avoid them. This is why I recommend using both your hands, because this way you’ll be able to keep the remote steadier and have greater control over it. You don’t have to let go of the nunchuck, you can still hold onto it with your thumb, but just place your 4 fingers underneath your remote hand as a support. Ideally the index finger should be on the remote itself (touching the underside, of course), directly in front of your other hand’s index finger (the one you use to press the B button).
Next, it’s of UTMOST importance that you memorize where you need to start cutting each vessel so that you can do it without wasting any time. Note that it’s actually the same for all 3 colonies, so you don’t have to memorize that much. You can more or less tell where you’re going to have to cut by looking at the web-like paths beside the veins. You’ll be cutting 5 times. The first one starts on the right side. The second one starts in PRETTY much the exact same place as the first one, but the camera will move so now it’s more on the top-right so watch out for that, but it’s really the same place. The third one starts on the top-left, in the same place where you finished the first one. The fourth one starts in the bottom-right where you finished the second one. The last one starts in the same place you finished the fourth one, except on the other side. KNOW this information. It’s important.
Other than that you have to be plain fast when cutting them and to build up that speed you’ll need to do it a lot of times to acquire the familiarity and muscle memory. You have to understand that once the vessels reattach for the second time, that is your LAST chance to cut them all out. If you fail, then you must restart. When you finish cutting it out, have the cursor pointed on the thing and hold down A+B so that you’ll grab it immediately after you regain control. The vessels can still readhere even after all of them have been cut, so you shouldn’t let it sit for even a second. Once you have it in your hand it’s good. Place it on the tray and get to work on the third one.
The third one is the same except it’s soft tissue so removing it will be even more difficult. To compensate, though, the vessels will take slightly longer to readhere. You still need to wait until they’ve reattached twice though, the first two times you attempt to cut it, it’s impossible. You can actually finish cutting all 5 times on the second try, but you definitely won’t have enough time to pick it up with the forceps, so you must wait until the third try. The cutting part works exactly the same as the previous colony, but once it comes time to remove it with the forceps you must be careful.
Press and hold A+B over it and begin moving it. It’s soft tissue so you need to pull it slow or it’ll tear. SLOW DAMMIT! Pull it towards the right and keep the movement steady. It’s sudden jerks (otherwise known as changes in acceleration) that cause it to tear, even small ones, so stay calm and take it out smoothly. That’s why it’s a good idea to use both your hands, because this’ll reduce the chances of any jerky motion. You don’t have much time until the vessels reattach but you must still take it reasonably slow because if it tears then you DEFINITELY won’t make it in time. Probably the best thing you can do is finish the cutting part so fast that you still have a good amount of time left (at least 5 seconds) to slowly pull the tissue. When it’s off, place it on the tray and the cool music will come back.
Whew. The worst part is over. We’re not done, but if you finished up to this part successfully there’s basically nothing more to worry about. It’ll be time to place eight screws. These are different from the screws we usually do, but we’ve done this type before in Love in the Ground. Stay focused and try to get all the cools. To do this, look at the silhouette. See that there’s a line just above where the silhouette meets the bone? You need to release the A button when the part of the screw that is attached to the spike is just about to overlap with that line. Now, if that’s not totally clear, then look at the drawing I’ve made to show you:
That’s what you have to do to get the cool. Hold down A and release it JUST when those two lines are about to meet. Do this for all 8 screws. The last 4 are with a different view, but the same rule still applies.
After that you’ll have to pass two rods. Hold down the A button on the blue circle and yank the cursor downward to start the rod moving. You can do this because you won’t get a miss early on if you go outside the path. You’ll only get a miss if you go out once the rod has been moving for a while. Therefore, your top priority at first is just to get that thing moving as fast as possible. Then once it’s already moving you have plenty of time to adjust your cursor. Place it far ahead of the blue arrow that appears to keep the rod moving at full speed but keep it steady in between the two red lines that make up the path. It’s not too difficult, it’s all about simply keeping the cursor steady. You shouldn’t have problems here. Do the same for the second rod.
Once the two rods are in place we’ll almost be done. It’ll be time to staple the patient shut. twist your wrist counterclockwise while the screen is transitioning and hold the A button so that you can use it by only pressing the B button. This will afford greater control. Now watch the guideline and make minute changes to the angle of your remote until you match it. Position the cursor so that your remote overlaps the guideline. There’s some leeway, but try to have it overlap as perfectly as you can. Remember, don’t rush on this part! Although, if you haven’t missed up to now, you can get 4 fricken misses and it won’t matter, so whatever. Do what you want.
And we’re done. Like I said, the only tough part of this operation is getting that fourth special bonus. It can seem really hard at first but if you practice you’ll see that it’s not so bad.
Despair
Special Bonus
-Gates opened < 22 times
-Injected gigantic colony < 15 times
-Drain not used on gigantic colony
-Virus colony exploded < 0 times
As usual for Tomoe’s operations, this one is only difficult when you don’t know what to do. The only stumbling block is figuring things out, but once you do it goes pretty smooth.
We’ll be navigating through the lungs searching for virus colonies. As always, the lungs are like a labyrinth and it’s possible to get lost and wander aimlessly searching for the next one, but if you have a clear picture of the structure of the place which I’ll paint for you right now, you’ll always know exactly where to go.
Press the skip button as soon as the operation starts and move forward. You’ll spot the first virus colony on the floor below. Get close enough to it that the blue circle comes up. To treat it, first spray it until you get the ok. If you keep holding down the button you’ll get several OKs and the effect will last longer. It only takes a second to get the rest of the OKs so it doesn’t hurt to go for the increased duration every time. After spraying the colony you’ll be able to inject it with medicine to make it swell. If you inject it without spraying it first, the colony will explode and you can say goodbye to the XS, so whenever you get to a colony, first make sure that the spray is highlighted before pressing the button. I’m saying because sometimes the control stick may slip and you might accidentally end up with the syringe when you thought you’d chosen the spray. So be careful about that.
The dose of medicine necessary is big, so you’ll need to inject twice. To get the cool on injections you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it. However, the dose needed for this one is big, so you’ll actually have inject twice. Note, though, that it only requires one full injection and a little bit more, so it’s a good idea to only inject a little bit the first time so that you have more time to see the yellow line on the second injection. Once the colony has protruded, the scalpel line will appear. For this part, it’s better to be far away because the farther you are, the less you have to move the scalpel. When you’ve finished cutting through the line, don’t let go of the Z button. A new line will show up. Wait just a bit to let it set in. If you move too fast you won’t cut the first few dots. If you’re far away and still holding the Z button at the end of the line, a lot of the time when the line becomes cuttable the scalpel will automatically cut the first few dots, alerting you that it’s safe to start moving it. Either way, wait a second, then cut the second line, and then cut the third.
Vitals will go down the drain when you do this, so before you pick up the excised colony, take the time to inject stabilizer 3 times to get vitals back up to max. You can pick up the colony first and raise vitals after, but it’s better to do it before because that way the cool music sticks around longer. Once you pick it up it goes away. Lame.
Anyway, movin’ on! Now’s when the operation starts. First of all, the path will fork into two. Each path leads to a different lung. On the left path there are two colonies to be found, and on the right path there are three. You can deal with them in whatever order you want, but I say let’s take care of the one with the fewest first. So take the left path. You’ll notice that there’s a blood pool just before the gate. Drain it before proceeding. When you get past the gate, you’ll see that the path branches out into many. Specifically, you’ll see three gates. The one to the right is irrelevant, there’s nothing there. The ones we care about are the other two on the left. Each path has a virus colony at the end, so we’ll have to go down both of them. Not…at the same time, obviously. I mean first one and then the other. So let’s go with, say, the bottom path first.
There’s a hemorrhage just before going through the gate so switch to the hemostatic forceps and treat it before continuing. Hold Z to stop the bleeding and release it as SOON as it has stopped to get the cool. The timing probably takes a bit of practice to get down. What I recommend is doing it enough times that you more or less have a “feel” for how much time is required before letting go of the button. On top of watching of course. If you accidentally let go before the hemostasis is complete, don’t worry, just do it again. You can still get the cool, but you should make sure to release the button pretty much immediately after the cauterization has started (since chances are good that only a minuscule amount more is needed for the cool). Note that these affected areas will always guide you towards a virus colony, so as long as you follow them it means you’re on the right path. Naturally, this also means that the radar can help guide you as well, since the affected areas will show up as dots. It’s a good idea to eye the radar every now and then, though it’s definitely not necessary or as effective as simply knowing where to go.
Anyway, after treating the hemorrhage, go through the gate. Keep going downward through the gate after that. You’ll get to an inflammation, so inject medicine into it, same as before. The path then branches into two, but you can clearly see another inflammation on the right one, so go down that one. Go through the next gate, and then the other one you see right after that. Drain the pool you see here, then take the path upwards to find the first virus colony. Well, technically the second one. But the first one didn’t count ’cause it was a freebie. Y’know what I mean. Anyway, you’re supposed to remove it in exactly the same way you did the first one. By now vitals are probably pretty low though, so make sure to inject stabilizer several times before you begin to work on it, and then AGAIN after you’ve cut it with the scalpel. Pick it up and we’re done here.
Hold down on the d-pad to automatically retract the endoscope. Just hold it without fear, you’ll know when to stop retracting because the red seal symbol will appear in front of you. When that happens, it means you’re back in the spot where I told you there were two paths we had to go down. Welp, time to go down the second one. It’s the top one on the left. There’s an inflammation past the gate. Treat it and keep moving. The path will fork. Take the left one where you’ll find a pool. Drain it and keep going through the next gate and you’ll spot another inflammation, which means you should follow it. Keep moving through the gate after that and then take a left on the fork to reach the second virus colony. Raise vitals again and remove it same as always, then raise them again.
That’s it, we’re done with the left lung! The right lung has 3 colonies though. Hold down on the d-pad and backtrack alllll the way to the very first fork in the road. When the red seal appears, keep moving backwards past one more gate and you’ll be there. Now this time take the right path. There’s a hemorrhage here so treat it first, then move through the gate. The path will fork again. On the left one there is a virus colony, and on the right one there are two colonies. So let’s go down the left one first and take care of that. Drain the pool and go through the gate. You’ll see an inflammation, so follow the path it’s on, and when you reach the fork take the bottom path. Keep following the clearly visible affected areas. After the hemorrhage, go through the next gate and then take the right path to reach the virus colony. Treat it and that’s it for this place. Hold down on the d-pad and go back until the red seal appears. This time take the gate on the right.
Alright, only two more colonies left. When you go through the gate there’ll be an inflammation to take care of. Now, here it’s going to branch off into many paths. First let’s take the one that tends to be a bit harder to notice. You know how after you pass through the previous gate, you can see a path with another gate straight ahead, and then there’s also another path below that one and another path above? Well the one you need is the hidden fourth path that is ABOVE the above path. Well it’s kind of above and to the right. You know what I mean though. You’ll see a pool past the gate here. Drain it and keep moving forward to get to a part that branches into several paths again. You can clearly see a hemorrhage on the one to the left though, so it’s easy to see which one you should take. Then after that a clearly visible inflammation will tell you to take the right path, after which you should take the left path on the next fork to reach the virus colony. Remove it and then go back until the red seal appears.
Only one more colony left. There are four paths right? Well. Three now that one of ’em is sealed. The one you want to go down is the leftmost (or bottom-most) one. There’s a hemorrhage past the gate. Treat it, then take the right paths on the next three consecutive forks, and finally a left on the one after that to reach the virus colony. Remove it, and then raise vitals to max. Now hold down on the d-pad and backtrack to the very start. Eventually you’ll be stopped automatically because a giantass virus colony appeared for no reason.
Alright. Now before we can finish this operation we have to deal with it. This gigantic colony can be a little confusing at first. Here’s how it works. It consists of five bulbs in a pentagon formation. First you must spray them, same as the other colonies (make sure to spray ALL of them). However, when it comes to injecting them with the medicine, it’s a bit different because the bulbs are connected. When you inject one, you will also be injecting the same amount into the 2 other bulbs on each side of it. Furthermore, you have to make all 5 of them protrude before you can excise them. If even one of them hasn’t been injected with enough medicine, or has been injected with too much, then it won’t work. You need to inject only as much as it needs for the bulbs to turn green. Any more than that and it will turn orange, in which case you’re fucked. Because then you won’t be able to excise it unless you drain the excess medicine. But if you use the drain you won’t get the third special bonus, which means no XS. So you have to inject the right amount the first time.
Don’t worry though, it’s very easy to do once you’ve figured it out. Here’s the deal, straight up. Each bulb requires exactly one and a half injections to turn green. You can go a little bit above that but not too much or it’ll turn orange. The second special bonus says you’re only allowed to inject 15 times, but in reality you only need to inject 5 times, and I will tell you how. It’s very simple. The trick is that you need to inject only HALF of a syringe each time. Got it? Now, the order you need to inject the bulbs in is like this: first choose any bulb. Say, the top one, and inject it. Second, move two bulbs over, say, clockwise, and inject that one. Third, inject the next bulb still going clockwise, fourth, the next bulb after that still going clockwise, and finally the remaining bulb. That’s all you need to do. If they start flashing midway, that means the spray is wearing off so spray them again before continuing. Also when injecting, it’s probably a good idea to go just a tiny bit farther than half the syringe to be safe, since if you inject just a little bit more than necessary it’s still good, but if you don’t reach the green point then you can’t excise it.
Once all of them are like big green watermelons the scalpel circle will appear in the middle. You’ll have to cut it, but be careful because doing so will totally annihilate the vitals. You should only cut about half the circle (less to be safe), then switch to the stabilizer, raise them up to max, and then cut again. When it’s all cut just pick up each melon with the forceps and we’re done!
But yeah, this operation’s pretty chill once you know where to go and how to deal with the gigantic colony. And if you get all the cools, which is pretty easy, you can be pretty dang slow and still get the XS.
Time for Rejoicing
Special Bonus
-Cool > 4 times
-Antiserum used < 10 times
-No outbreaks from Rosalia bruise
-Blood pool formed < 10 times
This is a really short operation. Pretty easy too, and nothing too special about it. Now that we got the antiserum it’s just a matter of using it. Perhaps the only problem area (not really) is getting less than 10 blood pools to form. Luck can play some part in this, since the types of wounds that appear are random, so you can end up getting really lucky and not seeing many pools. Even if you get unlucky though, it’s still not a problem to XS it. You don’t need New Blood levels of luck or anything like that.
When the operation starts, move forward a bit until you reach the wall. All of the operation will take place in this area. What you’re going to do first is treat all of the affected area. They will be random, as well as randomly placed so you need to keep an eye on the radar to tell you where they are. It’s not difficult to find them since they will all be in this room.
The types that will appear are all stuff you already know how to deal with. The important thing is that you must make the hemorrhages your priority above all else. The longer a hemorrhage is active, the more blood pools it will create, and remember that your blood pool limit is 10, so you should always treat them first. If possible. Sometimes there will be a blood pool obscuring the hemorrhage and in that case you’ll have to drain it first.
Then there’s also inflammations which you have to inject with medicine to treat. All of the affected areas here will be giving you OKs so it’s not even possible to get goods, which makes it even easier. There’s nothing to worry about.
There’s also the occasional tumor, which will take a bit longer to treat but it’s still nothing we haven’t done before. One thing you need to remember is to raise vitals to max before you start treating it. And even when they’re at max you’ll still have to raise them again midway because the damage to vitals is severe. Inject medicine the same way you’d do to an inflammation. Then switch to the scalpel. Resist the urge to center the view on the ends of the excision line. Just center it on the blue circle then hold down Z. Move the scalpel with the control stick. Move it along the line till you cut through the dots, then wait a bit for the second line to appear, then cut that one. Now switch to the stabilizer and inject at least once before cutting the third line. When that’s done, just pick up the tumor with the forceps.
Now, keep treating all the areas but when you see that there is only one left, stop. Center on it, but before you deal with it, inject stabilizer until you’ve raised the vitals back up to max. When they are, treat the last remaning wound, and then immediately switch to the anti-serum, which has taken the place where the snare used to be. Inject it into the creep fast. The dosage it requires is pretty high. Around more than 1 and a half syringe’s worth. So the first time inject about 3/4s of the syringe, and then do it again immediately after. This is the only part of the operation where you can get cools, so make sure you do. To get the cool on these you have to hold down the button until the bright light above the blue medicine is as close to the yellow guideline as possible without going past it. Remember, the one that can’t go past the yellow line is the brightest part at the top. The duller parts below that can go past it. I recommend that you tend more towards releasing the button earlier because there’s a tiny bit of leeway above the guideline where you’ll still get the cool even if you’re not exactly touching it, but if you go past it even a nanometer you’ll get a good for sure.
When you do that, the creep (yeah, I am totally calling it that now. This is some zerg shit up ins) will get smaller and vitals will drop to the 30s. More affected areas will appear. Before you do ANYTHING, search around for any hemorrhages and treat them immediately. When they are taken care of, you can raise vitals. Then simply treat the remaining wounds and when there’s just one left, raise vitals to max, treat it and inject the anti-serum again.
You need to repeat this loop 5 times to fully kill the virus. It’s the same the entire time though. Do it and the operation is over. That’s literally all there is to it. Nothing more to say.
Try to get all 5 of the cools, and always treat the hemorrhages as soon as possible. If you do this, there shouldn’t be any problems. You can complete this operation in like 2 minutes and something, but you can be much slower than that and still get the XS.
Twisted Rosalia
Special Bonus
-Miss < 1 times
-Colony shell regenerated < 4 times
-Colony / tumor collisions < 0
-Bruised formed < 2 times
Welp, we’re here. The final boss. And it’s a god damn disappointment. Fuck me. What is this shit? I dunno what it is but it definitely ain’t no Savato, that’s for sure. And it ain’t no Cardia either. And it DEFINITELY ain’t no Aleteia. It’s just some fucking pussy who can’t even defend itself. Twisted Rosalia? Moar liek Twisted Pussy m i riet gaiz? Not even the music is up to par (though it’s still good). God dammit Atlus! Why do you do this to me? I thought we had something special!
Fuckin’ whatever. Let’s just rape this bitch. We’ll start by making the incision. Vitals aren’t at max but who even cares? Just leave them like that, don’t raise ’em. Gel the line from right to left and then move the scalpel from left to right to open her up. Press the skip button after you’ve made the incision.
Alright, we’re in now. The little bastard’s created a shell to hide inside and we’re gonna have to crack it first. We’ll start by going into the left atrium. The camera will zoom in automatically and the incision line will appear. Gel it and open it up same as you did before.
See, I told you he had a shell! There’s a new colony growing on top of it, and some small spore-like colonies will begin floating in from the right slowly. If the spores touch the new colony dangling off the shell, well, let’s just say that’s really bad. You can drain the spores to get them off, but guess what? They are 100% irrelevant. That’s right, you can completely ignore them and it won’t make any difference because we can remove the new colony before they even get near it.
As soon as you go in, have the control stick set towards the drain, and the pointer on the dangling colony. Drain it until you get the OK, then switch to the syringe. Fill up the syringe with the blue vasocontrictor, and then inject it into the bulb. It’s actually pretty lenient, but make sure you don’t miss. Not only when injecting the colony but ALSO when filling the syringe. You can get a miss if you don’t hit the vial too. Notice that it’s swinging up and down like a pendulum? I recommend injecting it when it’s at the lowest or highest part of its swing because at this points it stops for a fraction of a second. This makes it easier to avoid accidental misses.
Immediately afterwards, fill up the syringe with the orange deactivator and inject it the same way you did the vasoconstrictor. This’ll cause scalpel lines to appear in a tight cluster, which means we can cut it out now! Switch to the scalpel and cut in a zigzag pattern or circular or however you want, just make sure you get all the dots in the cluster. When you’ve got them all, switch to the forceps and pick it up, then drag it and drop it on the tray to the right. Do it fast but make sure you don’t drop it outside the tray or anything stupid like that.
Now that the new colony is gone, the spores can’t do shit to us. Keep ignoring them. Immediately after placing the colony on the tray, switch to the laser and begin burning the shell with it. Just hold down the button over it. Unlike previous Trauma Centers tools don’t run out, so you can just hold it there indefinitely. The shell will begin to turn red and then crack. Keep burning it. It needs to turn red and crack 3 times before it gets destroyed. As soon as it does, switch to the syringe and fill it up with the purple gelator, then inject it into the now unprotected colony.
We’re done with the left atrium. We’ll have to suture the incision up. It’s laughably easy and lenient though. Hell, you only need to do 3 passes to get the cool. That’s it! You can seriously just draw an N shape and you will get the cool here. Or you can do a few more passes, it’s all good (but not TOO many). Just make sure you cover at least most of the length of the opening and that you make the passes about as wide as the guideline.
Next we’ll move on to the left ventricle. Again, you have to gel and make an incision, same as last time. When you go in, it’s the same as the previous time, except this time there are two new colonies dangling off the shell. Doesn’t matter though! You just have to remove them both. Drain one first, then drain the other one. Then inject the first one you drained with the vasoconstrictor, and then the second one. Then inject the first one you injected with the deactivator, then the second one. Next cut the first one out, and then cut out the other one, then pick them up and put them on the tray. Get it? Both at the same time. You can still completely ignore the spores.
After the colonies are taken care of, immediately start lasering the shell. You’ll notice that this time only half of it will be turning red. That’s because the shell must have been divided by the presence of two new colonies. You’ll have to break each half individually. They both need to be cracked three times to be destroyed. Laser one of them, and when it cracks, start lasering the other half. When that one cracks, go back to the other one. Crack that one a second time and then the other one. For the third time, keep lasering one half until it’s red and ALMOST about to crack, then switch to the next one. That way when that one gets destroyed, you can destroy the other half almost immediately because it was close.
When both halfs are gone, quickly switch to the syringe. Fill it up with the purple gelator and inject it into the unprotected colony. Remember it’s divided now, though, so you actually have to inject it twice. Once on each half. Don’t inject the same half twice or you’ll get a miss! Note that when you burned off both halfs of the shell, they created one laceration each on the heart. You have to suture them after injecting the gelator. Don’t worry though, they’re easy and it’s not even possible to get goods on them so just suture them as fast as you can. Once you do that, we’re done with the left ventricle. Suture up the incision area in the exact same way you did previously. Really, you can just do an N shape. It’s so lenient it’s funny. We’ll move on to the right atrium now. Make the incision same as always.
Again, inside it’s exactly the same except this time there are 3 replicated colonies. Everything works exactly the same though. Treat them all at the same time just like you did previously but this time with three. Drain one first, then the second, then the third, then inject the first one you drained with vasoconstrictor, then the second one, then the third, etc etc etc. Since you’ll be doing a lot of injecting, you can do it a little bit faster by using the warping technique:
When filling the syringe or injecting with it, you may notice that as long as you have the button pressed, and as long as the syringe hasn’t finished filling up/emptying out, you can move the wiimote as much as you want and the cursor won’t move. But as soon as the syringe is done filling/emptying, the cursor will appear where you are currently pointing the remote. Using this trick, you can save some time. You can move the remote over to the vial while the syringe is injecting, and when it’s done you can immediately fill it up again. It works the same the other way. While it’s filling up you can move over to a colony and inject it almost immediately. Still be careful though, because you don’t want to miss.
Also, now for some weirdass reason there’s a fourth vial. A pinkish purple one. I have no fuckin’ idea what that thing even is man. And I don’t care. And neither should you. Just ignore it because we don’t even have to use it. (I’m kidding. The pink vial is actually used if the spores collide with fragments from the shell. But that should NEVER happen if you’re doing things fast and correctly, so still ignore it).
When they’re all excised and placed on the tray, begin burning off the shell with the laser. Now it’s divided into three, but it still works exactly the same. Use the same strategy as last time, make sure that you manage to destroy all 3 parts at roughly the same time to lessen the damage. When you destroy them, they’ll cause a laceration and will shoot off a fragment. Ignore that for now and inject the gelator on each of the three parts. When that’s done, you can suture the lacerations and pick up the fragments with the forceps. Place them on the tray to the right and we’re done here. Suture the incision area same as always.
Ok, last one. The right ventricle. Vitals will be pretty low at this point. We won’t be able to treat the next area with them this low, so before you go in, inject stabilizer about 4 or 5 times to get the vitals back up to max. When that’s done, gel the line and make the incision. The inside is exactly the same, only this time there are FOUR replicated colonies dangling off the shell. Don’t let this intimidate you though. The procedure is still the same and you can still completely ignore the spores because they still will not get to the colonies before you remove them. Take them all at the same time, then place them on the tray to the right.
When you do that, begin lasering the shell immediately. As you probably guessed, it’s divided in 4 now. But nothing has changed. Use the same strategy as last time and try to destroy all 4 parts at the same time. They will create a shitload of lacerations and throw fragments all over the place. Vitals will still be good though. Ignore the extreme damage for now and inject the gelator 4 times into each part. Once that’s done you can begin suturing the gaggle of lacerations. There’s a LOT of them and it’s impossible to get goods on them. You know what that means don’t you? That’s right, go fucking CRAZY. Just turn your wrist to the side to make snapping it up and down fast easier and treat them all. When they’re all gone, pick up all the fragments with the forceps and place them on the tray. That’s all. Suture the incision area same as always.
Ok, time to end this. Before you make the last incision, make sure to raise vitals to max, or close to it. 80-90 should work fine. When it’s there, gel the line and go inside.
Well if it ain’t the sorry excuse for a final boss. All you have to do now is inject the gray cardioplegic solution to stop Naomi’s heart. As soon as you do that, a huge circular scalpel line will appear around the rosalia membrane. You have to excise this fast because Naomi’s vitals will drop like a rock after you inject the solution. Make sure you inject it close to where the line will appear so you can begin cutting it immediately. Move fast but steady through it. Steady is key because you don’t want to miss dots and have to go back to get them. It’s just plain better if you get them all in one pass even if you’re not moving insanely fast.
When you’ve cut it all, immediately switch to the forceps and pick up the membrane. Place it on the tray to the right, then switch to the syringe again. Naomi’s vitals are still dropping. There’ll be a new vial. Fill the syringe with it and inject it right into the Rosalia body. You need to fill and inject twice. Once you do that, bam. It’s dead. That was easy.
Its death animation is looooong and you can’t skip it, so use that time to rest your hand and wrist for a bit. Put your arm down, open and close your hand a few times, all that good stuff. When the defeat text appears, get back in there. We still haven’t closed up the patient. Suture the incision area. This one is bigger than the others so it probably needs more passes but it’s still pretty lenient. Keep it around 10 or so. Then suture the original incision. The opening is horizontal so it’s a bit more awkward and you’ll probably have to do it a tiny bit slower, but it’s still lenient and essentially the same. Keep it around 10 passes just like the previous one and keep the width the same as the opening.
Finally, gel the area, grab the bandage from the right and apply it. The trick to getting the cool here is to make sure the bandage covers the whole line BUT don’t go any farther than that. That is to say, start from the left point where the line begins, and then end it at JUST the very end of the line without going too much past it. You can do it vice versa if you want but whatever.
And we’re done with XSing all the operations! You can complete this in less than 4 minutes, but you can do it way, way slower than that and still get the XS anyway. You can also miss once and still get the XS. And the special bonuses fall into place without doing anything special. I mean the shell regenerating? That only happens if you laser it before removing the colonies, and who would do that? The collisions and bruises will also never happen if you’re doing things even reasonably fast.
Anyway, this operation is a joke. Plain and simple. It is way, way too easy and not even close to epic enough to compete with previous Trauma Centers. Pisses me off. If I had been the one designing this shit… oh, bitches would fall to their knees and cry. You better believe it. None o’ this candyass shit. They’d need prosthetic butts after the unholy amounts of asskicking they’d get from my operations. And best of all? It would actually be fair. But whatever. Man I’m hungry. Think I’ma eat some tuna sandwiches or som’n.
Signs of Anguish
Alright, so now that we’re done with the part of the game that actually matters, I guess I might as well go all the way and cover the filler missions too. These are really easy, are unaffected by difficulty and there are no ranks, so… aside from searching for the medals there’s not a whole lot to ’em. The one good thing about Gabriel’s missions is that he’s a cool guy though.
So alright, let’s start! For the first patient we get a cute girl. Woo. Speaking of cute, why don’t more schools force girls to wear ties like that? It’s a crime I tell you. Ties are always win no matter the situation. The first thing you need to do is question her. When hearing people’s stories they’ll be spewing a lot of useless crap. The only thing you need to watch out for is when they say something is wrong with them. When you see that, click on the speech bubble to record the symptom.
Click on “Um… it’s kind of hard to inhale, and I can’t really catch my breath between notes.” to get the dyspnea symptom. You can also click on “I was getting short of breath just sitting still, and my heart would start pounding…” and Gabriel will decide he has to auscultate her. Then, click on “But lately I’ve been able to lose weight, no matter what I eat!” to get the Decrease in Weight symptom.
Next we’ll have to use the stethoscope. Like the game says, you move the area you’ll examine with the control stick, hold Z to hear and the sound will come outta your remote. Then you compare the sound to the standard. If you hear some crackling, it’s not a difference. It’s just that the wiimote speaker is MAD ghetto. What, you think Nintendo is actually going to put good quality speakers into their gimmick? Get outta here.
Anyway, listen to her heart and press A when asked if something is wrong with it. It’s clearly different from the sample, so you’ll get the Increased Heartrate symptom. Next, listen to either of her lungs to get the Tachypnea symptom. That’ll be all.
Next we’ll do a visual exam. Just press A on any part of the patient and try to find something abnormal. The first thing is obvious. Her jittery hands. Clearly she played too much Trauma Center. Those things are bad for you! You’ll get the trembling fingertips symptom. Next, look at her neck. She’s got a bruise on the left side. You’ll get the swollen neck symptom and the CT exam.
That’s all. Press A on the door to get out of the room and move on over to the image analysis lab. Click on the computer to bring up the two CTs. You’ll have to compare each image to the standard and then see if there’s any differences. It’s like those spot the difference games on the back of your cereal box! Wait, whaddya mean you don’t eat those kiddie cereals? Whatever, fuck you man. You got no soul if you don’t like Cap’n Crunch.
Anyway, open up the second image and look at the top-left. The white part is way bigger than on the normal image. Click on it to get the swollen thyroid gland symptom. That’s all we need. Get out of there and head over to the office next. Click on Roni to bring up the likely candidates.
She’s got Plummer’s Disease, so bring that candidate up and then click and drag all the symptoms on the left towards the box on the right. They’ll all match. The game still wants you to eliminate all the other possibilities before we can move on though, since in reality we don’t have enough information to say it’s that for sure. So you’ll have to do the same for the other candidates. Bring up Painless Thyroiditis and Graves’ Disease and drag all of the symptoms to them. They’ll all match as well.
Once you do that for those three candidates the MRI, scintigraphy and analysis exams will become available so get back to the lab. Boot up the comp and let’s check these hoes. Look at the scintigraphy. The difference between the patient image and the normal image is glaring, so click on either of the two patches to get the abnormal thyroid uptake symptom.
Next, get back to the exam room and open up the new analysis exam that has come up there. Click on the FT3, FT4 and TSH levels. They’re all outside a the normal range.
Now, there’s a hidden medal at this point. And it’s a bitch to find, I had to do the missions several times to find it. Use the stethoscope on her again. What makes this so hard to find is that you have to listen in a place that isn’t one of the normal 4! Specifically, you have to listen to the stomach. You won’t get it if you listen in the bottom part of the abdomen, that’s the intestines. The stomach is slightly above that but below the chest. The sound will be extremely strong, I was all like WOAH when I heard it. Say it’s an abnormality to get this medal. Also Gabe makes a really weird face when you find it.
That’s all we gotta do. Get back to the office, bring up Plummer’s Disease and drag all 4 new symptoms to it. That ends the diagnosis! That was fast.
Locked-Room Mystery
Ok, next up, Naomi’s first mission. In general Naomi’s missions aren’t as entertaining as Gabriel’s because she’s kind of a boring character compared to him. Ah well. They also tend to be much longer.
Welp, let’s get started. As soon as you gain control, boot up the comp. Grab the knife card with A+B and drag it over to Little Guy’s mii to begin analyzing it. That’s all we can do here for now. Head out the door and get over to the Evidence Room. Check the corpse.
Zoom in on the back of the left hand and click on the slash on his wrist to bring up a quiz. We’re going to be answering a whole lot of these throughout Naomi’s missions. They tend to be pretty easy. Either the answer is blindingly obvious or you can always arrive at it through elimination. For this one, the correct answer is “No signs of pain reaction.” Choose that to obtain the Wounded Wrist card.
Next, check out the bent index finger on the right hand. A dumb quiz will pop up. The correct answer is, of course, “Fracture”. I mean really. What the hell else would it be.
Next, look at the hole on the right side of the torso to get the Flower-Shaped Bruise card.
Finally check the eyes. They’re red, see? The image that comes up shows red spots on them. So when the quiz comes up, choose that. You’ll get another card. That’s all we can get here, so head back to the office now and boot up the comp again. Little Guy will be trying to contact you, so first click on his skype window or whatever the hell he’s on. The knife analysis we asked for earlier is done. A quiz will pop up after you get the information. The correct answer is “The knife cut Dennis”. Wait, couldn’t they have, like, cut him with something else and then slathered the blood on the knife later? Oh well. It is still way more likely than all the other answers.
We gotta do some card fusing next. Like Naomi says, first drag the Deadly Knife card to the Wounded Wrist card to fuse them. Another quiz will come up. The correct answer is “The knife was used on his wrist”.
Have the Little Guy analyze the hemorrhaging in the eyes. Apparently it means the dude got strangled. Another quiz’ll come up. The correct answer is “A slashed wrist”. Although broken finger is pretty tempting.
Speaking of broken finger, have the little guy analyze the abnormal finger card. This will unlock the recording of a witness account, so get out of the computer, click on the recorder and start listening to the testimony. You have to click on the speech bubbles that have to do with the topic, but really, you can just click on all of them without any penalty. Either way, click on speech bubble #7 to get the Neighbor’s Account card. That’s all.
Get back to the computer and fuse the Male Corpse card with the Neighbor’s Account card. This’ll make a quiz come up. The correct answer to this one “Dennis was alive until 3PM”.
Go back to the recorder, and this time choose “Was anyone there?” as a key point to hear. Click on speech bubble #17 to obtain the Electrician Visit? card. After you do that, Little Guy will try to contact you again so get back on the computer and listen to what he has to say. He’ll tell you the fractured bone had no traces of healing, which means “The bone broke after he died”. After answering that quiz, fuse the slashing knife with the fractured finger. A quiz will come up, and the question has a typo on it! Tsk tsk. Anyway, the answer to this one is “The knife was in an injured hand”.
When that’s done, get out of the computer to receive a call informing you that the electrician’s interview recording is now available. Let’s check it out. Open the recorder and choose witness B on the tabs. When the testimony comes up, click on speech bubble #3 to get the Air Repair card and add the “Dennis’s Status” account on the recorder. Open the recorder again and choose that. This time click on speech bubble #10 and you’ll get the “Dennis seemed depressed” card.
Get back to the comp. We gotta do some more card fusing. Fuse the Electrician Visit? card with the Air Repair card. They’ll become the Repair Confirmation card. Next, fuse the two Dead cards. You’ll get a series of rapid-fire questions. The answer to the first one is “Between noon and 1 PM”, the second one is “He seemed depressed”, and the third one is “Around 3PM”. You’ll get the Dennis’s Condition card.
When that’s done, click on Little Guy’s mii to talk to him and sort through the information we got up to this point. This’ll initiate a series of MORE piss easy quizzes. Geez. What a pain. The answer to the first one is “A fire”, the second one is “The knife and the slashed wrist”, the third is “The door was locked”, the fourth is “No pain reaction wounds”, the fifth is “The knife was in his right hand”, and finally the sixth is “Hemorrhaging in the eyes”. After this the crime scene will become available, so leave CIFM. Obvious exits are Office, Evidence Room, and Dennis.
Ok, there are a few things we have to examine here. First, check out the blood on the bed. A quiz will come up. The answer is “Lying on his back”. Next, check the bulletin board above Dennis’s bed and drawer to get Little Guy to look into the guy’s friends. After that, check the overturned table to get the Ashes card. Next, check the ceiling fan above. One of the blades is broken. You’ll get a quiz. The correct answer for this one is “A repairman came that day”. You’ll get the “What was fixed?” card.
Before we leave, there’s a medal challenge hidden in this room! Check the books on the shelf behind the table. Specifically, the ones on the bottom. You’ll get a pretty easy quiz. The correct answer to the first question is “Wash hands thoroughly”. The second one is “Gender”. We know this from having played the game already. All that shizzle about the pelvis and whatever. The third answer is- wait, what? What is this shit? Ok, maybe this isn’t as easy as I thought. The correct answer is “31-40”. Hoo boy. Movin’ on. For the fourth question, the right answer isn’t as hard. It’s obviously “All are correct!”. Back in grade school one of my classmates told me that in any multiple choice question, if one of the answers is “All of the above”, that’s always the correct one. Then again, that guy flunked the year so maybe we shouldn’t be listening to him. Either way, it’s logically all of them if you think about it, I mean, obviously you have to check there’s a wound to know if the spray could have come from there, but you also have to check the angle to know if it really did. Moving along. Final question. What the? Ok, fuck it. It’s impossible to know this. The correct answer is “12-15 hours”. Apparently. Is that true? Who cares. Once you answer that, you should get the first Naomi medal, but in actuality you have to finish the mission before you get it. Don’t think you can just exit out to the episode select screen and still get it!
Anyway, we’re done with Dennis’s pad. Get back to the office. The “Friend’s account” will be added to the recorder, so open it up and have a listen. Scrutinize everything he says as usual. Click on speech bubble #10 to get the “Favored shirt” card.
After that, head over to the evidence room again. Since we just learned that Dennis was wearing his stupid Portland Jacks t-shirt the day of the incident, we should now look at the personal effects. Chec the shirt he has. It is not red. And it’s not a T-shirt. And it definitely doesn’t say Portland Jacks anywhere. You’ll obtain the “Buttoned Shirt” card.
Anyway, get back to the computer at the office now. Time to fuse some mad cards. First what we just found out a second ago. Fuse the Favored Shirt card with the Buttoned Shirt card. You’ll get a quiz. The correct answer for this one is obviously “Different color”. You’ll get the “Changed Clothes” card.
Have Little Guy examine the Ashes card and the Bloodstain card. A quiz’ll pop up. The answer to this one is “He might not have bled to death”. I like the “That’s not blood!” answer though.
Next, fuse the Repair Confirmation card with “What was fixed?”. Naomi says it’s strange that the electrician didn’t repair the broken ceiling fan but man. Really? It was a blade that was broken. If you ask me that calls for a carpenter or something. What would an electrician have to do with that? In any case, that’ll add another topic to the electrician’s recording so listen to it again. Click on speech bubble #8 and a quiz will come up. The correct answer is “It’s too hot to need the heater”. Which is pretty dumb, since just because you don’t need something at the moment isn’t a reason to not get it fixed. I mean hey, maybe the guy is a planner! You don’t know! Either way, you’ll get the Heater Repair card.
There’s yet another witness on the recorder. Stella Abbot. Listen to her testimony and click on speech bubble #9 to learn that Dennis was a drug dealer. Man if you ask me drugs should be legal so that bums can’t get rich off it. But that’s neither here nor there. You’ll get the Dennis’s Income card. Also the investigation light will become available. That means we should go back to Dennis’s place and use it.
Shine the ALS on the floor in front of the bookcase to reveal some coke. Examine the blue patch with the lens to obtain the white powder card. Next, shine the ALS on the bookcase itself and then examine the part where the dot of light appears. You’ll get the Hidden Hole in Wall card.
Anyway, get back to the office and open up the computer. First have Little Guy analyze the coke. A quiz will come up here, and the correct answer is “They fell when the fire started”. After that, combine the Hidden Hole with the Drugs on Floor to start a lightning round! The correct answers are “Drugs”, “A place to hide his drugs”, “They were made after the fire”, “Scattered just before the fire”, “Whoever took them dropped them”. After this you’ll get the first golden card. Like Naomi says, talk to Little Guy next. He’ll give you the Luminol. Guess we should use it. Head back to Dennis’s place AGAIN. Yeah, I know, what a pain.
First, spray the luminol on the clearly different colored patch beside the bed. Shine the ALS on it to reveal the bloodstain. Examine it to get the Bloodstains on Floor card. Next, move to the right and spray the door handle. Shine the ALS there and then examine the spot to get the Loose Screw and Blood Screw card. Finally, spray the ceiling fan to get the mysterious rope card. Alright, screw this place. Get back to the office and open up the comp again.
Talk to Little Guy first. The analysis on the ashes is done. You’ll get a quiz. The answer is “Start the fire”. Next, have Little Guy analyze the Bloody Screw. The answers to the quizzes here are “It touched the murder weapon”, and “A screwdriver”. Have him analyze the Loose Screw too while you’re at it. You’ll get another quiz series here too. The answers are “Locked only by the chain”, “Removing one screw”
Fuse the Screwdriver with the Flower-shaped bruise. The answer to the quiz here is “SHEER FORCE OF WILL”. Ok, no, it’s actually “A screwdriver handle”. Next, fuse “Signs of Asphyxiation with “Screwdriver Wound”. Then “Dennis’s Income” with “Dennis’s Condition”. When the quiz pops up, answer “Dennis’s behavior”. After that, “Not enough Blood” with “Bloodstains on Floor”. A different kind of quiz will come up. Point on the huge bloodstain on the floor and select Ok. After that, fuse Electrician’s Activity with Heater Repair. When the quiz here comes up, answer “Air circulation”. This’ll create the Broken Fan Ignored card. Fuse it with the Mysterious Rope card to create “Breaking the Fan” and fuse THAT with “Burnt Chemicals”. The answers to the quizzes here are “Heat is created”, “That’s just how he rolls”… ok, no, not really, but that answer is awesome. The real one is “To delay when the fire started”, then “Willpower and pyrokinesis” ok, no, but can you blame me? Some of this stuff is just too good. I like how Naomi actually comments on the wrong answers. The real answer is “The ceiling fan and a rope”. Then “So Dennis’s body would be found” and “To create an alibi”. You’ll get the next golden card now. Now fuse “True cause of Death” with “Moved Corpse”. The answers to the quizzes here are “A screwdriver”, “Asphyxiation”, and “Make it look like a suicide”.
Anyway, now that we know the cause of death, go back to the evidence room and check the personal effects. Check the area on the shirt where the screwdriver stab wound would be. Obviously there’s nothing on the shirt. When the quiz comes up, answer “A Jack Frost patch”. Seriously. If you don’t answer that you literally have no soul. Sadly, Naomi doesn’t comment on that. Missed opportunity for some hilarity, Atlus! You’ll get the inconsistent clothing card. Now get back to the computer and fuse that with the “Changed Clothes” card. The answers to the quizzes here are “Red T-Shirt”, “White shirt”, “No indication of the stab wound”, “The killer changed Dennis”, and “To make it look like a suicide”. After that, just fuse the two remaining cards and answer “It was broken while changing”.
Anyway, we’re pretty much done. We have all the golden cards now. Just go to the evidence room and check the personal effects, then check the buttons on the shirt. Not the ones on the sleeves though. Then get back to the computer and have Little Guy analyze the new card you obtained. Now you’ll really have all the cards.
Finally, it’s just a matter of presenting them in the correct order. That order is “Dennis the Pusher”, “Missing Drugs”, “Murder Timeline”, “Appearance of Suicide”, “Locked Room Trick”, “Secret of the Fire”, “Killer’s Fingerprint”, and finally the “Deceased’s Voice” card.
And with that, we’re done with the first Forensics mission. Jesus, that was long. I told you these things were longer than like everything else combined!
Blazing Darkness
Aw man, no cute girl this time. Just a fat old geezer. And here I thought this job had its perks. But it’s got some pretty fat drawbacks too.
Aight well, let’s get this shit started. There’s plenty to do right off the bat, but he won’t be very cooperative so let’s start off by doing the things we don’t need his cooperation for. Start off by examining his right leg, which is clearly shaking. You’ll get the “Shaking Legs” symptom.
Next, let’s check the diagnostic sheet. First of all, c After that, check the platelet count, total bilirubin, AST, ALT, and cholesterol levels.
Now, as RONI says, we should get this guy mad to get him to open his eyes wider and confirm jaundice. This is pretty easy to do, just examine his ugly beer gut. Right after doing that, examine his eyes to get the jaundice symptom.
We’ve got a lot of symptoms now. But before we leave, question him. Click on “I’m not as young as I used to be, and I’ve been under quite a lot of stress lately” to get the “gets tired easily” symptom. Next, click the “Being stuck in this stinking examination room is killing my appetite” speech bubble to get the “Lack of appetite” symptom. Then click on “Honestly… I haven’t eaten much, but I feel queasy and bloated…” to get the Bloated Abdomen symptom, and finally “Looking at your stupid face makes me even more nauseous!” to get the Nausea symptom.
Before we can start getting any exams, we’ll have to use what we’ve found to narrow down the candidates, so head to the office and get into Roni. Open up Congestive Liver Failure and drag all of the symptoms on the left to it. They all match. Once you do that you’ll be able to get the CT exam. Head back to the examination room to let the old fart know, then get to the lab to see the images.
Open up the first image on the computer. Check the left part of his liver. It’s larger than on the normal image. You’ll get the Swollen Liver symptom. You can also get that on the second image but whatever. What’s even more obvious on that second image, though, is the big shading on the left part. Click that to get the “Ascites Accumulation” symptom.
Now that we’ve got those things, get back to the office to finalize the diagnosis. Add the two new symptoms to Congestive Liver Failure and then hit diagnose!
We’re not done yet though, turns out this is just a complication of a heart problem. Not surprised. That geezer does seem the type to have heart problems.
Aight, now onto phase 2! Begin the diagnosis!
Start by questioning him again. Click on “*wheeze* Arguing with you is making me feel faint, you quack!” to get the Dyspnea symptom. Then click “What’s a little chest pain, compared to the wellbeing of our country?” to get the chest pains symptom.
Once that’s done, that’ll make him cooperate and unlock the stethoscope, new diagnostic results and EKG. Let’s start with the stethoscope. Yeah I know this is a pain, but make him lift his shirt up. Ugh. He’s got moobs and everything. Anyway, listen to his lungs. His breathing is very irregular, so heads up on that to obtain the “Discontinuous Sounds” symptom. And his heart is beating really fast. Geez. You’ll get “S3 and S4”.
Now have a look at the diagnostic sheet again. Some new values have gone past the range. Check out the blood pressure and the BNP.
Next, check the EKG. There’s clearly something extremely wrong with the top line. The normal one only has upside down Vs, but the real one has right-side up Vs as well. Point there to obtain the “Abnormal Q waves” symptom. Secondly, look at the bottom line. Every 8 sections a wave that normally goes high will instead go low. Check that to get the “Negative T waves” symptom.
Once that’s done, you’ll unlock the X-Ray exam. Get to the lab and check the image out. The difference between the image and the normal one is extremely clear. That white lump in the middle is the size of an Empoleon. Click on it to get the “Enlarged Heart” symptom. Once you have that, get back to the exam room as Roni says. The old geezer won’t let us take our damn echocardiography, so we’ll have to narrow down the candidates with what we got. Get back to the office and into Roni. Open up Dilated Cardiomyopathy and drag all the symptoms from the left to it. They all add up. Get back to the exam room for some good ol’ drama. The echocardiography will become available after this, so go back to the lab.
Open up the first image. Now, compare it with the normal one. It’s subtle, but the entire image is different from the normal one. Click around the center or whatever and say that it’s an abnormality. This is the next doctor medal for Gabriel!
Moving on. Open up the third image. Look at the black hole in the center. It’s clearly larger than the one in the normal image. Check it to get the “Enlarged Left Ventricle” symptom. That’s the last one we need to make the diagnosis. Get back to the office and drag it on over to Dilated Mycardiopathy to end the mission!
Man, these are definitely better than the forensics missions. And hey, we got two medals in a row. That’s nice.
Wandering Girl
Alright well. We gots two things to do first. Check the corpse and hear the testimony from the bum who found it. Let’s go check the corpse first. Go to the evidence room. The first thing we’ll be doing is reconstructing the corpse’s skull, which is interesting I guess. Click on the bag to start.
This one’s pretty easy since we don’t have to change the angle of the fragments. The easiest place to start is with the jaw, since those fragments are the most easily identifiable. First, grab the teeth from the upper-right and place them on the very bottom of the skull. Next, grab the other teeth from the right and place them right above where you placed the last one and to the left. Now grab the remaining teeth from the left and place it to the right of that. After that, grab the piece on the upper-right and place it to the right of the last one you placed. Yeah, I guess we’re going from bottom to top. Anyway, there will only be 3 piece on the left side now. Grab the middle one and place it on the bottom-left. Now take the bottom-left piece of the right side and place it just above that. Then, grab the big piece with the eye and put it to the right of that. Get the remaining piece on the left and place it above the left eye (your left). Only three pieces left. You can figure this out, right? The bottom piece goes on the left, the middle piece goes on the top-right. That’s stage 1 complete.
Grab the bottom-left fragment on the right side and place it on the top-left of the skull. Next, grab the bottom fragment of the left side and place it on the top-right of the skull. Then, grab the bottom piece of the right side and place it in between those last two. Oh yeah, place the bottom-most piece of the right side on the very bottom of the skull. Next, grab the bottom piece from the left side and place it on the top-left of the skull. Then grab the bottom piece of the right side and place it just below that. Almost done here, only a small chunk left. Grab the bottom piece of the right side and place it on the top-left. Then get the topmost piece of the right side and place it on the top-right. Now just two more piece left. The one one the right side goes on the left and the other on the right.
Moving on to stage 3. This one doesn’t have as many identifiable areas. Grab the thin piece on the bottom-right and place it on the bottom-right side of the skull. Now grab the piece on the bottom of the left side and place it directly to the left of the last piece. Only three pieces on the left side now. Grab the middle one and place it to the left of the last piece you placed. Now, grab the top piece on the right side and place it on the bottom-right of the skull, above the other thin piece which you placed first. Grab the topmost piece on the right side and place it directly to the left of that last piece you placed. Now there are only 3 fragments on the right side. Get the top one and place it directly to the left of the last one, then grab the bottom one and put it just above that. Ok, almost done, now grab the remaining piece on the right side and place it on the right part of the skull. Finally, the top piece on the left side goes above.
Aight, last stage. Geez. Like I said, the teeth are easy. Grab the clearly visible ones from the bottom-left of the right side and place it on the jaw, then grab the bottom-right piece of the right side and place it to the right of that teeth fragment. We’re done with the jaw now, I guess. Grab the bottom fragment on the right side and place it on the bottom-right of the skull. While we’re at it, get the top piece of the left side and put it on the nose. Next, grab the top-right piece and put it directly to the left of that last fragment. Only 3 pieces on the right side now. Get the top one and put it on the very back of the head, get the middle one and put it just below that, and then the remaining large piece goes on the top-right of the skull. Hey, now we’ve only got fragments on the left side. The top one goes on the top-left of the skull. The bottom-most piece goes below that last piece. Then you’ve just got two piece left. That’s easy. Right one goes on the right, left on the left.
And we’re done with that, whew. You’ll obtain the female skeleton card. The corpse can be examined now too. Do that. There’s three things you have to examine. First, the strange discoloration on the right shoulder and ribcage, secondly the broken femurs, and finally look at the right hand. The pinky is broken.
After you do that, examine the personal effects. Couple things here. Check out the tire marks on the back of the pants. You’ll get a quiz here. The answer is “Found near a river”. Next, check the huge bloodstain on the shirt. You’ll get another quiz. The answer here is “There’s no apparent damage.” I mean look at it. All the damage is on the back. The blood’s in front. Finally, examine the necklace. You’ll get the broken necklace card.
We’re done here. Head back to the office, open up the recorder and listen to the bum’s testimony. After listening to the whole thing Naomi will say there’s something he couldn’t have known. Obviously, it’s the fact that the corpse was a woman. Open the recorder again and click on speech bubble #7. You’ll get a quiz. The answer here is “Saw the corpse himself”.
Alright, now open up the computer. We’ll start off by having Little Guy look at everything he’s got to look at. First, show him the bum’s big lie. A quiz’ll come up. The answer here is “He tampered with the scene”. Little Guy says he’ll interrogate him again. Next, show him the female skeleton card and the strange discoloration card. Finally, join the fractured legs with the tire marks on clothing. The answer to the quiz that comes up is “The legs were run over.”
Get out of the computer and Little Guy will tell you something about ticks. A quiz will come up. The answer here is “How long it had been there”. After a few more lines of dialogue, you’ll get another series of quizzes. Her skull itself was… “Shattered into pieces”. The corpses femurs were… “Both femurs were broken”. After that, a map will come up. You have to point where it was that she most likely died. Point where the highway intersects with the river and choose OK.
Now we can visit that highway. Do so. Few things we have to examine here. First look at the tire marks on the road. The answer to the quiz you get here is “A car accident occured here”. Next, check out the gem beside the skid marks.
That’s all. However, before we leave, there’s a hidden medal challenge here! Click on the end of the highway where it curves off into the distance to get it. First question! …ok, well, this one’s pretty easy to look up. Type 111 in the numpad and press OK. The second question is… motherfucker! How is anybody supposed to know this? We don’t even know if they mean how many weeks AFTER the lungs have formed or just how many weeks period. Feh. Either way, the answer is 30 weeks. Moving on. Third question. Well this one’s easy, all we have to do is look at a heart diagram. Answer is the Tricuspid Valve. Fourth question. Well, this one’s pretty easy to find out too. The answer is “Atrial septal defect”. And finally, for the last question, which is pretty easy too just from looking up Blumberg’s Sign, the answer is “Acute Peritonitis”. This’ll net you Naomi’s next medal!
Ok, we out. Head back to the office and turn on the computer. Let’s do some fusin’. Let’s get the obvious outta the way. Join the two jewels. When the quiz pops up, answer “The victim was on the bridge”. You’ll get the “Victim at the bridge?” card. Now join that with the accident damage card. The answer to the quiz here is “Fractures and tire marks”. Next ask the little guy about the “Signs of auto accident” card. When the quiz comes up, answer “A large truck”. You’ll receive the Blue Truck card. Join that with the Time Since Death. When the numpad comes up, type 1 and press OK. After some dialogue Little Guy will call in saying the body was identified. He’ll also tell you you’ve now got THREE new testimonies to listen to. Fff. Ok. Let’s go over them one at a time.
Open up the bum recording and click on speech bubble #8. You’ll get the Corpse Robbing card. Listen to Thomas Cage and Alice Cage next. After you do that, Naomi says something caught her attention about the father. When the picture comes up, point at the bruise on his cheekbone. Same deal on the mother’s picture, point to the bruise near her right eye. Next, answer “Were hurt repeatedly”.
Now open up the comp. Fuse “Victim’s ID” with “Accident/Corpse relations” Show the card you get to Little Guy to have him start analyzing it. Also, have him analyze the “Causes of Injuries” card. Next, fuse the two bum cards together. When the quiz comes up, answer “Was totally stylin’!” …but after that answer “Is missing an earring”.
Now turn off the computer. Little Guy will inform you that they’ve identified the vehicle from the accident. Also you can now visit Veronica’s room. Do so.
Few things to check here. First of all, the suspicious glass shards on the floor. Those’re just screaming LOOKIT ME. This’ll make Naomi reveal the broken mirror. Next, check on top of the dresser that’s under the window. Open the package to find the Unknown Medication. Now, spray the broken glass shards and shine the ALS on it to reveal a spot of blood. You’ll get a quiz here. The correct answer is “It was swept up with the glass”.
Ok, that’s all here, but before we leave, guess what! There’s ANOTHER hidden medal challenge in this episode and it’s in this here room. See the broken mirror? And to the left a chair with a teddy bear? And to the left of THAT a bag and some boxes? Check the stack of books on top of those boxes to find this medal challenge. Here we go! First question. This one’s pretty easy. Since the Batista Procedure is complete shit and has been abandoned by the medical community due to so many failures, it’s obvious that it isn’t more effective than a heart transplant. Answer “More successful than transplants”. How’s THAT for deduction Roni. Second question. Oh, another easy one. “Isograft” is obviously the correct answer, come on. Next question. Ok, this one’s tough. Who can even know this crap? Ffffff. The correct answer is apparently “Don’t use forceps on membranes”. Really? What does that even mean. I don’t. Fourth question. Oh, haha, this one is drop dead easy. Man, it looks like ancient folk wisdom still applies because the correct answer is obviously “All of the above”. Final question. And it’s a deceptively difficult one. The correct answer is “To reduce eyestrain in doctors”. Now you’ll be able to get the medal after beating the stage.
Aight, whew. Let’s get back to the office. Little Guy will tell you that they’ve received the interview with the truck driver. Open up the recorder and choose “Veronica before the accident”. Click on speech bubble #8 to get the Collapsed Girl card. Next, listen to “What did you do afterwards” and click on speech bubble #11 to get the Body Disposal card.
Yokay, turn on the computer and let’s begin fusing. Join the two cards with the truck driver on them. When the quiz comes up, answer “Lying on the ground”, “Threw the corpse over the bridge” and “She was thrown off the bridge”. After that, Little Guy will be trying to contact you, so listen to his crap. He’s finished with the parent records. After he finishes talking, show him the unknown medication. After that, show it to him AGAIN to have him analyze it. Also have him analyze the blood on the second earring. It belongs to the victim. When the quiz here comes up, answer “It was ripped out of her ear”. Now fuse that earring card with the other earring card. You’ll get another quiz. The correct answer is “She was taken by force”. This’ll get you the first solid evidence of the case. Little Guy will now also have finished analyzing the Victim Events. Not only that, but he’ll be trying to contact you again. Talk to him to receive the information on the prescription medication.
We’re still not done fusing things. Join the Post-Mortem fractures with the driver’s account. The correct answer to the quiz here is “Already dead”. Next, join the Victim’s Hospital Record with the Parents’ Hospital Records. It’ll ask how many months ago Veronica Cage had been visiting the hospital. Type 2 on the numpad and press OK. For the next question, also type 2. You’ll get the “Bizarre Coincidence” card. Now fuse the Victim’s Charts with Mysterious Bloodstains. You’ll get the Traces of Vomited Blood card. Fuse that with the Unknown Pathological Change. After some dialogue Little Guy will give you the aluminum powder for finding fingerprints.
So alright, get back to Veronica’s room and let’s give that a whirl. Spread the powder on the floor in the area between the cushions and the door, then shine the ALS on it to reveal all the fingerprints. A quiz will come up. What was the victim doing? Obviously she was pushing off the walls in zero-G!! …ok, no, she was “Crawling on the floor”. After that, examine the doormat to remove it. Then spray luminol on that area and shine the ALS to reveal bloodstains. An extreme amount too. It’s clearly “Blood that she vomited”. And the shape indicates that “The door was closed”.
Now click on the door to close it. Check the scratch marks on it. Spray them with luminol to reveal bloodstains in them. The answer to the question is, of course, “Scratching”. We’re done here now. Get back to the office, boot up the computer and let’s finish fusing.
Join “Termina Symptoms” with “Fingerprints on Floor”. Join the “Lethal Bloodloss” with “Hidden Scratches”. When the quiz comes up, answer “Locked in”. Now, show the fractured finger to Little Guy. You’ll receive the Pre-Mortem Fracture card. Finally, join that with the other remaining card to get the last evidence. You’ll get a couple questions here. The answers are “Increased aggression” and “Veronica was beating her parents”.
Whew. Conclusion reached. Jesus that was even longer than the first mission. Now all we have to do is present the cards in the correct order. That order is “Veronica’s Violence”, “Sudden Attack”, “Sealed Door”, “Proof of Abduction”, “Truth Behind Fractures”, and the original card.
Moving Heart
Aight, you ready for the next diagnosis? Again no cute girl this time but at least it ain’t a fat bastard either. Let’s do it! First thing’s first, let’s question her. Click on “Um… I’ve had a fever for a while and it won’t go away.”, “I’ve also lost some weight, but I think it’s just because of the fever.”, “Besides that… I’ve been having night sweats, but that might be the fever too.”, and “There are some odd bruises around the scar from the operation.”.
After that, she’ll let you do the visual exam. Make her lift up her shirt by checking her abdomen. Point at the dots on the left side of her waist to get the “Pigment spots” symptom and unlock a scintigraphy. Let’s go check it out right now. Head to the lab and bring up the image. Look at the area where the pigment spots were on her abdomen. It will be darker than on the normal image. Point here to get the “Abnormal uptake into pigment spots” symptom.
Now get back to the office. Time to narrow down the candidates as Gabe says. Get into Roni and open up Kaposi’s Sarcoma. Drag all of the symptoms from the left to it. They all match. But before we can make the diagnosis, we have to go talk to the patient again. Get back to the exam room. Question her again. This time click on “It’s strange… I made sure to take the medication they gave me too.” once you do that, the Biopsy results will come in. They’re positive. Get back to the office and drag the new symptom over to Kaposi’s Sarcoma. That’s it.
…but you thought we were done that fast? Naw. Naw nigguh you ain’t done. I been watchin’ you. You ain’t washed behind yo ears or nuthin’. Begin phase 2!
Question her again, and click on “Um…my stomach suddenly started hurting…” to get the stomachache symptom. Click on “And… I feel a little nauseous, too”, you’ll get the Nausea symptom. Then click on “Let’s see… if there’s anything else worth mentioning, I guess I have been feeling a little bloated…” to get Bloated Abdomen. Finally, click on “I’m having trouble… using the toilet fully, you understand?” to get the constipation symptom.
Next we’ll use the stethoscope. Listen to her stomach. SWEET JESUS. It’s like she’s got a lion in there! You’ll get the “Aggravated Bowel Sounds” symptom. After this, the X-Ray and CT exams will unlock. So let’s go to the image lab and look them over.
Open up the X-Ray image and look at the upper part of the image. She’s got a shadow in the shape of what seems to be a sink faucet to the right of the spine. The normal image doesn’t have this. Click it to obtain the Formation of air-fluid level symptom.
Next, open up the second CT image. It’s glaringly obvious that her two kidneys are way smaller than on the normal picture. Click on either one of them. This isn’t actually a symptom, but it’ll get you the next Gabe medal. Once you have that, open up the fourth CT image. Check out the top-right of the image. You’ll see a white ball there that isn’t on the normal one. Click on it to get the “Tumor Shadows on Small Intestine” symptom.
That’s all we need for now. Get back to the office and boot Roni up. Open up Occlusive Ileus and drag all the symptoms on the left to it. Then hit diagnose to finish this phase.
Time to start up phase 3, let’s take everything again from the top. Or from the bottom, whatever. The first thing I want you to do is bring up the EKG. Now look at the bottom part. Every 8 sections a part of the line will be cut off. Point here and say it’s an abnormality to get another medal for Gabe!
Now, start questioning her again. Click on “I don’t know why, but my chest’s been hurting for a while.” and “If this keeps up… *cough* *cough*” to get Chest Pains and Coughing.
After that, auscultate her. Exit out of that and she’ll begin coughing again. Question her again. This time click on “Um… when I was coughing just now, I tasted blood.” and “Doctor… it’s getting hard to breathe. Could this be related…?”. You’ll get Bloody Sputum and Dyspnea.
Now auscultate her again. Listen to her lower left lung (that would be your right). It’s barely breathing. Have RONI record this to get the “Attenuation of Respiratory Sounds” symptom. The x-ray will now be ready too, so head over to the image analysis lab. Open up the single image. The problem here is obvious. Click on the lower-right part of the image. There’s a huge white shadow here that isn’t on the normal image. You’ll get “Pleural Effusion”.
That’s all. Time to go to the office. Open up Roni and bring up Carcinomatous Pleuritis. Drag all of the symptoms over to it. They all apply to it, but we still need a CT scan. Unfortunately we gotta visit the patient once more because apparently she’s doing pretty bad. Do so, and after some good ol’ drama you’ll get a new x-ray image and the CTs. Get to the lab and bring up the new X-ray. Again, the abnormality is obvious. The entire area above where we found the pleural effusion is different and there’s a Rosalia bruise. Click here to get some pretty cool music.
Bring up the fifth CT image. Look at the lung on the right. There’s a white shadow on the upper-right part that isn’t on the normal image. Click it to get the tumor shadows symptom. That’s all we need. Get back to the office and bring up Carcinomatous Pleuritis again. Drag the remaining symptom onto it and make the diagnosis to finish this mission!
Well that was kinda cool. These diagnosis missions aren’t so bad. Now if only Rosalia wasn’t such a joke disease.
Behind the Lies
Welp, here we go again with Naomi. Let’s get started. Like Naomi says, go to the evidence room first and check out the corpse. Quite a few things on it. Examine the star-shaped pattern on the left side of her head. The answer to the quiz here is “The shape of the weapon”. Next, examine the big wound on her chest. The answer to the quiz here is “Cross-Shaped”. Also examine the small wound on her back. Finally, check both palms of her hands. She has wounds on each one.
Now bring up the personal effects. Couple of things to examine here. First the bloodstain on the sleeve, then the hairs on the shoulder. When the quiz here comes up answer “Alma and Joseph have white hair”. That’s all we need. Go back to the office and turn on the computer.
Start by having Little Guy analyze the blood on the sleeve and the hair. When the quiz comes up, answer “Cut”. Next, join the back wound with the chest wound. The answers to the quiz here are “The weapon penetrated the body” and “Her chest”. Now show Little Guy the card you obtain from this. Tell him it’s “Over 20 cm” and “Cross-shaped”. Now fuse this new card you obtain with the “Murder Weapon(?)” card. Answer “Joseph is lying”. Well, that got us our first solid evidence fast.
Turn off the computer and Little Guy will tell you they’re done interrogating Joseph. Open up the recorder and listen to his bull. Click on speech bubble #6 to obtain the “Joseph’s injury” card. Boot up the comp again and fuse that with “Type O Blood”. Wow, our second solid evidence already? We goin’ places! Turn off the computer.
Time to put the facts in order. The answers here are “He hid the real murder weapon”, and “He can’t stand”. You can now visit the Mountain House. So that’s where we’re going next!
Ok, first examine the fireplace. You’ll find the mysterious ashes and the burned hair. Next, examine the clock on the table. The stars on it match the “Bruise on corpse’s head”. Now examine the white shard underneath the table. The answer to the quiz here is “There are no other pieces around”.
That’s all we need, but before we go, there’s a hidden medal challenge here! Look at the table on the corner on the left. Examine the books on it to find this challenge. First question. Let’s see, how many… son of a bitch! How is anyone supposed to know this bullshit? God dammit. Oh well, at least we know it can’t be very many of them since emergencies have to be treated fast. The answer is 7. Second question. Well this one’s not as bad. And you know how it is at this point with this game. If one of the answers is all of the above, that’s always the correct one. The answer is “Everything should be suspected!”. Third question. Well this one’s free. It’s obviously “The subject’s condition”. Fourth question. Whoop, another freebie. Everybody knows circulation is essential to keeping someone alive, so it has to be that. Last question. Eh. This one’s pretty easy too, I mean, it’s telling us THE injured person so that means confirming the number of wounded is pointless, and if there’s only one then triage is pointless as well. And preparing your equipment? Pfft, come on, you always do that ANYWAY. The answer is obviously “Confirm your own safety”. How’s THAT for deduction Roni. Gotta finish the stage to earn the medal now.
Get back to the office and turn on the comp. First show the glass shard to Little Guy. When the quiz comes up, answer “Part of a wine glass”. After that, have Little Guy analyze it a second time. Now, fuse the burned hair with the animal hair, then the clock with the star-shaped bruise. Show the new card you got from this to Little Guy. That’s about it. Turn off the comp now.
Oh hell no. Turns out there’s a second corpse. And it’s the Parker’s daughter. We don’t get a break. Oh well. Head over to the evidence room and check the new corpse. Just a couple things to examine here. The wound on her chest, obviously caused by the same weapon that killed Alma, and the wound on her right palm, the same shape as Alma’s.
Now the personal effects. Couple things here too. The cellphone, obviously, and the hair on her shoulder. Oh come on, the hair is in the exact same place as “on Alma’s Clothes”? You could at least make it SLIGHTLY different. That’s all. Get back to the office and let’s get to fusin’. But before that, gotta show the little guy some stuff. Namely, the cellphone and Abigail’s wound. When the quiz comes up, answer “The murder weapon is the same” and “Depth of wound”. Let’s keep fusing everything that’s the same. The “Familiar Hair” with the “Mysterious Fur”. You’ll get another quiz and the correct answer here is “The killer wore the fur”. Finally fuse the two wounds on their palms, and then fuse “Same Murder Weapon” with “Fur Coincidence”. The answers to the quiz here are “Weapon that killed them” and “Black animal hair”. You’ll get the same killer card.
Get out of the comp now. Little Guy will inform you that new testimony has arrived. First listen to Joseph’s new lie. Nothing special here. Next, listen to the cook and click on speech bubble #10 to get the “Abigail’s Trail” card. Get on the computer again and fuse that with “Two-day old corpse”. When the quiz pops up, answer “Was seen hours before death”. Turn off the computer now and Little Guy will tell you they’ve gotten a suspect. He’ll send you his testimony. Apparently Abigail was having an affair with him? But wait, if Alma is 70 years old, that would mean Abigail has to be like around 40! Who in their right mind would want to have an affair with a 40 year old woman? Christ. Everybody knows once a woman gets past 30 she’s over the hill. But wait, where was I? Oh right. The testimony. Listen to it. “Innocent and beautiful girl”? Get real, she was an old hag! Ok, ok, I’ll shut up now.
Anyway, after listening to it, a quiz’ll pop up. The correct answers are “Record of calls received”, “The chef, Victor”, and “The wife, Caroline”. You’ll get the wife’s recording now. Listen to all of it. Naomi says she sounded unstable. If by unstable she means like a bitch, I agree. Well I guess they make a good couple. The insufferable bitch and the cheating rat bastard. Anyway, Little Guy will tell you that Caroline shouldn’t know that Sean was cheating on her. So then why’d she call him a cheating rat bastard or whatever? Listen to the testimony again and click on speech bubble #7. You’ll get another quiz here. The answer is “Saw him with Abigail”.
Get on the computer again. Have Little Guy analyze the lighter. Obviously it was “Caroline Bowen” that dropped the lighter. Join this new piece of evidence with the Caroline card. You’ll get a rare quiz with only two answers. Obviously we can’t say Caroline is behind the murders for sure. That kind of flimsy evidence may fly in an actual court (get it? because they’re incompetent and convict innocents all the time) but we’re being serious here. Anyway, show the new evidence to the Little Guy. He’ll also have finished analyzing the phone and also tells you the chef’s new testimony is in. Go listen to it.
After you’re done with that, Caroline’s new testimony will come in. That was fast. Listen to it and you’ll get a new card at the end. Now get back on the computer and join Abigail’s Time of Death with the Payphone Call. Abigail was last seen 3 days ago. Type that in and hit OK. She was with Sean Bowen. Although I know “Naomi Kimishima” is tempting. The reason she left was because she got a phone call. It came from a pay phone nearby. Next, join the Mysterious Ashes with the Crazy Monster to get our next piece of solid evidence. Yeesh. Been a while.
Turn off the computer. It’ll be time to sort out the information. A series of questions will come up. The answers are “To destroy the evidence”, “He confessed to the murders”, “Abigail”, “Responded to the phone call”, and finally “He’s lying to protect him”.
After that, get back on the comp. Little Guy will be trying to contact you. Talk to him and Alyssa will make him open the clock to find the real murder weapon inside. What, so you’re telling me they never actually looked inside the clock? What a bunch of incompetent buffoons. Anyway, get the stake analyzed. You’ll see that the handle is the same as the bruise on Alma’s palm. Join the hilt with Alma’s palm bruise. You’ll get another quiz, but man, I don’t know why they even ask some of this stuff when they literally give you the answer right before. Sigh. Anyway, it’s “Alma used the murder weapon”. Now join the “Weapon – Blade” with the weapon inconsistency. You’ll get a new card. Combine it with Alma’s” Weapon”. You’ll get another quiz here. The correct answer is that “She didn’t know it was Alma”.
After that, you’ll get a call from the Little Guy. He’s finished analyzing the wine glass shard. ’bout fricken time. It’ll become solid evidence now. Exit the computer now. You’ll get two questions here. Answer “Joseph”, “The blood on Alma’s sleeve”.
Now get back to the murder scene. You’ll get a recording from Joseph telling you to check above the fireplace. Do it, check the bricks just above where the two family photos are to find Alma’s diary. Now go back to the office. Little Guy will inform you that Alma’s autopsy revealed she had a tumor in the prefrontal lobe. That’s why she went batshit. You’ll now read the diary and get some questions. The answers are “Black bruise on right palm”, “Having auditory hallucinations”, “Wound on right palm”, “Sleeping pills”. You’ll get a crapload of solid evidence. We’re almost done. Get back on the computer and show Little Guy the only piece of evidence that’s yet to be finished. You’ll get a stupid question. Obviously the death Alma couldn’t be behind is Alma’s, we already know she killed Abigail and the other two guys are alive! Geez. The answer to the next question is “Burning the mask and fur” and then “Hiding the murder weapon”. You’ll now have the final evidence.
Conclusion reached! God DAMN but this mission was even longer than all the others. ‘s ridankalus. Anyway, now all that’s left is to present the cards in the correct order. That order is “Alma’s symptoms”, “Details of Abigail’s murder”, “Deceased’s voice: Abigail”, “Two Sigils”, “Benzodiazepine in wine”, “Joseph’s bloodstain”, “Masked Suspect”, “Other Killer”, “Husband’s Lie”, and the original card.
The Simplest Truth
Alright let’s get started! ..what the. Joshua looks too much like Gabriel. Is he your kid or your clone man? Geez. Anyway, let’s start by questioning him. There isn’t really anything to point out, he seems fine. Next, use the stethoscope and the EKG, but they don’t show any abnormalities either.
After you do that though, he’ll start coughing. Auscultate him again. Check his heart and his lungs. The heart is beating faster than normal and he’s breathing pretty rapidly too. You’ll get the tachycardia and tachypnea symptoms. After that he’ll cough again and spit blood on his hand. Gabriel says he needs to do something to get the kid to show his hand, but man, can’t you just, like, slap him on the back of the head and tell him to show you his hand? No need to jump through any hoops.
But oh well. Examine him and click on his shirt to make him lift it up, then have him lift it back down. He’ll get the blood on it. BUSTED. Examine the spot of blood to get the hematemesis symptom. After that the X-ray exam will become available, so go to the lab and check it out.
Bring up the second X-ray image and look at the center of it. There’s a bright white spot there that isn’t on the normal image. Click on it to obtain the “Caved-in gastric wall” symptom. Now go back to the exam room and tell Joshua about it. Question him and he’ll start talking for real now. Click on “…My tummy hurts once in a while. But that’s it!”, and “Yeah, I don’t feel like eating when it hurts. What’s wrong with that?”.
That’s about it. Get back to the office and bring up the candidates. Open up Gastric Ulcer and drag all the symptoms over to it. Then hit diagnose to finish this phase.
Onto phase 2. Since we’re already at the office, take a look at the diagnostic results first. Click on his serum amylase, serum lipase and elastase levels. That’s all here. Now get to the lab.
Bring up the X-Ray image. The abnormality is extremely obvious. He has a shadowing in the upper-right in the shape of a wii nunchuck. Examine it to obtain the “Abnormal Bowel Gas in Intestine” symptom.
Next, bring up the third CT image and look at the center of it and towards the top. His pancreas is swollen. Record it.
That’s all we need, however, before we leave, bring up the fourth CT image. Look at the very top part of the image. See that the normal one extends higher up? Point there and say it’s an abnormality to get the next Gabriel medal! I don’t get why Gabe’s so worried about the thin layer of fat. I mean, it’s supposed to be good if you have less fat!
Anydangway, get back to the office and talk to Joshua again. He’ll finally agree to cooperate fully. Question him again and click on “It’s not just my tummy… my back’s been starting to hurt too…” and “Also… I don’t feel well. I feel like I’m gonna throw up any minute…” then make him lift up his shirt. You’ll see bruises on his belly button and on the left side of his torso. Examine and record BOTH of them.
We got all we need now. Head back to the office to diagnose. Bring up Acute Pancreatitis and drag all the symptoms from the left over to it. They all apply. That ends phase 2.
Let’s start again. Bring up the diagnostic results again and this time check the Serum Calcium, Serum Phosphorus, Serum PRL, Serum Gastrin and the Intact PTH levels. They’re all outside the range. After that, question him once again and click on “Um… I’ve started getting real thirsty. I’ve been going to the bathroom a lot too.” You’ll get Polydipsia and Polyuria.
That’s all. Head back to the office now and open Roni up. Bring up Hyperparathyroidism and drag Polydipsia and Polyuria, High Blood Calcium Level, Low Serum Phosphorus level and high intact PTH level to it. We’ll need to check the x-ray and scintigraphy results to make a concrete diagnosis though, so get back to the lab. Bring up the X-ray. Now look at his index finger. It’s subtle, but the proximal phalange has been eaten away a little on the left side. Record that. Now bring up the scintigraphy. This one’s easy. The normal image has 2 spots and the real one has 3. Click on the third spot to get the Parathyroid Adenoma symptom.
Welp, get back to the office and drag those two symptoms to hyperparathyroidism. That’s all of the symptoms for it, but we still have symptoms left over that don’t apply. Guess it’s back to the exam room again. Joshua says he can’t see, so question him again. Click on “But I totally didn’t see when you came in.” to get the visual field loss symptom and unlock the MRI exam. Also click on “And… my head hurts too… but I’ll keep trying to help you, Doctor!” to get the headache symptom.
Now go back to the lab and check the MRI. Bring up the third image and look at the top left part of the brain. You’ll see a slash there like someone came in with a knife and chopped it like it was a bar of butter. There’s no such chop on the normal image. Point here and say it’s an abnormality to get yet another medal for Gabe and get some awesome dialogue! I also like his face when you find it, I don’t think they used that face in any other part of the game.
Now let’s go back to finding actual symptoms. Bring up the fifth MRI and look at the black hole a bit to the left of the center. The pituitary gland, which is on the upper-right of that black area is extremely swollen compared to the normal image. Record that. You’ll get the “Tumor shadow on pituitary gland” symptom.
That’s all we need to diagnose. Go back to the office now and bring up Pituitary Adenoma. Drag headache, visual field loss, high serum PRL level and tumor shadow on the pituitary gland to it. This is far from all the symptoms though. After you do this, though, RONI will add the Wermer’s Syndrome to the list. Open it up and drag all of the symptoms to it. This time they all match. There is one last symptom though. We need to find tumors in a CT of the pancreas. It will become available now, so head to the lab.
Open up the 4th CT image and look at the pancreas near the center. It’s swollen and way bigger than on the normal image, but we already found that symptom earlier. Look towards the left side and you’ll be able to see a faint shadow not present on the normal image. Point here to find the tumor shadow we’re looking for. Then finally go back to the office again, drag the final symptom to Wermer’s Syndrome and we’re finished.
Man. The tone there was pretty serious. But at least we know everything turns out alright in the end!
Crime of Passion
Man am I the only one who thinks the Raging Bomber’s name is too close to Raging Boner? …actually that probably is why they chose the name.
Let’s begin. As always, let’s start by going to the evidence room and checking out the corpse. There are a few things to examine here. First and most obviously, the huge amount of wounds all over his chest from the explosion. Next, examine the black piece of metal stuck in the big laceration on the chest to the right. Obviously “The explosion blew it there”. Finally, check the right hand. There are two things here. Calluses and some black powder. When the quiz comes up, answer that Aidan Posner’s occupation was “Tennis player” and that he was “Right-handed”.
That’s all we’re getting here. Go back to the office now and listen to the manager’s recording. You’ll get the Unknown Method card. Also Little Guy will send you the revolutionary’s testimony, so listen to that. Afterwards you’ll get a quiz. Answer that he’s “A young male” and that his next target is “A caucasian man”.
Now boot up the computer. There are quite a few things we have to show the Little Guy. First, the lacerations. Answer that the bomb must have been “Within a meter” distance. Next, show him the Mystery Metal. Answer that the piece of metal was “Shrapnel from a bomb”. Finally, show him the “Substance on little finger”.
Exit the computer now. Little Guy will call in to inform you that the bomber already killed the next victim. Geez, this raging boner sure works fast! Anyway, go back to the evidence room and check out the new body. Examine the lacerations on the chest and the carbon dust on the little finger of his left hand. Just like Aidan Posner, who also had it “On a little finger”. “The physical location” is different though, since Aidan had it “On the right little finger”. That’s all we’re going to learn here.
Go back to the office and Little Guy will tell you they found out information on the victim. The bombing site will now become available, so let’s head on over there! Once you’re there, the phone will ring. An it’ll have an extremely weird ringtone. Apparently Stephen had a debt or whatever. But more importantly, let’s get to investigating the scene. First up, inspect the computer on the left. You’ll get the “Nonresponsive computer” card. Next, examine the broken guitar on the floor. You’ll pick it up. After that, move to the right side of the room and check the white shard on the wall above the desk where the bomb went off. At first I thought it was a hole in the wall, but apparently it’s a piece of metal.
Apparently that’s all we’re going to find here, even though there’s CLEARLY more evidence. But oh well. One more thing though, there’s a hidden medal challenge in this room! Check the bookcase on the left part of the room. Specifically, the smaller one closest to the corner, and the second shelf from the bottom. Endoscopy challenge go! First question. Well this one’s pretty straightforward and easy to find out. The esophagus is 25-30 cm, so… go with 25. Second question… god dammit this one’s tough. Who can even know this shit. Jesus christ. Whatever, answer “Ulcerative and invasive types”. Third question now. Mmm. This one’s tough too, but I’m gonna have to go with “Hemostatic Clip” based only on the fact that that sounds like the craziest thing to put in your nose. Not that all of the others aren’t crazy too. Fuck endoscopy. Fourth question. Aw shit. This challenge isn’t going to give us a break huh? Well FINE. You want a fight, BITCH? Based on the fact that anticholinergic inhibits parasympathetic nerve impulses which are responsible for involuntary movements of smooth muscles, which obviously are far more likely have something to do with glaucoma, high blood pressure and hyperplasia… I’ll go with “Impaired Glucose Tolerance”. Oh yes. Last question. Ok, you gotta be shitting me. ALL of these are commonly used. Fuck it, this is retarded, not even satan would know the answer to this. The answer is “Evans Blue”. For some reason.
Anyway, get back to the office now. Time for some mad fusing. But before we start with that, we gotta show Little Guy a LOT of things. First show him the broken guitar to have him geek out over it. Then show it to him a second time. A quiz’ll come up. The correct answer here is “The string orders” and “Left-handed”. After that, show him the nonresponsive computer. Well. That was an easy way to get our first solid evidence. Next, show him the substance on little finger 2. It’s carbon dust too. Then, show him the explosion card. When the quiz here comes up, answer “At very close range”. Finally, show him the mystery metal 2. It’s “Part of a bomb”. Now fuse that with the other bomb fragment. They were both originally part of a “Steel Pipe”. The substance found on them was “Explosive propellant”. Now, join the two substances on little finger together. They’re the same except “It’s on different hands”. After that, fuse the “Callus on right palm” card with “Left-handed owner”. Aidan Posner’s dominant hand was obviously his “Mutant 3rd hand!”. Yeah. Ok fine, it was his “right hand”. Stephen’s was his “Left hand”. Now fuse this new card you get with “Differences in dust”. The carbon dust was “On the dominant hand”. That’ll get us our next piece a solid evidence.
Dang. Losta fusin’ goin’ around here huh? Welp, next up, join the two close range explosions, and then fuse the card you get from that with the “Same bombs” card. “The bombs had the same power”. The distances from the bombs were “Both from very close” Obviously this means they “Were made by the same person”. That’ll get us the next solid evidence. Now fuse the “White male target” with “Newest victim”. When the quiz pops up, answer “He isn’t famous”.
Whew, that’s about it. Exit the computer now and Little Guy will inform you Lang’s testimony has arrived. Listen to it, and after that say that Stephen “isn’t famous”…again. Then answer “Buy a guitar” and “He had a periodic income”. You’ll get an updated card and Little Guy will tell you he sent you the Revolutionary’s recording from before Aidan Posner died. Listen to it, and Naomi will say something was odd. A new topic will come up on the recording, so listen to it again, and this time click on speech bubble #9. You’ll get the Reason for Cutoff card. Get back on the computer and show it to Little Guy, then open the recording a third time, this time choosing “Something in the background” and click on speech bubble #8. The ringing is from the “phone in Stephen’s room”.
Get back on the computer and join “Stephen’s mysteries” with “Rev. is a young male”. When the quiz comes up, answer “It’s Stephen Eldred”. Now exit the computer and the mission will end without a conclusion being reached! I guess we’ll have to wait till the next one.
Seeking Atonement
Aight, going right back into it! As soon as you start you’ll get a series of questions. The answers here are “The deliverywoman”, “Carbon dust”, “The Revolutionary”, “His voice was unprocessed”, and “Why was the Revolutionary killed?”.
Once that’s done, go to Stephen’s room again. We’ll be searching around for really realz this time. Like Naomi says, the area with the most clues is the right side. First grab the delivery form on the floor there. The important evidence on it is “Fingerprints”. Next, examine the doormat. You’ll have to find the footprints that are different from Stephen’s. They’re pretty easy to spot, they’re the two pointy ones on the top and center. Point on either of them and press OK. Next, shine the ALS on the area above the doormat. The corner of the room. You’ll find a hair here. That’s all, I guess. Get back to the office now and boot up the computer.
Ok. Show those three things you found at the scene to the Little Guy. When you show him the hair, you’ll get a question. The answer is “The natural color stands out”. After you’ve shown him those three things, fuse both receipts. The forms have prints from the recipient and “The person who delivered it”. The one who delivered the bomb to the revolutionary was the “Deliverywoman who was at CIFM”. The bluff the raging boner used was “The Revolutionary”, what triggered the explosion was “Opening the package’s lid”. She used a timer for Naomi’s bomb though because she was “Anticipating heavy security”. The revolutionary’s deposits to his his account coincided with “The bomb threats”.
Anyway, now join the two Dead cards. The person making the deposits was “The Raging Bomber”. In exchange the revolutionary would “Make bomb threats”. The last deposit was “a lot more money”. Obviously the reason for that is because “He blackmailed the bomber”. And it was “To pay back loans”. The bomber made the final deposit “To pay him for another threat”. Dang, lotta questions. Anyway, you’ll get the Higgins Beach Deposit card. Fuse that now with the shoeprints. The answer to the question here is “The shoe store has to be checked”. Show the new card you get to the Little Guy. You’ll get a series of questions here. The answers are “She’s a woman”, “Unknown”, “Unknown”, “170-180 cm”, “Has red hair”. Okay. We now have the location of the bomber’s place. Head on over there.
Welp, turns out we’re stuck here now. Apparently the 4 bombs on the table will go off in 10 minutes unless we find out the numbers on the cellphones attached to them. Obviously that’s a lie though. We have all the time in the world. So just relax. We have more important matters to attend to anyway. Namely, the fact that there’s a hidden medal challenge in this room! Check the shelves on the wall with all the boxes and stuff. Specifically, examine the second shelf from the top. The medal challenge will be here. Mm. Orthopedics huh. First question. Well, this one’s not too bad. The answer is obviously “Osteoclastoma” because all the other ones are sarcomas and that’s classified as malignant. Next question. Oh, this one’s not so bad either. The answer is “Extraction takes time”. Come on, EVERYTHING in orthopedics takes time. Why would that be a problem. Third question. Mm, this one’s definitely tougher. The answer is “Spinal osteomyelitis” though. Who knows why. Fourth question. Well… since the ulnar nerve is directly connected to the little finger and the ring finger, and this isn’t the one being paralyzed… then I guess the answer has to be “Thumb – Index – Middle”. Last question now. Ok, let me tell you something. This question is a huge trap. A huge RETARDED trap. I don’t understand it at all. It asks which of the following is NOT a possibility if osteomyelitis occurs in children, and the answer is “Occurance in arms and legs” but in REALITY that is where it MOST COMMONLY occurs in children. Furthermore, occurance is not even a word. So what the FUCK people. Who is responsible for these things? Because he needs to be fired. Geez. Anyway, at least we got the stupid medal.
Moving on. Let’s deactivate those bombs. The clue for the first one is KQJQ and to close the curtains. The curtains have cards on them, and the KQJQ refers to king, queen, jack, queen. The rank of king is 13. 12 for queen. And 11 for the jack. That means KQJQ turns into 13 12 11 12. Examine the first cellphone and punch that in. Easy.
Next one. Ms. raging boner tells us the clues are in the mirror and the phone. First powder the mirror and shine the ALS on it to reveal a message. It says “The sum of the first four is five. They are led by the largest. The sum of the last four is eleven. The smallest leads. What are they?” Next, powder the telephone and shine the light on it to find that the only fingerprints are on the 1, 2 and 3 buttons. That means those are the only numbers used. With that we can know the answer. Since the first 4 digits add up to 5 and are led by the largest, that means the number 3 can’t be used at all because then the sum would be over 5. That means the first number HAS to be 2. And the only way for that to make 5 is for the next 3 digits to all be 1s. Which means the first four digits are 2111. Now for the second half, it says the smallest leads but that it adds up to eleven. That means that a 1 can’t possibly be used because that would only add up to 10. So we can only use 2s and 3s, and the only way to get a sum of eleven with those is 2333. So the number is 2111 2333. Punch that in.
Next bomb. She says the hints are scattered about the room like the stars themselves. Well that’s pretty obvious. Examine the poster of the solar system up on the wall. It has all the planets with their respective astrological signs. These signs are hidden around the room in blood with a number each, so you’re going to have to spray 8 places with luminol to find them. The places are:
1) Under the mirror.
2) On the column in the corner near the window.
3) On the wall to the right of that, under the place where the pliers and wrenches are hanging.
4) On the wall underneath the two posters below the solar system one.
5) Under the table where the 4 bombs are.
6) On the white column in the middle of the room.
7) On the cute bed.
8) On the carpet on the floor beside the bed.
So now we’ve got all the numbers, we just have to put them in the order from closest to the sun to farthest based on the signs beside each number. That order is 3415 8693. Punch that in and that’ll take care of the third bomb.
Fourth bomb now. She asks what would 8947 6231 be if 7 is 1, 3 is 9 but 5 is 5. What she’s referring to is clear if you look at the calculator beside the phone. A calculator’s pad is different from a phone’s in the number placement. The 7 and 1 are switched, the 3 and 9 are switched too, and so are the 8 and 2. But the middle row is the same. So all we have to do is switch those digits in the number she gave us. That would turn 8947 6231 into 2341 6897. Punch that number in to deactivate the fourth bomb.
Since the raging boner obviously has no honor, that means there’s a fifth bomb just waiting to explode. Examine the teddy bear on the cute bed. The bomb’s inside here. Naomi says you have to cut one of the wires, only one of them reaches the bomb and the other two colors are decoys. The note underneath will tell you the cable pattern. You need to start from the bomb and work your way backwards through the cables. The note tells you which color the cable turns into every time it goes through an arrow. Since the starting cable is yellow and we’re going backwards, that means the cable turns blue after the first arrow, red after the second one, and then back to yellow after the third one. That means when you get to the first arrow you follow the blue cable after, then when you get to the second arrow you follow the red cable, then on the next you follow the yellow, then on the next you follow the blue, then on the next the red, and then on the next the yellow one… and this one is connected to the transceiver. So the cable you have to cut is the yellow one. Point on it and press OK.
And with that we’re done with this mission. While these puzzles weren’t exactly HARD or anything, they are way above the usual painfully obvious quizzes, so that’s appreciated.
Proud One
Welp, last Gabriel mission. Dude won’t cooperate until he’s got some orders, so let’s start with the things we don’t need cooperation for. And by that I mean visual examination. First examine his freakishly deformed mutant hands. You’ll get the swollen fingertips symptom. Next, check his left arm, because it’s a different size. You’ll get the swollen arm symptom. Finally, check his eye. Like Gabe says, it’s hanging unnaturally low. You’ll get the Blepharoptosis symptom.
After you find these three things the orders to comply will come, which means we can start questioning him. Click on “I have been experiencing chest pain for several days!”, “I have been coughing up bloody sputum!”, “I have been experiencing numbness in my left arm!”. Well, he sure made it easy compared to all the other patients. The x-ray and MRI exams will become available at this point, so get to the image analysis lab.
Open up the x-ray. Look at the neck at the very top and a bit to the right. You’ll see some subtle white shadowing that isn’t on the normal image. Click here to obtain the “Tumor shadow on the lung” symptom. Well that’s it I guess. Move to the office and open Roni up. Bring up Pancoast Tumor and drag all the symptoms to it. Apparently we need to do a sputum cytology though. Get back to the exam room. When you do, the patient says his chest pain’s gotten worse and Gabe requests yet another x-ray. Another one so soon? Guess it’s back to the image lab.
Bring up the new x-ray and oh. Well this one’s obvious, it’s Rosalia again, and in the same place as last time, on the right side of the image. Click on it and say it’s an abnormality. Afterwards, the cytology will come back positive, which means we can make a diagnosis now. Get back to the office, bring up Pancoast Tumor again and drag the remaining symptom to it. Diagnosis complete.
But of course we ain’t done yet. Begin diagnosis phase 2! First take a look at the diagnostic results. Check the total bilirubin, AST, ALT, y-GTP (yeah I know it’s not a y, fuck you), LAP, PIVKA-II and AFP levels. Geez. So many abnormalities. Next, examine his eyes again. You’ll get the Jaundice symptom. Once you have that, question him again. Click on “As of a moment ago, my stomach has begun to hurt…” to get the stomachache symptom. That’s all we’re getting. Go back to the office now. Bring up Malignant Liver Tumor and drag all the symptoms over to it. They all match, but we still need a CT and a scintigraphy. Go to the image analysis lab now. The CT images are available.
Alright, first bring up the third CT image. Check the top part of the image. You’ll see that the abs are larger than on the normal image. They almost touch the skin. Click here and say it’s an abnormality to get the last medal for Gabe!
Anyway, for the actual symptom, you can basically find it in any of the images. In the first one for example, if you look at the left side you’ll see that the liver extends out farther than on the normal image. Now for the tumor, check the fourth image. Look at the left part and you’ll be able to see a subtle shadowing in the shape of a circle that’s not present on the normal image. Click here to get the tumor symptom. The scintigraphy will now become available. Open it up and WOAH. He’s got a demonic claw squeezing his liver. REALISM. Click on it to obtain the abnormal accumulation in liver symptom. Get back to the office now. Drag the two remaining symptoms to Malignant Liver Tumor and diagnose.
We’re still not done yet though. Time for phase 3! Looks like the patient collapsed. That’s not among the things that can be considered good. Anyway, the only thing you can do at this point is talk to him. Now turns out the army is going to try and stop us from continuing with the diagnosis. Well fuck ’em.
Start by examining his eyes once again. You’ll get the bloodshot eyes observation. Once you have that, talk to him. Click on “Sometimes my muscles hurt so bad that I can barely stand it.”, “But just reading all that stuff gives me a headache sometimes, you know?”, “But sometimes I feel like there isn’t the right balance of ingredients in the food.”, and “I was okay until a moment ago, but it suddenly feels really hot…”.
Now, once you’ve got all that, examine him and click on his shirt to have him take it off. You’ll find two Rosalia bruises on his torso. Click on either one of them to get the pigment spots on skin observation. Go to the office now and open RONI up. None of the diseases on the list totally match the symptoms. For now you’ll just have to narrow things down. Start with Typhoid and drag fever, headaches and pigment spots to it. Next, bring up Acute Severe Respiratory Syndrome and drag fever, headache, and muscle pain to it. Next, bring up Malaria and drag all the symptoms except pigment spots to it. Then bring up Bacillary Dysentery and drag fever to it. Finally, bring up Acute Hemorrhagic Conjunctivitis and drag Bloodshot eyes, headache and fever to it.
That’s all, but we need far more information for the diagnosis. Well screw it. Enough with the charade, let’s just examine the patient before the army gets here. Get back to the exam room. Examine his mouth to get the hematemesis symptom, then make him lift up his shirt again and examine the pigment spots again. You’ll get the skin hemorrhaging symptom.
After some drama, new diagnostic results will become available. Open them up and check his blood pressure, white blood cell count, fibrinogen, APTT, and platelet count. That’s it. Now go back to the office and bring up the new Viral Hemorrhagic Fever. Drag all of the symptoms to it. They all match, but we need an antibody reaction exam before we can diagnose. Obviously they’re not gonna let us. While RONI’s finding something out, get back to the exam room. The last thing we have to do is just talk to the patient. Click on “I…I won’t get the chance to tell them myself.” and “That’s… my last wish…”.
Once that’s done, the exam result will come on. Obviously it’s positive. I mean, was there ever any doubt. That’s the last symptom we need. Get back to the office now and drag it over to Viral Hemorrhagic Fever and diagnose. We’re done.
That was cool. I guess these diagnostic missions really aren’t so bad after all. We’re done with them now though.
Demons and Death
Okay. Welp, turns out we’ll have to start this mission by reconstructing another skull. It’ll be more of the same, except this time you can change the angle of the pieces so I guess it’s more difficult. We won’t get it done by just standing around, get in the evidence room and begin.
Stage 1 first. Let’s start with the bottom part first since it’s the easiest. On the right side, grab the third fragment starting from the bottom. No need to rotate it, just place it on the jaw area. Next, grab the bottom piece from the left side, don’t rotate it either. Place it on the bottom-left part of the skull. Now, grab the bottom-rightmost fragment, rotate it once counterclockwise and place it on the upper right part of the skull. Then get the bottom piece from the left side and place it to the left of the last fragment you placed, without rotating. Next, get the top piece from the right, rotate it once counterclockwise and place it on the left part of the skull. Only four pieces left now. Grab the bottom-right one, rotate it clockwise once and place it on the bottom. Then, get the bottom fragment of the two left on the right side, rotate it once counterclockwise and place it to the right of the last one. Finally, grab the left fragment, rotate it clockwise once and place it on the top, then place the final fragment.
Stage 2! Dang, lotsa fragments here. Well let’s start at the top I guess. The top hole’s got a little pick on the right, see? Well, grab the middle fragment from the right side, rotate it once counterclockwise and place it there. Movin’ on. Grab the top right-most fragment, rotate it once counterclockwise and place it to the right of the first piece you placed. Now, grab the fragment on the right side that looks like a pentagon. Rotate it clockwise once and place it in between the last two pieces you placed. Let’s move to the bottom now. Grab the middle piece of the left side and place it on the bottom-right part of the skull. No need to rotate it. Next, grab the top piece on the left side, rotate it clockwise once and place it on the bottom-left part of the skull. That’ll leave a triangular shape in between the two pieces you just placed. Grab the triangle shaped fragment from the left, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it here. Well whaddya know. It’s looking a lot more complete now. Now you’ll notice there’s an almost square indentation above the bottom-leftmost piece on the skull. Grab the bottom-right fragment from the right side, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it here. That’ll leave an easy hole above it. Get the middle piece from the right side, rotate it counterclockwise once and put it here. Now, grab the bottom fragment from the left side. Rotate it clockwise once and place it right smack in the middle of the skull. Get the last piece from the left side, don’t rotate it and place it immediately to the right of that. Only two pieces left now. Grab the bottom one, rotate it clockwise once and place it on the top, then place the final piece.
Whew. Moving on. Stage 3 now. Damn, lotta pieces here too. Let’s start with the jaw since it’s easy. Grab the middle piece from the left side, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it here. Next, you see the strange white piece on the right side? Why is it white and the others are blue? No idea. Rotate it clockwise once and place it on the very top part of the skull. Next, get the top-rightmost fragment, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it on the top-right part of the skull. Now, grab the second piece on the right side starting from the top. Rotate it counterclockwise once and place it below the last one. After that, get the triangle shaped fragment from the left and place it in between the last two pieces. No need to rotate it. Oh by the way, grab the leftmost fragment, don’t rotate it, and place it on the nose area. Then, grab the bottom fragment from the left side, rotate it counterclockwise once and put it immediately to the right of that last fragment you placed on the nose. Get the last remaining piece on the left now and place it on the bottom-right part of the skull without rotating it. After that, get the bottom-left fragment from the right side, rotate it clockwise once and place it above that last fragment. Almost done now, get the bottom piece, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it on the bottom, then take the top piece, don’t rotate it and place it right above that. That only leaves the final piece.
Last stage. Well, it seems this one will be slightly easier if only because the teeth are easily identified. Let’s start with those. Grab the teeth from the top-right, rotate them clockwise and place them on the bottom-left part of the jaw. Next, grab the remaining teeth from the right side, rotate them counterclockwise and place them above and to the left of the last set of teeth you placed. Finally, grab the last set of teeth on the left side, rotate them counterclockwise and place them to the right of the last one. Okay, you’ll now have part of the left eyesocket reconstructed. Grab the top-left fragment, rotate it counterclockwise once and place it above the partially reconstructed eyesocket. While we’re at it, get the top fragment from the right side, don’t rotate it, and place it on the bottom-left part of the skull. Then, grab the leftmost fragment, again don’t rotate it, and place it immediately to the right of that. Hey, looks to me like we’re almost done. There’s only two pieces on the left side now. Get the top one, rotate it counterclockwise and place it on the top left part of the skull. Once that’s done, get the remaining piece from the left side, rotate it counterclockwise too and place it below that last one. Only fragments on the right side now! Get the top one, rotate it clockwise and place it on the top-right. That’ll leave an easy hole to the right. Get the bottom-right fragment, rotate it clockwise and put it here. Now, grab the largest fragment, rotate it clockwise too and place it above the right eyesocket. Now there’s only a hole in the middle and a hole in the top left (and of course a hole in the very bottom but guess who was stupid enough to swallow that piece?). Let’s take care of the top hole. Grab the bottom fragment, rotate it counterclockwise and place it on the left part. Only two pieces left now! Grab the right one, rotate it counterclockwise and place it at the top, then just place the final piece in the middle and we’re DONE. Sheesh. If you think it’s a pain in the ass to read these directions, trust me, it’s even more of a pain in the ass to write them.
Finally. Let’s move on. Check the personal effects now. There are a few things to examine here. First and most obviously, the huge bloodstains on the front. The unusual thing about it is that “There’s no clothing damage”. Next, examine the breastpocket to find a key. And finally, check one of the pockets below to find a syringe and drugs. That’s all we’re going to find. Get back to the office and boot up the comp.
We’ll start by showing Little Guy all of the things we found from the personal effects. Note that the bloodstain needs to be analyzed twice. Once all that’s done, fuse the two remaining cards. The skull reconstruction stage 4 will come up again, and this time we’ll be able to use the two fragments the dumb cat swallowed to finish it. Grab the piece from the left, rotate it clockwise and place it on the right. Then grab the final piece and place it willy nilly. After some more dialogue and once you regain control, show the skull to Little Guy. When the quiz comes up, say that the guy “Had hemorrhagic fever”. So the pathogen in the bone is “Pure evil!” ok no, “A deadly virus”. Then, “Airborne infection is impossible”. The foci in Chloe were always “Under the bone fragments”. So the route of infection is “Mucous membrane contact”. You’ll get the Unknown Vector card.
Alright, get back to the evidence room and check out the skeleton. Let’s go from bottom to top. Check the left kneecap, then the broken right femur. As we know, the femur is the tastiest bone in the human body. Ok, no, hardest one. Next, check the scratched area on the upper arm bone. I guess that’s it. Get back to the computer now.
Have Little Guy analyze the three things you just found. Show him the joint damage first. When the quiz comes up, answer that “The meniscus was gone”. Next, when you show him the shaved off bone, answer that it was “To obtain a sample from it”. Now, fuse “Bone samples taken” with “Unknown Vector”. Like we said before, the route of infection is “Mucous Membranes”. Although go ahead and try Psychic Power first. The researcher “Shaved the bone”. Obviously he “Inhaled the bone powder”. Moving on. Join Decreased Bone Density with Lost Meniscus. Clearly the person had a “Weakened Skeletal System”. By this time, Little Guy will call you to say the analysis of the syringe is done. Turns out they were antiviral drugs. Join them now with the Weakened Skeletal System. When the quiz comes up, answer “Abnormal calcium consumption”, “Decreased bone density”, “Themselves”, “Fractured femur”, and “Loss of meniscus”. You’ll now get the Dangerous Injections card. Fuse it with the Dust-borne Infection. The person was “Infected with a virus”. Little Guy will now tell you the results of the bloodstain are in, and that it contained saliva. Obviously that means it was “Vomited”. Finally, join that card you get with the dead card. When the quiz pops up, answer “The clothing was unchanged”. That’ll get us the first solid evidence. After that, answer “In the health profession”.
Little Guy will now send you information about age, sex, race, and time of death. Fuse the estimating time of death card with the high concentrations of nitrogen. That means he died “Around 2 years ago”.
Now then. To find out the age, sex and race we have to examine the skull, the eyesockets and the pelvis. Get back to the evidence room and examine those three things on the skeleton. Once you do, go back to the computer and fuse the 2 pelvis chards, the 2 eyesocket cards and the 2 skull cards. The person is “Male”, “Caucasian” and “In their 50’s”.
And that’s it for this mission! Conclusion reached. All that’s left now is to present the cards in the correct order. That order is “Time since death: two years ago”, “Male Skeleton”, “Age Assumed Around 50”, “Caucasian Skeleton”, “Health Professional”, “Conclusive Cause of Death”, and finally the original card.
Carpet of Blue Death
Alright, this is it. The last filler mission. You ready for this? Let’s get this done! First thing you’ll want to do is check on the corpse. Get out of the helicopter and go to the evidence r- I mean, uh… whatever! You know what I mean!
First, examine the cut on the bottom of her left foot. There’s dirt on the wound, which means “She walked on the injured foot”. Next, check the bullet wound on her thigh. The one on the front is “The exit GSW”. The one on the back is “The entrance GSW”. Make sure you examine both. Next, check the right palm. Obviously the wound here was made by “A gun”. After that, check the bullet wound on her chest. The one on the front is “The entrance GSW”. The one on the back is “The exit GSW”. Make sure to examine both. Finally, examine the purple coloring all over her back.
That’s all. Now check the personal effects. Look at the bullet hole on the chest, then the blood around here. A quiz will come up. Answer “It’s splattered around”. That’s it. Get back to the helicopter now and boot up the laptop.
First, show Little Guy the wound on her palm. She raised her hand to “Try to protect herself”. Now join the card you get from this with the bloodstains in chest. The hemorrhaging was caused by “Bleeding from right palm”. Next, show Little Guy the Particles on Palm. They’re gunshot residue, which means “She was shot from close range”. Then show him the hypostasis. It shows that “The corpse was not moved”. Then, it’s possible that “The killer moved her there”.
Alright, moving on. Let’s fuse the obvious things. Namely, the two chest wounds and two thigh wounds. When you fuse the thigh wounds, say that the victim was “Shot from behind”. In the case of the chest wounds, she was “Shot from the front”. Now show both of these two cards to the Little Guy. After that, you’ll be asked a series of questions. The answers here are “Gunshot to the chest”, “Front”, “Defensive wound on palm”, “Gunshot residue”, and “At close range”. Anyway, that’s all we can do for now. Head out. You can move to two locations. The research facility and the flower field. Let’s go to the flower field first.
Why? Because there’s a hidden medal challenge here. So we might as well do it right now. This one’s hidden in the bush under the staircase leading up to the cottage. Hokay. First question. Well this one’s really easy. The answer is “SNs slacken vascular muscles”. Second question. Oh, this one’s easy too. The answer is “It’s created by the adrenal cortex”. That’s false because it’s created by the adrenal gland. Third question. Dang, this one’s tougher. I’m going with “Swollen veins in elderly patient” though, because when you apply an IV you want to make a vein bulge, so swollen veins would be good, I imagine! Alright, fourth question. Ok, this question is BULLSHIT. The correct answer is “The atriums are more to the right” but… they’re clearly not. The left atrium is more to the left. Fuckin’ whatever. The last question is super easy. It’s “Danaus plexippus”. And with that we’re done with this medal challenge. As a whole it was easier than the others I’d say.
Alright, that’s all, now move to the research facility. Guess what. There’s yet ANOTHER medal challenge in here. Move the view all the way to the right and examine the book on the desk. It’s the one with the bluish cover, it’s below the left side of the bulletin board where the x-rays and post-it notes are. Huh. This medal challenge is actually ridiculously easy because it’s actually stuff that you know just from playing the game. First question. The answer is “Yoshikage Tachibana”. The second question is “Assistant Secretary of the HSS”. Third question. Woah, this one’s actually hard. I mean who can actually remember the name of that shop, it’s been ages since we saw that cutscene. The answer is pretty obviously “Jackson’s Grocery Store” though. All the other answers are weird. Fourth question. Uh oh. This one’s even harder! Well we know one thing for sure though. It has to be above 10 and below 15. The answer is 14. Type that in and press OK. Final question! Oh, I remember this one. It’s “Portland Medical Center” for sure. That’s all! That’s Naomi’s final medal. Now you just have to finish the stage to get at it.
So let’s keep going and finish this thing! There are a few things we have to examine here. Firstly, look at the broken glass on the door. Next, check the bullet case on the floor under the door. Then, examine the broken glass on the floor that’s close to where said bullet case was. Now, move to the right and examine the trail of blood on the floor. Next, pick up the broken recorder on the part of the floor above where the blood trail is. Finally, pick up the bullet casing near the chair. That’s all we can do here. Get back to the helicopter and get on the laptop.
We’ll start by having Little Guy analyze everything. Show him the two bullet casings you found. After you do that, a quiz will come up. Answer “A shot was fired”. Next, show him the bloody glass shard, the blood trail, the shattered glass from the door and the broken recorder. He’ll send you a recording from it. Get out of the comp and listen to it now. After you do, Little Guy will inform you that the analysis on the blood stain has been finished. Get back on the laptop and show it to him once again.
Now then. Go back to the flower field. There will be something in the blue deathbed. It’s a bullet casing. Get back to the helicopter now. The analysis results for the glass will be in now. Get on the laptop and join that glass card with the bullet fired from the desk. When it asks you how many times the gun was fired inside, type 2 and press OK. The only evidence that a bullet was fired in the lab is “Glass from the door”. The gun was fired “Near the desk”. Also, show the new bullet casing you found in the flower field to the Little Guy, then fuse it with the Murderous Intent card. When the quiz comes up, answer “A shot was fired here”, and “Rosalia was killed here”.
Get out of the laptop now and Little Guy will tell you the analysis on the glass shard is done. The blood on the glass came from Rosalia, just as we thought. Now combine that with the wound on her foot. Rosalia obviously “Stepped on broken glass”. More importantly why was she bare foot? Who the hell walks around bare foot? Geez. Now join the card you get from this with the “Glass-breaking shot”. When the glass on the door shattered, Rosalia was “Inside the lab”. “She was running away”. The gun was being pointed at “Rosalia”. Little Guy will then inform you that they found Albert’s gun. The maximum number of rounds that can be missing from it is “3 rounds”. And that coincides with the “Number or shots used here”.
After this, the results of the bullet differences will come in. You’ll get a quiz here. The correct answer is “The distance was greater”. You’ll get the gunshot from a distance card. Now fuse it with the shot fired from the entrance of the lab. When Rosalia was shot in the leg, she was standing “In the field of flowers”. The only place the shot could’ve been fired from is “Near the lab’s door”.
That’s all. Get out of the laptop now. You’ll get a quiz here. The answer is “Total of 3 shots”. The last one fired was “In the blue flower field”. That means when Rosalia was killed she was “Collapsed on the ground”. That means the bullet that went through her chest must be in the blue flower field. Go there and check the blue flowers. You’ll find it here. Go back to the helicopter now and show it to the Little Guy. Turns out it really came from Albear’s gun. Join the bullet and the gun now. When the quiz pops up, answer that “Albert killed Rosalia”.
Get out of the laptop now. You’ll receive another recording, so listen to it. After you hear that, the results on Albert’s blood will come in. Turns out there was saliva in them, which means “It was vomited”. After that, you’ll receive a third recording. Listen to it, and you’ll get a quiz. The answer is “An antibody”.
Now then. Get back on the laptop and this time show Little Guy the Blue Deathbed card. You’ll get a series of questions here. The answers are “The killer moved the corpse”, “The bullet in the ground”, and “Defensive wound in her hand”.
After that, like Naomi says, go examine the blue flowers again. You’ll get a picture of them. Now get back to the laptop and show it to the Little Guy. Turns out they’re blue asclepias. Now combine them with Rosalia’s blood. The blue asclepias “Became discolored” because of “Rosalia’s blood”. We’re almost done. Now just fuse the two remaining cards. Answer that the color change was caused by “Rosalia’s blood” again. The vector that spread the Rosalia virus from the flowers to Portland was the “Monarch butterflies”.
And we are done! That’s the last filler mission. There’s only one final thing to do. Get out of the laptop and you’ll receive one last recording. Listen to it, and then all that will be left is to present the cards in the correct order. That order is: “Albert’s Killing of Rosalia”, “Scenario at the Entrance”, “Leg Shot From Entrance”, “Gun Shot In Flower Field”, “Albert’s Vomited Blood”, “Blue Death Blossoms”, “Death on Golden Wings”, and finally the original card.
Ok, first off, let me just say that the medals in this game are a god damn INSULT. How DARE Atlus say it’s the equivalent of the X operations in previous Trauma Centers? What the fuck. Have they lost all sense of shame and dignity? These…things… aren’t even NEAR the ballpark of intense procedures. Hell, they’re not even procedures, they amount to nothing more than fucking riddles. That is seriously all they are. The only trouble you’ll ever have is figuring out what they want you to do. Which is dumb. But it’s there, so we might as well do it. The only cool thing about these medals is that sometimes when you get one you’ll unlock a clip of one of the characters saying something about how awesome you (supposedly) are.
CR-S01
1) Extracted Wermer’s syndrome tumors without locking onto shadows.
Obviously, the Wermer’s syndrome patient is Joshua, which means that you’ll be getting this medal in the Waking From Terror operation. This is ridiculously easy, and you should have gotten this medal just from XSing the operation normally if you did it the way I told you. Check my Waking From Terror video if you really need to see how it’s done. Hell, you don’t even need to memorize where the tumors are. You can search for them with the ultrasound, as long as you don’t press A to make them appear permanently it counts.
2) Extracted the wires without using the ultrasound
This is pretty similar to the previous medal. Except instead of tumors it’s wires. Extremely easy. Just remove the wires in the operations that have them without making their shadows permanently appear with the ultrasound. I mean, that’s what you were supposed to have been doing ANYWAY so quit yer bitchin’. The operations with wires in ’em are History of Fear and Blade of Resolve. Get to it already.
3) Treated every instance of fibrillation with a single use of the defibrillator.
Self explanatory. I guess this is ever so slightly harder than the two previous medals but it’s still pretty damn easy. All you have to do to revive the patient in one use is just hitting Z and B on the green part of the bar. It’s pretty easy, after doing it a few times you should be getting it every time without much effort. I’m not sure if there is any one operation you have to do this in, or if it’s in all the operations, so just do it in all of them to be safe. The operations where you use the defibrillator are History of Fear, Blade of Resolve, and Waking Heart.
4) Got a 100% COOL rating on one surgery operation.
This is a joke right? If you’re like me, you got 100% COOL ratings in ALL the operations so getting it in just one of them is like taking candy from a retarded baby. Aw man, now I made myself sad from imagining that. Anyway, just pick any operation you want and do it. The first one is pretty easy. The last one is easy too. Whatever. Doesn’t matter. Look at any of my videos if you need to see how.
5) Finished the operation before the black bruise moved 4 times.
Another joke. The black bruise this medal is referring to is the one in the Stolen Memories operation, so that’s where you’ll be getting this. It’s the big demonic claw that appears halfway through. And I guess you have to finish before it squeezes the organ 4 times? But seriously, FOUR times? You shouldn’t even be letting it do it once. Check my Stolen Memories video to see how it’s done.
6) Finished a stage without the maximum vitals dropping.
I’m actually not 100% sure how I got this medal. I mean, without the maximum vitals dropping? What the shit does that even mean. However, I do know that I got it after doing the Stolen Memories operation, and the only interaction I had with vitals in that operation was none. Which leads me to believe that the actual requirement for this medal is to beat an operation without raising vitals. Which is what you can do in that one. Check my walkthrough and video of Stolen Memories to see how it’s done.
7) Completely treated the I-Beam before treating anything else.
Of course, the I-Beam this medal is talking about is the one in History of Fear, so that’s where you’ll be getting this. Other than that it’s pretty self explanatory. All you have to do is treat the hugeass beam before treating ANYTHING else, and then finish the operation. Normally you wouldn’t do this if you were trying to XS the operation, but since you don’t have to get the XS to get this medal, it becomes ridiculously easy. Take it as slow as you want, raise vitals with stabilizer a lot and it shouldn’t be a problem.
8) Earned an XS rank for all of CR-S01’s stages.
That’s what this ENTIRE guide is for, dumbass. Go read it. And good luck. Just kidding. Luck is for pussies.
Maria Torres
1) Heard all TALK conversations and finished all operations.
If you didn’t get this medal something is seriously wrong with you. You could make a case for being legally blind. What you have to do for this medal is hit the TALK icon that appears on the right sometimes during an operation. This is NECESSARY to save all patients, so how did you not get it? Anyway, just watch all of my Maria Torres videos or read the fucking walkthrough if you really need to see when every talk icon appears.
2) Didn’t get any black tags until reinforcements arrived.
What the game means by black tags is dead patients. The tags go from green, to yellow, to red, and finally to black when the patient dies. As such, this medal is drop dead easy. If you got any black tags EVER then maybe you should just retire and go play Nintendogs.
3) Didn’t switch victims until the I-Beam was cut.
The I-Beam this medal is talking about is the one in Maximum Annoyance. Normally you would never just sit and watch like a jackass the entire time the I-Beam is being cut, since it’s fucking stupid, but hey. You gotta do what you gotta do. Just stay on the patient the entire time, raising vitals or whatever until it gets completely cut, and then finish the operation. Easy.
4) Finished an emergency stage without using stabilizer once.
Self explanatory. The operation I recommend doing this in is Desperate Rescue since it’s really easy. Go read the walkthrough and or look at my XS video of that operation if you need to see how it’s done.
5) Didn’t get a single black tag in all emergency stages.
Like I said, what the game means by black tags is dead patients. The tags go from green, to yellow, to red, and finally to black when the patient dies. If you let any patients die then you suck, sorry, I can’t do anything about that.
6) Finished an emergency stage in less than 60 seconds.
The operation that you can complete in 60 seconds is Maximum Annoyance. Got it? So that’s where you’ll be getting this medal. Read my walkthrough and or watch my XS video of that operation to see how it’s done.
7) Finished the stage without using the immunoglobulin reagent.
Obviously, the operation this medal is referring to is Missing Girl. That’s the one where you’ll be getting this, and like it says, all you have to do is memorize which color to inject on which patient without using the white vial at all. Easy peasy. I’ve laid it all out for you on my walkthrough of that operation, so go read it or watch the video if you need to see how it’s done.
8) Earned an XS rank for all of Maria’s stages.
That’s what this ENTIRE guide is for, dumbass. Go read it. And good luck. Just kidding. Luck is for pussies.
Hank Freebird
1) Completed a treatment with the scalpel without stopping partway.
Fuckin’ lol. What? You shouldn’t be stopping partway with ANY tool during Hank’s operations. Not ever. What a complete and total joke of a medal. Even moreso than usual.
2) Cut out a section of synthetic bone without stopping partway.
Fuckin’ lol. What? You shouldn’t be stopping partway with ANY tool during Hank’s operations. Not ever. This particular one refers to any of the procedures where you cut out a piece of synthetic bone with the laser. What a complete and total joke of a medal. Even moreso than usual.
3) Completed a treatment using the saw without stopping partway.
Fuckin’ lol. What? You shouldn’t be stopping partway with ANY tool during Hank’s operations. Not ever. What a complete and total waste of a medal. Even moreso than usual.
4) Got a COOL using the drill without stopping partway.
Desire to facepalm…rising…nrrrghghh… I don’t think it’s even physically possible to not get this medal. The world would implode due to such dangerously concentrated levels of fail.
5) Got a 100% COOL rating on one orthopedic operation.
What can I say. This is pretty self explanatory. You don’t really need to even worry about this one. If you’re trying to XS the operations you will get this eventually. Honestly this is pretty sad. A MUCH better medal would be to get 100% cool ratings in ALL of the operations, not just one. I’m pretty sure I got 100% cools in all the operations so just watch any of my XS videos to see how it’s done.
6) Got a CHAIN count of over 10000.
Too easy. The operation I recommend doing this in is Spreading Infection since it’s so long. All you have to do is not get any bads or misses or stopping partway for a little bit until your chain reaches 10000. Which only takes like about half the operation to get there. This becomes even easier once you realize that you don’t even HAVE to go fast or get the XS for the medal. All you have to do is finish the operation. Either way, take a look at my walkthrough of that operation and the videos. Like I said, easy stuff.
7) Earned a COOL rating while shaving a bone within 1 second.
Ok, this is probably the only medal in the game (besides the XS ones) that is at least mildly difficult. The only operation where we shave bones is Broken Heart, so that’s where you’ll be getting this medal. It’s simple, basically when you get to the part with the shaver, you have to hold the control stick ALL the way to the right so that the shaver moves at top speed and then let it go when it’s at the correct place to get the cool. Normally this is EXTREMELY dangerous and isn’t recommended when trying to get the XS, but you don’t have to get the XS to earn this medal, so just go through all the procedures before getting to the shaving part as sloppily as you want. Remember that you have to do it in under 1 second, which is not a lot of time. Just holding the stick all the way to reach top speed isn’t enough, you also have to make it so that it starts moving the very MOMENT it becomes possible for it to move. Which means you should have the control stick held to the right just as the the shaver is about to appear. Don’t hold it too early or the game will just tell you to put it back in the neutral position and you’ll have blown your chance. It’s obviously going to take a few tries until you get the hang of moving the shaver so fast. Don’t get discouraged, just hang in there and keep trying. Finally, note that there are 3 instances when you shave a bone in this operation. It wasn’t until I got a cool on ALL three of them moving them at top speed that I got this medal. I’m not sure if it really means that you have to do all 3 instances in under 1 second each, or if I simply wasn’t fast enough the previous times. Either way, if you manage to do it for one and still don’t get the medal, try doing it on all three in a single operation and see how that goes.
8) Earned an XS rank for all of Hank’s stages.
That’s what this ENTIRE guide is for, dumbass. Go read it. And good luck. Just kidding. Luck is for pussies. Hank’s operations are the hardest in the game, but hey. That just makes them more fun!
Tomoe Tachibana
1) Completed an endoscopic operation without autoretracting.
Exactly what it says. Turbo easy. Just keep your finger off the d-pad for one god damn operation and you get the medal.
2) Completed an endoscopic operation without running into a wall.
Exactly what it says. Just stop sucking for one fucking second and you’ll get this medal. Jesus.
3) Completed one endoscopic operation on a human without using stabilizer.
Obviously that means Chloe’s operation doesn’t count. And obviously some operations are just plain impossible without using stabilizer. The one I recommend doing this in is the very first Tomoe operation because it’s really easy and really short. It’s not hard. Just do it fast, don’t hit any walls or anything stupid like that, and don’t use the stabilizer.
4) Found all victims in 120 seconds.
Joke medal. The mission this medal is referring to is Resolution. What it wants you to do is finish it in under 2 minutes. Which is hilarious, considering it’s possible to finish it in closer to 1. Anyway, just read my walkthrough of that mission and or watch my XS video of it to see how it’s done.
5) Extracted all foreign objects from Chloe within 360 seconds.
Basically what it wants you to do is finish the Chloe’s Change operation in under 6 minutes. The trick to this is to realize that you do NOT have to get the XS. If you make it your top priority to just be as fast as possible without having to worry about being careful then you will EASILY do this. Hell, I did it in under 6 minutes WHILE being turbo careful and getting the XS, so if I can do it like that then you should have no problems at all. I guess you can watch my video of that operation if you need to see how it’s done.
6) Did not allow the final endoscopic patient’s vitals go below 30.
The operation this medal is talking about is, obviously, Time For Rejoicing. The trick, again, is to realize that you don’t have to get the XS. If you just abuse the shit out of the stabilizer and max out vitals every time just before injecting the anti-serum and right afterwards then you’ll get this medal without a hitch.
7) Did not let Yoshikage Tachibana hemorrhage more than 9 times.
Not even close to difficult. Like it says, you have to finish the The Healing Warrior operation with less than 9 hemorrhages. Easy once you realize that you have to move back after treating 3 hemorrhages in front of the bulla and find the cause. Don’t stay there and keep treating the ones that pop up like a punk.
8) Earned an XS rank for all of Tomoe’s stages.
That’s what this ENTIRE guide is for, dumbass. Go read it. And good luck. Just kidding. Luck is for pussies.
Gabriel Cunningham
1) Found an exam result of 777
You get this medal during the Blazing Darkness mission. Right at the very start, open up Tillman’s diagnostic results and check the white cell count. It’s not outside the normal range, but the number is 7.77, which is a lucky number! Say that it’s an abnormality to obtain Gabriel’s first doctor medal.
2) Listened to hunger sounds during auscultation.
You’ll find this one in the very first Gabe mission “Signs of Anguish”. You have to wait until the diagnostic results come in though, it won’t appear before that. Now, there’s a hidden medal at this point. And it’s a bitch to find, I had to do the missions several times to find it. Use the stethoscope on her again. What makes this so hard to find is that you have to listen in a place that isn’t one of the normal 4! Specifically, you have to listen to the stomach. You won’t get it if you listen in the bottom part of the abdomen, that’s the intestines. The stomach is slightly above that but below the chest. The sound will be extremely strong, I was all like WOAH when I heard it. Say it’s an abnormality to get this medal. Also Gabe makes a really weird face when you find it.
3) Found the atrophied kidney in the CT exam.
You’ll find this medal during the Moving Heart mission. Specifically, during the second phase of it when the CT exams become available. It’s glaringly obvious that her two kidneys are way smaller than on the normal picture. Click on either one of them. This isn’t actually a symptom, but it’ll get you the next Gabe medal.
4) Found the break in the wavelength during the EKG exam.
Again, you’ll find this in the Moving Heart mission. At the very start of phase 3 when the EKG exam becomes available, look at the bottom part. Every 8 sections a part of the line will be cut off. Point here and say it’s an abnormality to get another medal for Gabe!
5) Found the thin layer of fat during the CT exam.
You’ll find this medal during “The Simplest Truth”. Specifically, during the second phase when Joshua’s CT exam becomes available. Bring up the fourth CT image. Look at the very top part of the image. See that the normal one extends higher up? Point there and say it’s an abnormality to get the next Gabriel medal! I don’t get why Gabe’s so worried about the thin layer of fat. I mean, it’s supposed to be good if you have less fat!
6) Found the static-filled image during the heart ultrasound exam.
You get this medal during the second phase of the Blazing Darkness mission. When you’re finally able to get Tillman’s echocardiography, look at the first image. Now, compare it with the normal one. It’s subtle, but the entire image is different from the normal one. Click around the center or whatever and say that it’s an abnormality. That’ll net you this medal.
7) Found the deep sulcus in Joshua’s MRI exam.
Like the description says, you’ll find this medal in Joshua’s mission, “The Simplest Truth”. During the last phase when the MRI exam becomes available, Bring up the third image and look at the top left part of the brain. You’ll see a slash there like someone came in with a knife and chopped it like it was a bar of butter. There’s no such chop on the normal image. Point here and say it’s an abnormality to get yet another medal for Gabe and get some awesome dialogue! I also like his face when you find it, I don’t think they used that face in any other part of the game.
8) Found the thick layer of muscle during the CT exam.
This medal is in the last mission. “Proud One”. You have to wait until the CT exam becomes available. When it does, bring up the third CT image. Check the top part of the image. You’ll see that the abs are larger than on the normal image. They almost touch the skin. Click here and say it’s an abnormality to get the last medal for Gabe!
Naomi Kimishima
1) Completed the autopsy Medal Challenge found in Dennis Taylor’s room.
Like the description says, this medal is found in Dennis’s room, in the Locked-Room Mystery mission. Check the books on the shelf behind the table. Specifically, the ones on the bottom. You’ll get a pretty easy quiz. The correct answer to the first question is “Wash hands thoroughly”. The second one is “Gender”. We know this from having played the game already. All that shizzle about the pelvis and whatever. The third answer is- wait, what? What is this crap? Ok, maybe this isn’t as easy as I thought. The correct answer is “31-40”. Hoo boy. Movin’ on. For the fourth question, the right answer isn’t as hard. It’s obviously “All are correct!”. Back in grade school one of my classmates told me that in any multiple choice question, if one of the answers is “All of the above”, that’s always the correct one. Then again, that guy flunked the year so maybe we shouldn’t be listening to him. Either way, it’s logically all of them if you think about it, I mean, obviously you have to check there’s a wound to know if the spray could have come from there, but you also have to check the angle to know if it really did. Moving along. Final question. What the? Ok, forget it. It’s impossible to know this. The correct answer is “12-15 hours”. Apparently. Is that true? Who cares. Once you answer that, you should get the first Naomi medal, but in actuality you have to finish the mission before you get it. Don’t think you can just exit out to the episode select screen and still get it!
2) Completed the surgery Medal Challenge found in Veronica Cage’s room.
Like the description says, you’ll find this medal in Veronica’s room during the second mission “Wandering Girl”. See the broken mirror? And to the left a chair with a teddy bear? And to the left of THAT a bag and some boxes? Check the stack of books on top of those boxes to find this medal challenge. Here we go! First question. This one’s pretty easy. Since the Batista Procedure is complete shit and has been abandoned by the medical community due to so many failures, it’s obvious that it isn’t more effective than a heart transplant. Answer “More successful than transplants”. How’s THAT for deduction Roni. Second question. Oh, another easy one. “Isograft” is obviously the correct answer, come on. Next question. Ok, this one’s tough. Who can even know this crap? Ffffff. The correct answer is apparently “Don’t use forceps on membranes”. Really? What does that even mean. I don’t. Fourth question. Oh, haha, this one is drop dead easy. Man, it looks like ancient folk wisdom still applies because the correct answer is obviously “All of the above”. Final question. And it’s a deceptively difficult one. The correct answer is “To reduce eyestrain in doctors”. Now you’ll be able to get the medal after beating the stage.
3) Completed the diagnosis Medal Challenge found at the accident scene.
This medal is in the same episode as the previous one. Wandering Girl. Specifically, it’s at the highway where Veronica got run over by the redneck. Click on the end of the highway where it curves off into the distance to get it. First question! …ok, well, this one’s pretty easy to look up. Type 111 in the numpad and press OK. The second question is… motherfucker! How is anybody supposed to know this? We don’t even know if they mean how many weeks AFTER the lungs have formed or just how many weeks period. Feh. Either way, the answer is 30 weeks. Moving on. Third question. Well this one’s easy, all we have to do is look at a heart diagram. Answer is the Tricuspid Valve. Fourth question. Well, this one’s pretty easy to find out too. The answer is “Atrial septal defect”. And finally, for the last question, which is pretty easy too just from looking up Blumberg’s Sign, the answer is “Acute Peritonitis”. This’ll net you Naomi’s next medal!
4) Completed the emergency Medal Challenge found in the Parkers’ home.
You’ll find this medal in the mission “Behind the Lies”. In the Parker house, look at the table on the corner on the left. Examine the books on it to find this challenge. First question. Let’s see, how many… son of a bitch! How is anyone supposed to know this bullshit? God dammit. Oh well, at least we know it can’t be very many of them since emergencies have to be treated fast. The answer is 7. Second question. Well this one’s not as bad. And you know how it is at this point with this game. If one of the answers is all of the above, that’s always the correct one. The answer is “Everything should be suspected!”. Third question. Well this one’s free. It’s obviously “The subject’s condition”. Fourth question. Whoop, another freebie. Everybody knows circulation is essential to keeping someone alive, so it has to be that. Last question. Eh. This one’s pretty easy too, I mean, it’s telling us THE injured person so that means confirming the number of wounded is pointless, and if there’s only one then triage is pointless as well. And preparing your equipment? Pfft, come on, you always do that ANYWAY. The answer is obviously “Confirm your own safety”. How’s THAT for deduction Roni. Gotta finish the stage to earn the medal now.
5) Completed the endoscopy Medal Challenge found in Stephen Eldred’s room.
You’ll find this in the “Crime of Passion” mission. Like it says, in Stephen’s room. Check the bookcase on the left part of the room. Specifically, the smaller one closest to the corner, and the second shelf from the bottom. Endoscopy challenge go! First question. Well this one’s pretty straightforward and easy to find out. The esophagus is 25-30 cm, so… go with 25. Second question… god dammit this one’s tough. Who can even know this shit. Jesus christ. Whatever, answer “Ulcerative and invasive types”. Third question now. Mmm. This one’s tough too, but I’m gonna have to go with “Hemostatic Clip” based only on the fact that that sounds like the craziest thing to put in your nose. Not that all of the others aren’t crazy too. Fuck endoscopy. Fourth question. Aw shit. This challenge isn’t going to give us a break huh? Well FINE. You want a fight, BITCH? Based on the fact that anticholinergic inhibits parasympathetic nerve impulses which are responsible for involuntary movements of smooth muscles, which obviously are far more likely have something to do with glaucoma, high blood pressure and hyperplasia… I’ll go with “Impaired Glucose Tolerance”. Oh yes. Last question. Ok, you gotta be shitting me. ALL of these are commonly used. Fuck it, this is retarded, not even satan would know the answer to this. The answer is “Evans Blue”. For some reason.
6) Completed the orthopedic Medal Challenge found in Sandra Liebermann’s room.
This medal is in the “Seeking Atonement” mission. When you get to Sandra’s room, Check the shelves on the wall with all the boxes and stuff. Specifically, examine the second shelf from the top. The medal challenge will be here. Mm. Orthopedics huh. First question. Well, this one’s not too bad. The answer is obviously “Osteoclastoma” because all the other ones are sarcomas and that’s classified as malignant. Next question. Oh, this one’s not so bad either. The answer is “Extraction takes time”. Come on, EVERYTHING in orthopedics takes time. Why would that be a problem. Third question. Mm, this one’s definitely tougher. The answer is “Spinal osteomyelitis” though. Who knows why. Fourth question. Well… since the ulnar nerve is directly connected to the little finger and the ring finger, and this isn’t the one being paralyzed… then I guess the answer has to be “Thumb – Index – Middle”. Last question now. Ok, let me tell you something. This question is a huge trap. A huge RETARDED trap. I don’t understand it at all. It asks which of the following is NOT a possibility if osteomyelitis occurs in children, and the answer is “Occurance in arms and legs” but in REALITY that is where it MOST COMMONLY occurs in children. Furthermore, occurance is not even a word. So what the FUCK people. Who is responsible for these things? Because he needs to be fired. Geez. Anyway, at least we got the stupid medal.
7) Completed the mysterious Medal Challenge in Albert’s lab.
This one’s found in the last mission, “Blue Carpet of Death”. Like it says, it’s in Albert’s research laboratory. Move the view all the way to the right and examine the book on the desk. It’s the one with the bluish cover, it’s below the left side of the bulletin board where the x-rays and post-it notes are. Huh. This medal challenge is actually ridiculously easy because it’s actually stuff that you know just from playing the game. First question. The answer is “Yoshikage Tachibana”. The second question is “Assistant Secretary of the HSS”. Third question. Woah, this one’s actually hard. I mean who can actually remember the name of that shop, it’s been ages since we saw that cutscene. The answer is pretty obviously “Jackson’s Grocery Store” though. All the other answers are weird. Fourth question. Uh oh. This one’s even harder! Well we know one thing for sure though. It has to be above 10 and below 15. The answer is 14. Type that in and press OK. Final question! Oh, I remember this one. It’s “Portland Medical Center” for sure. That’s all! Now you just have to finish the stage to get at it.
8) Completed the general Medal Challenge found in the Asclepias field.
The last medal is found in the last mission as well. Go to the flower field where Rosalia died. It’s hidden in the bush under the staircase leading up to the cottage. Hokay. First question. Well this one’s really easy. The answer is “SNs slacken vascular muscles”. Second question. Oh, this one’s easy too. The answer is “It’s created by the adrenal cortex”. That’s false because it’s created by the adrenal gland. Third question. Dang, this one’s tougher. I’m going with “Swollen veins in elderly patient” though, because when you apply an IV you want to make a vein bulge, so swollen veins would be good, I imagine! Alright, fourth question. Ok, this question is BULLSHIT. The correct answer is “The atriums are more to the right” but… they’re clearly not. The left atrium is more to the left. Fuckin’ whatever. The last question is super easy. It’s “Danaus plexippus”. And with that we’re done with this medal challenge. As a whole it was easier than the others I’d say.
Conclusion
The HELL I just walked home from Mexico! Somebody cook me some damn Emeril food! Jesus H. This guide’s been way too much work. I’ve practically been writing nonstop for over a month. Never expected this shit to reach over 500 KB. It’s just a god damn Trauma Center game. Fuuuuuck me. I’m so tired. I’m never doing anything ever again in my entire life. Wait, didn’t I say that last time? But this time I MEAN it. Not doing anything. Nope. Not doing anything.
Anyway, so Trauma Team. This game was alright. It was pretty fun, I mean, it’s hard thing to fuck up, but it’s also a disappointment compared to Second Opinion for obvious reasons. Namely, the stupid “realism” they injected into it (except they really didn’t), which they CLAIM is why they removed the GUILT-like operations. Those were the most fun ones in the entire game you MOTHER FUCKERS. Not only that, but they replaced the awesome extreme operations with some bullshit medal challenges? God DAMN you Atlus. And then to rub salt in the wound they go and make the game in general too easy. Oh sure, there are a couple operations that are very hard to XS, but the vast majority are way, WAY too easy and lenient. In most of them they even let you miss once, twice, thrice or even FOUR times and still get the XS. What the HELL people. In all the other Trauma Centers if you miss once that’s IT. You are DONE. There is no excuse for this. Oh and don’t even get me started on the awful sorry excuse for a final operation. Not only was it beyond easy, it was nowhere NEAR as amazing as the ones in the previous games. God damn you Atlus, why have you done this to me? I just hate you SO MUCH.
So yeah, Trauma Team is just a step backwards from Second Opinion, to be honest, just like New Blood. But hell, Trauma Team has even given me an appreciation for what we had back in New Blood. Sure, it may be a completely broken and unbalanced game with the stupid Valerie operations, but at the same time think of all the good things it had! It had STIGMA, it had extreme operations, it actually had the Healing Touch (and even implemented it properly, unlike Second Opinion!), and it was consistently hard. Trauma Team has none of this.
Then there’s the filler missions. Those aren’t what Trauma Center is about, why even have them? But ok, ok, I will admit that the Gabriel diagnosis missions are actually pretty cool. His personality makes them fun, the interaction with the patients is entertaining, it’s a good place for drama and gets you more invested in the actual surgery part of the operation when you’ve been following the whole thing from the beginning on the diagnosis side, and also finding the abnormal unexplained things leading up to the Rosalia virus was cool. Just imagine if that was applied to something like GUILT. We could have awesome things happen (“What the HELL is that in her heart?! It’s…looking at us?!”). So I guess diagnosis is alright. Now, forensics on the other hand, that has GOT to go. Those missions are way too long, way too easy and way too boring. I was already bored and couldn’t wait for them to end so I could do actual operations when doing them for the first time. You can imagine how bored I was during the SECOND time I was doing them.
But anyway yeah. A disappointing Trauma Team, a slew of less than stellar handheld SMTs… I guess Atlus couldn’t stay amazing forever. Trust me, no one is sadder about this than me. I wish we could go back to the golden days, but I don’t think that’s going to happen. All we’ve got left of that is memories and our old games. Sigh. Now I’ve gone and depressed myself. Anyways, thanks for reading. I hope you enjoyed the guide. Maybe we’ll meet again. But then again maybe not.
Stay crispy,
~S.A. Renegade
Comments
Spent a long time re-coding this entire guide since on the old site it was all paginated ‘n’ shit. Had to manually give every mission a title and an anchor link to make the table of content links work. But we in there now son. Just gotta do it for a bunch of Renegade’s other guides too now.
Any errors with the table of content links or the mission titles are mine, not Renegade’s.
Gotta pay respects to whoever wrote this guide 13 years ago, and i hope they are doing fine 🔥
In the process of making my own XS video series, and i couldn’t find better tips than the ones found here.
Hope you didn’t just steal it RenardBOT.